Software Installation

Transcription

1 AS/400e Software Installation Version 4 SC

2

3 AS/400e Software Installation Version 4 SC

4 Note Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the information in Appendix I. Notices on page 235. Fifth Edition (May 2000) This edition replaces SC This edition applies only to reduced instruction set computer (RISC) systems. Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1997, All rights resered. US Goernment Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

5 Contents Tables ii About Software Installation (SC ) ix Who Should Read This Book ix How To Use This Book x Conentions and Terminology Used in This Book.. xi Prerequisite and Related Information xii Information Aailable on the World Wide Web.. xiii Summary of Changes to Software Installation x Part 1. Software Installation Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process Essential Software Installation Concepts Software Installation Procedures Oeriew... 5 Mixed Release Support-Oeriew Prepare for Install-Oeriew Prepare for Install Option Descriptions Chapter 2. Where to Begin Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 19 Installation Preparation Checklist Beginning Tasks Locate and Reiew Information Verifying Your Software Order Setting System Values Before Installing Moed or duplicated IBM-supplied product libraries Optical Library Users Ordering and Applying Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) Permanently Apply Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) Ealuate Release-Leel Interoperability Preparation Program Temporary Fixes Required Before Installing V4R5M0 Software Ordering the Current Cumulatie PTF Package 38 Ordering Group PTFs Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation When to Use Manual Installation When to Use Automatic Installation Use Prepare for Install Creating and Customizing an Installation List.. 40 Cleaning Up Your System Storage Space Ealuating Your Disk Storage Needs Verifying the Integrity of System Objects Additional Considerations Estimating Installation Time Gathering Performance Information Prepare to Install Softcopy Information Planning for National Language Support Identifying Changes to IBM-Supplied Objects.. 55 Basic System Hardware Considerations Ending Tasks Ensuring Two-Phase Commit Integrity Stopping the Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 and Ending Application Serers Notes About Saing your System Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation Before You Begin Task 1. Using Automatic Installation Task 2. Verifying Automatic Replacement Completion Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Before You Begin Task 1. Replacing the Licensed Internal Code Task 2. Replacing the Operating System Task 3. Replacing the Licensed Programs Task 4. Verifying Completion of Manual Replacement Correctie Action for Common SRCs Installation Recoery after SRCs Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) Before You Begin Task 1. Doing the Initial Program Load (IPL) Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) Before You Begin Task 1. Installing the Operating System Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs Chapter 8. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition Before You Begin Task 1. Installing the Licensed Internal Code on a Secondary Logical Partition Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language Before You Begin Task 1. Changing the Primary Language Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2000 iii

6 Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs Before You Begin Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language Before You Begin Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation Part 2. Appendixes Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 147 Where You Begin Recoery Starting Point for Automatic Installation Recoery 148 Licensed Internal Code Recoery Operating System Recoery Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again 155 Starting the Manual Installation Process Again INZSYS Recoery Information Starting from a Power Off Condition Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Manual Install Options Using Option 1. Install All Automatic Install Options Using Option 5. Prepare for Install Displaying, Installing, Deleting, and Saing from a List Using Option 10. Display Installed Licensed Programs Using Option 11. Install Licensed Programs Using Option 12. Delete Licensed Programs Using Option 13. Sae Licensed Programs Secondary Languages Options Using Option 20. Display Secondary Languages 166 Using Option 21. Install Secondary Languages 167 Using Option 22. Delete Secondary Languages 167 Redistribution Completion Status Using Option 50. Display Log for Messages Related Commands Appendix C. Licensed Program Information Media Distribution Set Software License Key Obtaining and installing software license keys 173 Setting the Usage Limit Software Inentory Tool (SWIT) Licensed Program Sizes Licensed Programs-Installation Notes Notes About 5769-SS1, OS/ Notes About Other Licensed Programs Notes and Packaging Details for Client Access 179 How to Remoe Licensed Programs Determining What Unused Parts of Products to Delete Notes About Deleting Licensed Programs Procedures for Deleting Licensed Programs Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time Common Methods of Estimating Installation Time 185 Types of Products Installed Installation Processes Conditions that Affect Installation Time Multiprocess Installation Oeriew Additional Requirements for Multiprocess Checklist for Estimating Installation Time Estimates for the Operating System Work Sheet 1. Licensed Programs Licensed Program Times Estimating Time for Conersions Data Protection Mechanisms Database Cross Reference Files Appendix E. Additional Installation Information Blank Displays System Password Installed status alues The Media Description Report Licensed Product Table About Logical Partitions The System Reference Code (SRC) Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew Installation and Recoery Implications for Models 600 and How to Set Up an Alternate Installation Deice 230 How to Disable an Alternate Installation Deice 232 How to Verify and Select an Alternate Installation Deice During a Manual Installation Appendix I. Notices Trademarks i AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

7 Index Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You Contents

8 i AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

9 Tables 1. Supported Releases for Software Upgrades Checklist for Replacing a Release Checklist for Replacing a Release within a Logical Partition Checklist for Installing Software on a New AS/400 System Checklist for Adding Licensed Programs and Secondary Languages Checklist for Changing the Primary Language Checklist for Adding a New Disk Unit Checklist for Installing a Cumulatie PTF Package Checklist for Installing a Hardware Upgrade Beginning Tasks Order and apply program temporary fixes (PTFs) Choose the Manual or Automatic Installation Process Use Prepare for Install Additional Considerations Ending Tasks Ordering PTF Cross-Reference Summaries Distribution Media Labels-Description B29xx_02 Standard Set Products B29xx_03 Standard Set Products L29xx_01 Locked Set Products Verify these System Values Before Installing Software Interoperability-Specifying Target Release PTFs for Earlier Systems in a Network to Enable Exchanging Data PTFs for Earlier Systems in a Network with ObjectConnect/ No-charge licensed programs that are aailable with V4R5M0 OS/ IBM Supplied Descriptions that Retain Customized Information Naming Conentions Manual Installation for a Secondary Logical Partition Common SRC codes Type of failure Where to start recoery Where to start recoery for the automatic installation process Return code for Licensed Internal Code - Error display Operating system problems Error messages Error messages Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again Starting the Manual Installation Process Again Client Access repackaging information Deleting Unwanted Licensed Programs and Optional Parts After the Installation Is Complete Estimated Installation Time for Base OS/400, in Minutes Estimating Licensed Program Installation Time: Multiplication Factor Licensed Program Time Information Database Cross Reference Files Multiplication Factors IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release Older (pre-v4r5m0 hardware) SRC Format and Terminology New (V4R5M0 hardware) SRC Format Disk Configuration Warning Messages Feature Codes Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2000 ii

10 iii AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

11 About Software Installation (SC ) Welcome to the AS/400 Software Installation book. The organization of this book should make it easy for you to prepare for and perform your installation. IBM wants your software installation process to be easy. This book contains task-oriented instructions to install licensed programs on an AS/400* system that uses IBM optical and tape distribution media. Instructions for specific tasks are: Preparing to install a new release of software Replacing a release by using either the automatic or the manual installation process Installing licensed programs on a new AS/400 system either with or without the operating system already installed Installing licensed programs on system with secondary logical partitions Installing additional licensed programs Installing a secondary language Who Should Read This Book Changing the primary language by using secondary language media Recoering from errors during licensed program installation processes This book contains instructions and a recommended path for each installation task. If you choose options on any displays other than those that are recommended in this book, make a note of which option you choose. You will need this information later for recoery procedures if a failure occurs. This book does not contain information about performing a Complex Instruction Set Computer (CISC) to Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) upgrade. This book does not contain information about installing software products on personal computers. This book is for the system operator or office superisor who is responsible for installing the licensed programs or operating system. The person with these responsibilities must hae security officer authority, QSECOFR, for the system. You should be able to operate the following deices: Consoles, including operations console or twinaxial console Remote control panels (if you hae ordered it) Optical deices that support optical media Tape libraries Tape units For information about how to operate these deices, refer to the operator s guide for each deice. You should also know how to do the following tasks on your AS/400 system: Sign on and off your display station Use function keys on your display station keyboard Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2000 ix

12 Use displays and menus Enter and use commands Install program temporary fixes (PTFs) Change the system operation mode and initial program load (IPL) source on the system unit control panel Restart your system or logical partitions: perform an IPL Information about how to do these tasks is in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC , or in the Information Center. To locate the Information Center, see Prerequisite and Related Information on page xii. How To Use This Book Software Installation gies step-by-step instructions. The installation process depends on whether you are upgrading to a new software release, installing a new system, or doing other tasks. (Other tasks might include installing additional licensed programs or secondary languages.) You will not need to read this whole book for your particular installation. Here is an outline to familiarize you with the chapters you will use for your situation. If you are new to the AS/400 software installation process: Please read the rest of the information in this About Software Installation section. Read Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process on page 3. Continue with the chapters that are listed in the next bullet item. If you are familiar with the AS/400 software installation process: Read the Summary of Changes to Software Installation on page x to find out what has changed or is new since the last software release. Start with Chapter 2. Where to Begin on page 11 to find out about your release upgrades and which chapters you will need to perform your particular installation. Always read and perform the steps in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19 for pre-installation tasks. These tasks are necessary to aoid installation problems. Then you will choose one or more of the installation chapters, chapters 4 through 11, to perform specific installation tasks. When you hae performed the aboe tasks, finish your installation by using the Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141. The appendices gie specific reference information. Examples might include looking up a product in the Licensed Product Table on page 214, a specific procedure license key installation, information about the Work with Licensed Program menu, and more. Reiew the Table of Contents to find the reference information that you might need. If you are changing your primary language, there are different methods depending on your situation. To change your primary language, you would choose one of these chapters: Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation on page 71 x AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

13 Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) on page 101 Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language on page 119 Start by using the tables in Chapter 2. Where to Begin on page 11 to determine the best method. If you are installing software on logical partitions, see the following topics: Read Conentions and Terminology Used in This Book. Read the most current information about logical partitions in the Information Center and the Logical Partitioning Web site. See Prerequisite and Related Information on page xii for the location of this information. For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. Read the Summary of Changes to Software Installation on page x. Read Chapter 2. Where to Begin on page 11, to determine the chapters you will use to install software on logical partitions. Specifically, read the following sections: - Table 3 on page 13, Checklist for Replacing a Release within a Logical Partition - Table 4 on page 14, Checklist for Installing Software on a New System Conentions and Terminology Used in This Book When a release is specified in this manual, the short form describes the release as shown below: V4R1M0 Version 4 Release 1 Modification 0 V4R2M0 Version 4 Release 2 Modification 0 V4R3M0 Version 4 Release 3 Modification 0 V4R4M0 Version 4 Release 4 Modification 0 V4R5M0 Version 4 Release 5 Modification 0 If an x appears in any of the positions that contain numerals, any supported alue can be used. Optical media or optical deice The terms optical media or optical deice encompass arious types of media technologies and deices. Some examples are: Compact Disk-Read Only Memory (CD-ROM) and Digital Versatile Disk-Random Access Memory (DVD-RAM). A Digital Versatile Disk (DVD) deice will accept DVD-RAM or CD-ROM as installation media. Also, DVD-RAM proides rewritable optical storage technology, which is adantageous for system backups and recoeries. The DVD, aailable by hardware Request for Price Quotation (RPQ) in V4R4M0, has expanded function in V4R5M0. Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 (Integrated Netfinity Serer) is the new name for Integrated PC Serer (IPCS) and File System IOP (FSIOP). Secondary Logical Partitions When you work with secondary logical partitions: The word system in this book is synonymous with the word partition, except in those cases where full or entire system. Full About Software Installation (SC ) xi

14 system means the primary partition and all participating secondary partitions. System is also synonymous with serer. The words alternate installation deice are synonymous with the words alternate IPL deice. The words control panel refer to the Work with Partition Status display. For secondary logical partitions, you change operation mode, change IPL source, and iew system reference codes (SRCs) from the Work with Partition Status display (irtual control panel). You do not use the physical control panel of the system. For more information, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. Prerequisite and Related Information The documents that are listed and described in Locate and Reiew Information on page 24 are highly recommended as supplemental information to this book. You may also find the following references useful: The AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, contains a ariety of information topics and tasks, from operations, networking, programming, and troubleshooting to logical partitions. It has a useful AS/400 glossary with explanations of terms and acronyms. You will find the link to the AS/400 glossary in the footer of any Information Center page. The AS/400 Information Center is also aailable at this Web site: The AS/400e Softcopy Library CD-ROM, SK3T-0118, is packaged with the AS/400 Information Center CD-ROM. The Softcopy Library contains electronic ersions of books in the AS/400 library. Use it to look up information in books that do not ship with your system. If you will set up logical partitions, refer to the articles about logical partitions within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic in the Information Center. Also, refer to articles on planning and how-to information at the Logical Partitioning Web site: If you are using auxiliary storage pools, deice parity protection, or mirrored protection, you should obtain the book Backup and Recoery, SC This information is also aailable in the AS/400 Information Center. Before you begin production work on your system, be sure you hae adequately protected your system from unauthorized use. To plan and set up security on your system, refer to the System Administration, Aailability, and Maintenance - Security - Basic System Security topic in the AS/400 Information Center. You can access this topic on the Information Center CD-ROM or at this Internet location: If you are interested in C2 security, refer to the book Security-Enabling for C2 (V4R1), SC xii AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

15 Information Aailable on the World Wide Web More AS/400 information is aailable on the World Wide Web. You can access general information from the AS/400 home page, which is at the following uniform resource locator (URL) address: To access workshops on adanced AS/400 functions, use the Technical Studio, located at: You can also access the AS/400 library on-line from the Technical Studio. The Information Center proides a new path to AS/400 technical information. It allows fast, easy access to common procedures, example scenarios and program code, reference lookups, and background conceptual information. The Information Center is the starting point for all your technical information needs. You can access the Information Center, as well as link to a wide ariety of Internet sites with crucial technical content. You can access the AS/400 Information Center at this Web site: If you do not hae access to the Internet, you can access the Information Center from the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, that arries with your system software. For information about logical partitions, refer to the articles on planning and how-to information at the Logical Partitioning Web site: Current Program Temporary Fix (PTF) information and Preentie Serice Planning (PSP) information is aailable at: World-wide, you can select, order, and take deliery of AS/400 program temporary fixes (PTF) oer the Internet. AS/400 Internet PTFs (downloads) are aailable at the following Internet location: About Software Installation (SC ) xiii

16 xi AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

17 Summary of Changes to Software Installation With eery new release of the operating system (OS/400) or new line of AS/400 systems comes necessary changes to the software installation process. Here are the changes you should be aware of for installing the V4R5M0 operating system software. Mixed releases across logical partitions: You can install mixed releases of software on the logical partitions in these examples, except for the case in the note below: When you hae V4R5M0 installed on your primary partition, you can install V4R4M0 on your secondary partitions. When you hae V4R4M0 installed on your primary partition, you can install V4R5M0 on your secondary partitions. Secondary partitions can be either at V4R5M0 or V4R4M0. Note: Here is the exception to the aboe examples. New AS/400e systems that were introduced along with V4R5M0 software require V4R5M0 on all logical partitions. This applies to both the primary partition and all secondary partitions. Optical media and optical deices: The words optical media used within this book refer to either CD-ROM or DVD-RAM. The words optical deice refer to either CD-ROM or DVD deices. DVD rewritable storage technology: You can use DVD rewritable storage technology and deices for many purposes. For example, if you hae a DVD deice as an alternate installation deice, in V4R5M0 you can use it for the following functions: Backing up and recoering the system Installing, saing, and restoring licensed programs Copying, loading, and installing program temporary fixes (PTFs) Storing main storage dumps Performing other sae and restore functions Copyright IBM Corp. 1997, 2000 x

18 xi AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

19 Part 1. Software Installation Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

20 2 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

21 Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process The software installation process has three phases: 1. Pre-installation actiities 2. The installation process 3. Post-installation actiities Figure 1 on page 4 shows an oeriew of the installation process. (Your installation process might not include all of the topics that are shown in the figure.) 1. Pre-Installation Actiities: You can do these actiities days or een a few weeks in adance. For planning, use Chapter 2. Where to Begin on page 11, which directs you to the appropriate instructions for your installation process. For preparing and saing your system, use Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19 to guide you through the actiities you need to do before installing your new release. Some of these actiities include erifying your order, checking the amount of aailable disk space, backing up your system, and cleaning your media deice. Appendix E. Additional Installation Information, includes more information about the installation process. Be sure to read it before you begin installing this release. 2. The Installation Process: The installation process begins when you start performing the instructions in one of the procedural chapters, which are chapters 4 through 11. For example, to upgrade to the V4R5M0 release, you may hae chosen the automatic installation as described in Chapter 4. The automatic installation process installs the Licensed Internal Code, the operating system (OS/400), and licensed programs. You would hae minimal interaction with the system, except to load the optical distribution media and to monitor the system. Your only installation actiity may be using Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 or Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135. Or, you can perform these actiities after an automatic or manual installation. See Software Installation Procedures Oeriew on page 5 for a broader explanation of the procedural chapters. 3. Post-Installation Actiities: The last step of each procedure directs you to use Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 to complete the installation process. You may be directed to additional steps, such as saing your system and performing installation actiities on workstations for Client Access products. Other actiities could include customizing your system, setting usage limits for user-based priced products, or loading online books. Before you begin production work on your system, be sure to adequately protect your system from unauthorized use. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

22 Before Installing Installation Process After Installing Plan Prepare System Sae System Automatic Install Install Licensed Internal Code Install Operating System Install New Release of Currently Installed Licensed Programs Customize Install Softcopy Information Library Additional Actiities (such as Client Access/400,... ) Sae System Install Additional Licensed Programs Install Secondary Language Complete Install Load and Apply Cumulatie PTF Tape IPL Wait for Initialize System (INZSYS) to Complete RV3D005-1 Figure 1. Oeriew of the Installation Process If a failure occurs during the installation process, Appendix A. Recoery Procedures contains information that can help you determine the problem and the necessary recoery steps. Essential Software Installation Concepts Before you begin, you should know what to expect from the installation process you use and the possible effects of using mixed releases on AS/400. Software Installation Procedures Oeriew on page 5 proides an oeriew of the installation procedures that are used in this book. Mixed Release Support-Oeriew on page 7 describes how support for mixed releases interacts with the installation procedures that replace a release of software. (You replace a release when you use the automatic or manual installation procedures.) At some 4 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

23 point, each installation procedure in this book uses the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu. Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu on page 161 describes the options shown on the LICPGM menu. Software Installation Procedures Oeriew This topic describes the installation procedures that are used in this book. You will see included with these procedures some additional notes about installing software on a system with logical partitions. Refer to About Logical Partitions on page 220 for a brief description of logical partitions. Installing Software on a New System On a new system, the operating system might or might not be installed already. The procedures in Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) on page 101 help you to install the operating system and licensed programs. When you use Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) on page 91, you may already hae licensed programs installed. If you are creating logical partitions on a new system, you must use the procedures in Chapter 8. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition on page 113 and Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) on page 101, for all newly created secondary partitions. You must install software separately on each primary partition and each secondary partition. Replacing Licensed Programs, Automatic or Manual Install Process If you are replacing your existing software, use either Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation or Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. You should be aware of the similarities and differences between the two installation methods in this section. You should also understand how support for mixed releases of licensed programs can affect the results of these installation procedures. Topic Mixed Release Support-Oeriew on page 7 describes the impact that mixed release support has when you replace a release of software. The automatic installation method replaces your existing release with minimal user interaction. (You will need to load media olumes when you use this method.) The language feature code on the distribution media is installed as the primary language on the system. The automatic installation process keeps the current enironment (AS/400 or System/36 Enironment), system alues, and configuration. The automatic installation process is recommended for use with most AS/400 systems. Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation documents this method. The manual installation method interactiely replaces your existing release by using the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu. Displays that require responses appear on the console. During a manual installation you can change installation options and perform tasks such as those described in When to Use Manual Installation on page 40. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation documents this method. Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process 5

24 If you hae existing logical partitions, you must install the Licensed Internal Code, Operating System/400, and licensed programs separately on each partition. Whether you use Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation or Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation, you must perform the installation process as separate tasks on each partition. What Installs with Either Method: Both installation methods replace your currently installed leel of Licensed Internal Code and Operating System/400. Both installation methods can replace your currently installed licensed programs if the LICPGM menu on the target release supports those licensed programs. If you use the Prepare for Install option on the LICPGM menu to customize an installation list, the system also installs any additionally selected products. Read more about the Prepare for Install option in Prepare for Install-Oeriew on page 7. What Does Not Install with Either Method: In certain conditions, some licensed programs are not installed during procedures that replace a release. When the distribution media contains non-renewed licensed programs that are at the same leel as the licensed programs that you hae installed, the installed licensed programs remain unchanged. (Non-renewed licensed programs are those that do not hae a new release leel since the last release.) This preseres any program temporary fixes (PTFs) that are applied to the currently installed licensed programs. See Mixed Release Support-Oeriew on page 7 for more information about mixed releases licensed programs. If you do not use the Prepare for Install option of the LICPGM menu, the procedures that replace an existing release do not install new licensed programs or new optional parts. Licensed programs and optional parts are considered new if they are being added to your system for the first time. New licensed programs and new optional parts can be introduced with a new release of the operating system or independently of it. If you do not use the Prepare for Install option, you need to use the section Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs to install new licensed programs or optional parts. The instructions for both automatic and manual installation methods direct you to Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 at the appropriate time. Adding Licensed Programs If you are adding additional licensed programs or optional parts of licensed programs, you use Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127. This section uses option 11 (Install licensed programs) of the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu. When you use option 11, you select licensed programs or optional parts from a list. Typically, you use option 11 when you need to install a new licensed program or to replace a single licensed program. The licensed program or optional part that you select is always installed from the media. If the licensed program is already installed, it is replaced. This is true een when both the system and the media hae the same leel of the licensed program. (When you install a leel of a licensed program oer the same leel that is already on your system, any PTFs you had applied to the licensed program may need to be applied again.) Beginning in Version 4, you can add new licensed programs to your system while replacing a release of software. To do this use the Prepare for Install option of the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Refer to Prepare for Install-Oeriew on page 7 for information about how this option functions. 6 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

25 Adding or Changing the National Language Support When you add a secondary language, you add additional language objects for the licensed programs that are installed on your system. These additional language objects are a different national language ersion (NLV) than the system s primary language. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language, adds language objects for all of the installed licensed programs that are found on the media. When you change the primary language you replace the existing language objects. Depending on the procedure that you use, you could also be replacing program objects. Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language, replaces only the language objects that exist on your system. See the topic Planning for National Language Support on page 53 for more information. Mixed Release Support-Oeriew Licensed programs do not need to hae the same release as the OS/400. This is referred to as a mixed release enironment. Also, licensed programs can be packaged so that the product s options are not at the same release as its base. For these reasons, your V4R5M0 media may contain licensed programs and options that are at different releases than V4R5M0. Products that do not hae any new function for this release are not repackaged, and therefore hae a release preious to V4R5M0. Normally, licensed programs are only re-installed when the release of the licensed program on the media is higher than the installed release. Howeer, you can change the Replace if Current parameter to *YES (on LICPGM menu, Manual Install). Change this parameter to *YES, if you want to re-install the licensed programs, een if they are already installed at the same release. If you choose *YES, you may hae to reapply PTFs to some licensed programs that were replaced from the media. Summary of Changes to Software Installation on page x describes mixed release support for logical partitions. Prepare for Install-Oeriew This topic describes the Prepare for Install function. Highlights of this function include the following: Customizing an installation list. Pre-selecting licensed programs or options to be installed during the automatic installation process. Verifying the contents of the media before starting an installation. Determining additional storage requirements for the licensed programs that you plan to install. This function appears as option 5 (Prepare for Install) on the Work with Licensed Programs menu. The Prepare for Install display appears when you select this option. Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process 7

26 Prepare for Install Type option, press Enter. 1=Select Opt Description _ Work withuser profiles _ Work withlicensed programs for target release _ Display licensed programs for target release _ Work withlicensed programs to delete _ List licensed programs not found on media _ Verify system objects _ Estimated storage requirements for system ASP System: XXXXXXXX F3=Exit F9=Command line F10=Display job log F12=Cancel Bottom Additionally, see Creating and Customizing an Installation List on page 40 for the instructions to use Option 5, Prepare for install. Prepare for Install Option Descriptions With the Work with user profiles option, you can work with a list of user profiles on the system and work with the objects owned by each user profile. Use this option to clean up user profiles that are no longer needed on the system before you install the target release. Refer to Cleaning Up User Profiles on page 47. With the Work with licensed programs for target release option, you can work with a list of the licensed programs for the target release. Use this option to erify the contents of the installation media and to create a customized list of licensed programs to install for the target release. The system can use the list you create to allow the installation processes that replace a release of software to also install the selected additional licensed programs. Refer to Verifying Your Software Order on page 27. Note: This list does not include all products. Among those are programming request for price quotations (PRPQ), licensed program offerings (LPO), and licensed programs on the single set. If you want to install these products for the first time, use the LICPGM menu option 1 or 11. With the Display licensed programs for target release option, you can display the list of licensed programs that will be installed when you install the target release. For each licensed program in the list, you can display information such as the expected action during the installation process and whether a product option must be separately ordered. Use this option to erify your installation plans. With the Work with licensed programs to delete option, you can work with a list of installed licensed programs that should not remain on the system because either they are no longer supported or you chose not to replace them. This list also includes products for which no replacement was found on the distribution media. The display indicates the reason why a licensed program is included in this list, as well as sae and delete any of the products listed. Refer to How to Delete Licensed Programs During Clean Up on page 46. With the List licensed programs not found on media option, you can display a list of licensed programs that could replace existing products but that were not found on the optical distribution media. Refer to Verifying Your Software Order on page AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

27 With the Verify system objects option, the system erifies that the system directory entries include the user profiles needed by the installation process. The system also checks database cross reference files for errors. If necessary, the QSECOFR and QLPINSTALL user profiles are added to the system distribution directory. Refer to Verifying User Profiles and Checking Cross Reference Files on page 50. With the Estimate storage requirements for system ASP option, you can determine whether additional storage is needed before you begin the installation process. Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process 9

28 10 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

29 Chapter 2. Where to Begin If you hae not done so already, read Chapter 1. Oeriew of the Software Installation Process on page 3. The tables in this chapter will guide you to the appropriate location for your V4R5M0 release upgrade. Use Table 1 Supported Releases for Software Upgrades to determine whether you can use this book for a V4R5M0 release upgrade on your AS/400e system. Use the remaining tables to determine which chapters to use: Checklist for Replacing a Release Table 2 on page 13 Checklist for Replacing a Release within a Logical Partition Table 3 on page 13 Checklist for Installing Software on a New System Table 4 on page 14 Checklist for Adding Licensed Programs and Secondary Languages Table 5 on page 15 Checklist for Changing the Primary Language Table 6 on page 15 Checklist for Adding a New Disk Unit Table 7 on page 16 These tables gie additional information: Checklist for Installing a Cumulatie PTF Package Table 8 on page 16 Checklist for Installing a Hardware Upgrade Table 9 on page 17 Table 1. Supported Releases for Software Upgrades Release of OS/400 Currently Installed (Source) Release Valid Target Releases(1) Should You Use this Book? V4R5M0 V4R5M0 Yes. You can use this book to replace the installed V4R4M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V4R1M0 V3R7M0 V3R6M0 V4R5M0 V4R4M0 V4R5M0 V4R4M0 V4R3M0 V4R5M0 V4R4M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V4R5M0 V4R4M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V4R1M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V4R1M0 V4R1M0 V3R7M0 operating system and licensed programs. Your system already runs on the PowerPC [Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC)] architecture. Notes: 1. In order to use secondary logical partitions, the Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 operating system must be at V4R4M0 or V4R5M0 in the primary partition and in eery secondary partition. For further information on supported releases on logical partitions, see the Summary of Changes to Software Installation on page x. 2. You can replace an installed leel of V4R1M0 with V4R5M0, but it is not supported for interoperability. No. Do not use this book. You cannot upgrade directly from V3R7M0 to V4R5M0. You must first upgrade to V4R1M0 or higher. No. Do not use this book. You cannot upgrade directly from V3R6M0 to V4R5M0. You must first upgrade to V4R1M0 or higher. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

30 Table 1. Supported Releases for Software Upgrades (continued) Release of OS/400 Currently Installed (Source) Release V3R2M0 V3R1M0 V3R0M5 V2R3M0 Valid Target Releases(1) V4R4M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V4R1M0 V3R7M0 V4R3M0 V4R1M0 V3R7M0 V3R2M0 V4R3M0 V3R7M0 V3R2M0 V3R1M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V3R2M0 V3R1M0 V3R0M5 Should You Use this Book? No. Do not use this book to replace these releases. If you hae any of these source release leels currently installed, your system must be upgraded to PowerPC architecture at the same time that you install the Version 4 software. These are called Complex Instruction Set Computer (CISC) to Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) system hardware upgrades. They are also known as Internal Microprogramming Instruction (IMPI) to PowerPC architecture upgrades. Only the V3R2M0 release is elligible to upgrade to V4R5M0. Go to the book AS/400 Road Map for Changing to PowerPC Technology, SA This book is part of the licensed program offering 5798-TBU, CISC to RISC Upgrade Kit. It is possible to upgrade from an early CISC system to a more recent CISC system. Howeer, those situations are not discussed in AS/400 Road Map for Changing to PowerPC Technology. Use the Software Installation book for the release appropriate for your CISC IMPI-based system. V3R0M7 No. Do not use this book. Version 3 Release 0 Modification 7 (V3R0M7) is the Licensed Internal Code leel used on the AS/ Model 236. This model only runs the System Support Programs (SSP) operating system at Release 7.1. A migration from the SSP to an OS/400 system is required for V4R5M0. IBM recommends migrating your SSP programs and data to either OS/400 System/36 Enironment or natie OS/400. Normal SSP utilities can be used to sae libraries, files and folders from the SSP to tape or diskette. Then the AS/400 Migration Assistant can be used to restore the libraries, files, and folders to the System/36 Enironment on OS/400. The following information describes this process in greater detail: Informational authorized program analysis report (APAR) II09900 SC OS/400 System/36 Migration Assistant V3R6 SC System/36 Migration Planning V3R6 Notes: 1. This table shows the only supported combinations for source and target releases. You may no longer be able to order some of the target releases shown in this table. 12 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

31 Table 2. Checklist for Replacing a Release Replacing a Release with V4R5M0 Actiity Information Needed Are you replacing an installed leel Use these chapters in the following order: of V4R1M0, V4R2M0, V4R3M0, or 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. V4R4M0 software? 2. One of these chapters, either: Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation. Automatic installation is recommended, howeer there are some circumstances where you must use Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. Read Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation on page 40 to determine if you must use manual installation. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language. 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Table 3. Checklist for Replacing a Release within a Logical Partition Replacing a Release within a Logical Partition Actiity Information Needed Are you replacing an installed leel Use these chapters in the following order: of V4R4M0 or V4R5M0 software 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. within a logical partition? 2. One of these chapters, either: Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation. Automatic installation is recommended, howeer there are some circumstances where you must use Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. Read Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation on page 40 to determine if you must use manual installation. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language. 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Chapter 2. Where to Begin 13

32 Table 4. Checklist for Installing Software on a New AS/400 System Installing Software on a New AS/400 System Actiity Information Needed Are you installing software on a new AS/400 system that has the operating system already installed in your primary language? Are you installing software on a new AS/400 system that has the operating system already installed in a language that is not your primary language, or you want to change the primary language? Are you installing software on an AS/400 system that does not hae the operating system installed? Are you installing software on a new secondary logical partition that does not hae Licensed Internal Code and the OS/400 operating system installed? Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed). You can use the automatic installation process to install software on a new AS/400 system. Howeer, you cannot change any system options during the installation process. 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language. 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. You must reinstall your operating system to change your primary language. Use Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation on page 71 or Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language on page 119. Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed). 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, or iew the Web site at: Also, refer to the articles in the AS/400 Logical Partitions Hardware Planning Guide at this Web site: 3. Chapter 8. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition 4. Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed). 5. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language 6. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. 14 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

33 Table 5. Checklist for Adding Licensed Programs and Secondary Languages Installing Additional Licensed Programs and Secondary Languages Actiity Information Needed Are you installing only additional licensed programs or optional parts of licensed programs to your existing V4R5M0 system? An example would be if you are adding a new licensed program or a new optional part of a licensed program that was shipped independently of the operating system. Are you only installing a secondary language? Are you installing additional licensed programs or secondary languages to your system as part of replacing a release? Are you installing additional licensed programs or secondary languages to your system as part of installing software on a new system? Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. 3. If you hae a secondary language installed and you want to hae NLS support for the added licensed program, you need to use Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language. 3. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. The procedures for replacing a release direct you to add additional licensed programs and secondary languages at the appropriate time. Use the checklist in Table 2 on page 13. The procedures for installing software on a new system direct you to add additional licensed programs and secondary languages at the appropriate time. Use the appropriate checklist from Table 4 on page 14. Table 6. Checklist for Changing the Primary Language Changing the Primary Language Actiity Information Needed Are you changing your primary language using your secondary language media? Are you changing your primary language from a DBCS primary language to an SBCS primary language or an SBCS primary language to a DBCS primary language? Or, Are you replacing a release with V4R5M0 and also want to change your primary language? Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. Be sure to read Considerations When Changing a Primary Language on page Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language. 3. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. Note: Be sure to read When to Use Manual Installation on page 40 and Considerations When Changing a Primary Language on page Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language. 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Chapter 2. Where to Begin 15

34 Table 6. Checklist for Changing the Primary Language (continued) Changing the Primary Language Actiity Information Needed Are you installing software on a new AS/400 system and want to change the primary language? Or, Are you only changing your primary language? Use the checklist for Installing a New AS/400 System on page 14 ( Table 4). Note: Be sure to read Considerations When Changing a Primary Language on page 53. Table 7. Checklist for Adding a New Disk Unit Adding a New Disk Unit to a New System Actiity Information Needed Are you adding a new disk unit to your new AS/400 system? You may hae ordered your system with a minimum amount of DASD. In this case, you should reinstall the operating system to improe system performance and you may need to install licensed programs. Note: If you are using mirrored protection, deice parity protection, or auxiliary storage pools, refer to the information on working with auxiliary storage pools in the book Backup and Recoery, SC , before you begin. Are you adding a new disk unit to your existing AS/400 system? Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed). 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Note: If you are using mirrored protection, deice parity protection, or auxiliary storage pools, refer to the information on working with auxiliary storage pools in the book Backup and Recoery, SC , before you begin. Use these chapters in the following order: 1. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software. 2. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation. 3. You may need to complete one or both of the following: Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language. 4. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation. Table 8. Checklist for Installing a Cumulatie PTF Package Installing a Cumulatie Program Temporary Fix (PTF) Package Actiity Information Needed Are you loading and applying a cumulatie PTF package to your system? Go to the AS/400 PTF Shipping Information Letter that you receied with the cumulatie PTF tapes for instructions to install a PTF cumulatie package. 16 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

35 Table 9. Checklist for Installing a Hardware Upgrade Installing a Hardware Upgrade Actiity Information Needed Your current system uses PowerPC [Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC)] technology. Are you installing a hardware upgrade at the same time as you are installing V4R5M0 or licensed programs? Are you installing a hardware upgrade or did you purchase a new system to moe your system to PowerPC technology? Refer to the book AS/400e 940x RISC-to-RISC Road Map, SA At the appropriate point in the upgrade, you are directed to use procedures in this book to install the operating system and licensed programs. You may also receie additional instructions with the upgrade package. Upgrading to a PowerPC AS processor requires a simultaneous hardware change and software upgrade using the book AS/400 Road Map for Changing to PowerPC Technology, SA Refer to the table of supported releases on 11. Always begin by reading the planning material as noted in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. Chapter 2. Where to Begin 17

36 18 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

37 Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software Careful, complete and early preparation saes a considerable amount of time and can help to make the installation run smoothly. Perform the preparatory tasks in this section before scheduling your installation. Installation Preparation Checklist You can do these preparatory actiities days or a few weeks before you schedule the installation of the new release on your system. Allow ample time for completing these actiities. The actiities are: 1. The Beginning Tasks (Table 10 on page 20) 2. Order and Apply PTFs (Table 11 on page 21) 3. Choose the Manual or Automatic Installation Process (Table 12 on page 22) 4. Use Prepare for Install (Table 13 on page 22) 5. Additional Considerations (Table 14 on page 23) 6. The Ending Tasks (Table 15 on page 23) Check off the tasks as you complete them so you do not oerlook any of them. This section includes more information about each task, starting at the page indicated. Also, the appendices proide useful general information. For logical partitions only If you are setting up logical partitions, you will need to plan in adance of your installation for a basic understanding of logical partitions and for your software and hardware requirements. Refer to the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information on the Internet at: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. For a system with logical partitions, you must load the releant PTFs on each secondary partition, then set them for apply delay. Power down all secondary partitions. Go to the primary partition, load the releant PTFs and apply them. Then perform an initial program load (IPL) of the primary partition (a full system IPL). You may hae different PTFs for different licensed programs on different partitions. If a PTF is related to a logical partition, all partitions must hae that PTF. Otherwise, you may hae some different PTFs for Licensed Internal Code on different partitions. You may hae some different PTFs for OS/400 on different partitions. Howeer, you must hae Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 at V4R4M0 or newer on all partitions. For directions to do this correctly, use the article Managing Logical Partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, mentioned aboe. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

38 Table 10. Beginning Tasks Beginning Tasks (detailed information starting on page 24) Tasks More Information 1. Reiew Memo to Users and order PSP and PTF documents. 2. Verify your software order and license keys. 3. Change system alues to aoid errors before installing or deleting software or PTFs, or when recoering your system. 4. Moe IBM-supplied product libraries to system ASP or delete duplicated IBM-supplied product libraries. 5. For 3995 optical library users, sae or release held optical files. 6. If you are migrating to a newer Client Access package, or you plan to delete or replace Client Access products, ensure that there are not any user-created subdirectories. 7. If you use OS/400 Adanced 36, 5769SS1 option 20, you must migrate your System Support Programs (SSP) programs and data before installing V4R5M0. 8. If you use OS/400 Lotus Notes Enhanced Integration, 5769SS1 (OS/400) option 24, you must migrate your data before installing V4R5M0. Reiew the Memo to Users for potential incompatibilities with V4R5M0 software. Also order additional planning documents that you may need to use. Refer to Locate and Reiew Information on page 24. Verify that you receied all of the software you ordered. Refer to Verifying Your Software Order on page 27. Also, ensure that you hae software license keys for any keyed products that you hae ordered and intend to install. Change any system alues as needed for the planning or installation process. Refer to Setting System Values Before Installing on page 32. Refer to Moed or duplicated IBM-supplied product libraries on page 33. If you use a 3995 optical library, check for and resole any held optical files. Refer to 3995 Optical Library Users on page 34. If any user-created subdirectories exist, the install or delete operation may fail. You can use the WRKLNK command to remoe all user-created subdirectories for these products. V4R5M0 does not support 5769SS1 (OS/400) option 20. It is deleted when you install V4R5M0. IBM recommends migrating your SSP programs and data to either OS/400 System/36 Enironment or natie OS/400. Normal SSP utilities can be used to sae libraries, files and folders from the SSP to tape or diskette. Then the AS/400 Migration Assistant can be used to restore the libraries, files, and folders to the System/36 Enironment on OS/400. The following information describes this process in greater detail: Informational authorized program analysis report (APAR) II09900 SC OS/400 System/36 Migration Assistant V3R6 SC System/36 Migration Planning V3R6 V4R4M0 and newer releases do not support OS/400 option 24. It is deleted when you install V4R5M0. IBM recommends migrating your data to Lotus Domino for AS/400. For detailed instructions about how to migrate your data, refer to the topic Migrating to Lotus Domino for AS/400 at following Internet location: 20 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

39 Table 10. Beginning Tasks (continued) Beginning Tasks (detailed information starting on page 24) 9. If you hae Integration for NetWare, 57xx-SA3, or OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/400, 57xx-XZ1, you must migrate your data. Attention! Once you install OS/400 V4R5M0, OS/400 Integration for Noell NetWare (5769-SA3), will no longer work. You cannot use Restore License Program to load a preious release of this product onto an AS/400 with V4R5M0 or later ersion of the operating system. To aoid losing data that depends on this product, migrate that data from your serer to an accessible location before upgrading to V4R5M0. You must migrate to an alternatie product before the end of serice dates for Integration for NetWare (57xx-SA3) and OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/400 (57xx-XZ1). These products will be deleted when you upgrade to V4R5M0. Refer to the Noell Support Life Cycle Product Forecast for information regarding their end of support dates for Noell NetWare 4.1 on the Internet: For assistance in migrating your data to AS/400 Netserer, refer to the AS/400 redbook SG , Adantage AS/400 NetSerer. For alternatie ideas to help migrate your data, see information APAR II Alternatie products that you can use are AS/400 Netserer, which uses Serer Message Block (SMB) or AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer on an Integrated Netfinity Serer. You may choose to migrate to an external PC serer. IBM still supports AS/400 Netware Enhanced Integration on remote PC serers. For more information about AS/400 and Netware, refer to: Table 11. Order and apply program temporary fixes (PTFs) Order and apply PTFs (detailed information starting on page 34) Tasks More Information 1. Permanently apply any temporarily applied PTFs. 2. Order and apply PTFs for network interoperability. Skip this task if you do not hae AS/400s operating in a network. 3. Apply the Installation Preparation PTFs if you are installing from V4R1. Skip this task if you are not upgrading from a V4R1 system. 4. Order the cumulatie PTF package. Skip this task if you hae recently receied your V4R5M0 software upgrade. Permanently apply any PTFs that are temporarily applied to your system. Apply any required Client Access PTFs. Refer to Permanently Apply Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) on page 34. Read Ealuate Release-Leel Interoperability on page 35, and order and apply PTFs for network interoperability, if you use your system in a network. If you are upgrading from V4R1M0, apply the Installation Preparation PTFs that are required before installing V4R5M0. Refer to Preparation Program Temporary Fixes Required Before Installing V4R5M0 Software on page 37. If seeral weeks hae passed since you receied your software distribution media, check to see if you hae the latest cumulatie PTF package for V4R5M0. You should also get the latest HIPER PTFs. Refer to Ordering the Current Cumulatie PTF Package on page 38. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 21

40 Table 11. Order and apply program temporary fixes (PTFs) (continued) Order and apply PTFs (detailed information starting on page 34) 5. If you hae this product installed, 5769-WSV Integration for Windows Serer, then you must use the Leel Check command to upgrade your serer to the current leel. Skip this task if you do not hae 5769-WSV Integration for Windows Serer installed. When you install a new ersion of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer, you need to upgrade all your existing Windows serers to that leel. This requires first applying the latest cumulatie PTF package. (See the preious task to determine whether you hae the latest cumulatie PTF package.) Then, you must perform a leel check. This must be done before installing a new release of the product, 5769-WSV Integration for Windows Serer. If your serer is not up to the current leel code when you perform the Leel Check command, the PTFs will be automatically applied. To use the Leel Check command you must be a Windows serer administrator. For instructions to perform the Leel Check command, refer to the section Installing upgrades to Windows serers when you upgrade AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer in Chapter 3 of the book AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer - Setup, SC Or refer to the Information Center topic and follow these links (in order): Network Operating Systems; Windows Serer on AS/400; Installation and configuration of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer; Upgrading Windows serers on AS/ Order group PTFs. When new PTFs affecting a system software function become aailable, group PTFs are dynamically updated. Find a list of the group PTFs and order them. For a description of group PTFs and ordering information, refer to Ordering Group PTFs on page 39. Table 12. Choose the Manual or Automatic Installation Process Choose the Manual or Automatic Installation Process If you are replacing a release of software, choose which installation procedure you will use. Refer to Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation on page 40. Skip this task if you are installing software on a new system, installing additional licensed programs or secondary languages, or changing your primary language. Table 13. Use Prepare for Install Use Prepare for Install (detailed information starting on page 40) Tasks More Information 1. Create and customize an installation list. Skip this task if you are not using automatic installation. 2. Merge additional licensed programs into your installation list. Perform this task only when you hae already created an installation list (as in the preious task) and only when you hae additional licensed programs to add to the list. Skip this task if you are not using automatic installation. 3. Clean up your system. Refer to Creating and Customizing an Installation List on page 40. Refer to Merging Additional Licensed Programs into the Installation List on page 44. Clean your system of items you no longer use. You should do this before you estimate your storage requirements. Refer to Cleaning Up Your System Storage Space on page AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

41 Table 13. Use Prepare for Install (continued) Use Prepare for Install (detailed information starting on page 40) 4. Ealuate your disk storage needs. 5. Verify the integrity of system objects. Determine if you hae adequate storage to install the new software. Refer to Ealuating Your Disk Storage Needs on page 47. Verify the integrity of system objects that are needed by the installation process. Refer to Verifying the Integrity of System Objects on page 49. Table 14. Additional Considerations Additional Considerations (detailed information starting on page 50) Tasks More Information 1. Estimate the installation time. 2. Gather performance information. 3. Use the Softcopy Library. Skip this task if you are not using the Softcopy Library. 4. Plan for national language support. 5. Identify changes to IBM-supplied objects. 6. Basic system hardware considerations. Estimate the amount of time you need to install this release of software. Refer to Estimating Installation Time on page 50. Gather performance information about your current system to use as a checkpoint for future comparison. Refer to Gathering Performance Information on page 51. If you are planning to use the AS/400 softcopy library CD-ROM, refer to Prepare to Install Softcopy Information on page 52. If you are changing the primary language of the system or adding a secondary language, refer to Planning for National Language Support on page 53. If you hae made changes to IBM-supplied objects, you need to identify the changes and take appropriate action. Some job description and subsystem customizations can be kept. Refer to Identifying Changes to IBM-Supplied Objects on page 55. Ensure that you know how to operate any hardware deices which you will be using during the upgrade. Refer to Basic System Hardware Considerations on page 57. Table 15. Ending Tasks Ending Tasks (detailed information starting on page 60) Tasks More Information 1. Ensuring two-phase commit integrity. 2. Stop the Integrated Netfinity Serer. 3. Remoe tapes from tape dries, if you are using optical media. Remoe other unnecessary media. If your system participates in a network, resole any database resynchronizations that are pending. Refer to Ensuring Two-Phase Commit Integrity on page 60. If your system has an actie Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400, deactiate it during the installation process. Refer to Stopping the Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 and Ending Application Serers on page 61. If you are using optical media, remoe all extraneous tape media from the tape dries before installation. Prior to performing a full system IPL, remoe all unnecessary media from deices that are attached as possible source-d IPL deices. If you hae any secondary logical partitions and intend to perform only a secondary partition IPL, then this applies only to that partition. Howeer, if you intend to perform a full system IPL (primary partition IPL), then this applies to each partition, including the primary. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 23

42 Table 15. Ending Tasks (continued) Ending Tasks (detailed information starting on page 60) 4. Sae your system. Sae the system to ensure that you can perform a recoery if needed. For detailed instructions to sae your entire system, refer to Details: Saing eerything in the Information Center. See Prerequisite and Related Information on page xii for locating the Information Center. Or, refer to Using Sae menu option 21 in the book Backup and Recoery, SC Also, for a brief discussion, refer to Notes About Saing your System on page 62 in this book. When you hae completed these planning tasks, you will be ready to start your installation. Beginning Tasks Locate and Reiew Information You need to reiew seeral sources of information as you plan for and install your new software. This book is your first source of information. This topic describes other documents you need, why you need them, and where to locate them. The topics include the following items: Documents That Are Shipped With Your New Software Release Obtaining Preentie Serice Planning (PSP) Information Obtaining Cross-Reference Summaries for Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) Prerequisite and Related Information on page xii describes other publications that may be useful. Documents That Are Shipped With Your New Software Release The following documents are shipped with the distribution media for your new V4R5M0 software. You need to use these documents to plan parts of your installation process. Read the material that applies to your system. These documents are: Memo to Users for OS/400 Read This First AS/400 PTF Shipping Information Letter Indiidual product documentation Memo to Users for OS/400 and Read This First: These two documents proide information about software and hardware changes that could potentially affect your system operations. The Memo to Users describes only significant changes in the new release that could potentially affect your programs or system operations. Use the Memo to Users to prepare for changes on the release and to use the new release. Be sure to read each section that pertains to licensed programs that you currently hae installed or plan to install on your system. This document is also referred to as the Memorandum to Application System/400* Users or the Memo to AS/400 Users. 24 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

43 The Read This First contains information that was not aailable for publication in the Memo to Users or this book. You should read this document before installing this release. Also, read informational APAR II12001, which contains details on incompatibilities that were not published in the V4R5M0 Memo to Users. Locating the Memo to Users, Read This First, and Informational APAR II12001: You can access the Memo to Users and Read This First documents from this Internet location: Follow these links (in order): 1. TechInfo & Databases 2. Pre Ser Planning - PSP 3. All Preentie Serice Planning Documents by Release 4. R450 You can access the informational APAR II12001 by following these links (in order): 1. TechInfo & Databases 2. Software Problems 3. All Info APARs by Release 4. R450 The Memo to Users and Read This First are now aailable to customers that use electronic customer support. You can order these documents for V4R5M0 by using the Send PTF Order (SNDPTFORD) command and specifying program temporary fix (PTF) number: SF If you are skipping a release leel of OS/400, you should also order the Memo to Users and Read This First for the release that you are skipping. This will ensure that you are aware of changes that occured in the skipped release that could also affect your programs and system operations. You can order these documents by specifying the appropriate program temporary fix (PTF) number: Skipped Release V4R1M0 V4R2M0 V4R3M0 V4R4M0 Command to Order PTF SNDPTFORD SF98016 SNDPTFORD SF98026 SNDPTFORD SF98036 SNDPTFORD SF98046 AS/400 PTF Shipping Information Letter: This letter contains the instructions for installing the cumulatie program temporary fix (PTF) package. The letter and the cumulatie (CUM) PTF package ship with the software media for the new release. IBM highly recommends that you Install the cumulatie PTF package. For information about obtaining the most recent CUM package, refer to Ordering the Current Cumulatie PTF Package on page 38. Indiidual product documentation: You may hae receied additional letters to users for indiidual products. Such material may contain information unique for that product that could affect its installation. Be sure to check these additional sources. When you install a product for the first time, you may need to customize the product or complete additional actions before the product will work. Look for this type of information in the product publications. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 25

44 Obtaining Preentie Serice Planning (PSP) Information You need the most recent edition of the AS/400 Preentie Serice Planning Information. The IBM software support center updates this information regularly. It proides the most recent information about conditions that could impede your software installation process. There are multiple preentie serice planning documents, categorized by topic. We recommend that you reiew at least the software installation document and the general document for the release of the operating system. The general document lists topics that are coered in additional preentie serice planning information documents that you may want to order if they apply to your system. There are seeral ways to obtain Preentatie Serice Planning (PSP) information. You can access Preentatie Serice Planning information from this Internet location: Follow these links (in order): 1. TechInfo & Databases 2. Pre Ser Planning - PSP 3. All Preentie Serice Planning Documents by Release 4. R450 You can order the preentie serice planning documents through electronic customer support: PSP Document V4R1M0 software installation V4R2M0 software installation V4R3M0 software installation V4R4M0 software installation V4R5M0 software installation Command to Order PTF SNDPTFORD SF98010 SNDPTFORD SF98020 SNDPTFORD SF98030 SNDPTFORD SF98040 SNDPTFORD SF98050 Information about displaying and printing preentie serice planning documents is aailable in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC You can find information about testing and setting up electronic customer support in your hardware setup book. It is also in the System Administration, Aailability, and Maintenance - Troubleshooting topic in the AS/400 Information Center, which is aailable at the following Internet location: The Information Center is also aailable on CD-ROM. If you do not hae access to the Internet or electronic customer support, contact your software support proider to obtain this information. Obtaining Cross-Reference Summaries for Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) Cross-reference summaries allow you to analyze the PTFs and Licensed Internal Code fixes you currently hae installed on your system. With this information, you can determine which V4R5M0 fixes you need to order to maintain the same or higher PTF (program temporary fix) and Licensed Internal Code fix leel as you 26 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

45 update to the new leel of software. These summaries are updated each working day with the latest information as new V4R5M0 PTFs and Licensed Internal Code fixes are released. Locating cross-reference summaries Cross-reference summaries for PTFs are aailable through the Internet and electronic customer support. You can access cross-reference summaries from the Internet at: Then follow these links (in order): 1. TechInfo & Databases 2. Pre Ser Planning 3. All Preentie Serice Planning Documents by Release 4. R450 Table 16 shows the commands for ordering these summaries through electronic customer support. Table 16. Ordering PTF Cross-Reference Summaries If you are moing from Enter this command V4R1M0 V4R2M0 V4R3M0 V4R4M0 SNDPTFORD SF97059 SNDPTFORD SF97097 SNDPTFORD SF97066 SNDPTFORD SF97035 For reference information about electronic customer support, see page 26. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 20. Verifying Your Software Order Verify that the contents of your software order are correct before you start installation. This can sae you time and frustration. Verify that you hae the correct optical media by checking the release, labels, and language. Also, erify that you receied license key sheets for the keyed products you ordered. Verifying the Release, Labels and National Language of the Optical Distribution Media 1. Locate the software distribution media and the associated Media Description Report. Verify that the optical media for Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 are for V4R5M0. Arrange the optical media in the order that is shown in Table 17 on page 28. Table 17 describes the media labels and its contents. When you receie software for a new release, you should receie optical media for at least Licensed Internal Code, OS/400, licensed programs, and the cumulatie PTF package. You may also receie optical media for secondary languages and other types of software products, such as programming request for price quotation (PRPQ) and licensed program offerings (LPOs). Use the product tables (Table 18 on page 30, Table 19 on page 31, Table 20 on page 31, and Licensed Product Table on page 214) to check for the name and product identifier of indiidual licensed programs that you ordered. 2. Verify that the media you receied is in the correct primary language. If your system uses secondary languages, erify that you receied media for Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 27

46 the installed secondary languages. Do the following to determine the feature number for the national language ersion (NLV) for your system s primary language and any installed secondary languages: a. Select option 20 (Display secondary languages) from the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu and press Enter. b. The Display Installed Secondary Languages display appears. This display identifies the primary language of the system and any installed secondary languages. Compare the OS/400 media label with the primary language of your system. If the system uses secondary languages, compare the secondary language media that you hae receied with the secondary languages listed on your system. c. Press the F3 (Exit) key. Verifying License Key Sheets for Keyed Products Your license key sheets for the keyed products you hae ordered will arrie in the box with your software order. Verify that you hae receied a separate license key sheet for each keyed product. A software license key sheet will list: 18-character license key information Product identification number Product name Version, release, and modification System serial number Usage limit Other pertinent information Note: Contact your software proider if you do not hae the correct optical distribution media, release, or national language. If you do not hae a license key sheet for each keyed product you hae ordered, contact your software proider. Refer to Software License Key on page 173 for general information and for information on obtaining and installing license keys. Table 17. Distribution Media Labels-Description Release Identifier: R05M00 Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 20. Distribution media labels indicate the ersion, release, and modification leel in a format that is different from what appears on displays during installation. The media labels show the ersion, V4, in the first line of the label. The release and modification leel are shown in the format R0xM00. For example, the release and modification leel for V4R5M0 would be R05M00. Note: Media for 9401 Model 150 OS/400 has AS/400e Base Pak as the second line of the label. Media with this label can only be installed on 9401 Model 150 AS/400s. A separate product list is shipped with this media. Do not use the tables listed below. Instead, refer to the 9401 Model 150 product list when installing these products. Media Type Identifiers: Labels on the distribution media that is used for installation hae unique identifiers. Media type identifiers are located on the center of the left-hand side of the CD-ROM label. These identifiers help you determine when to use each media olume. When you replace your software with a new release, you typically use the media in the order that the identifiers are listed below. 28 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

47 Table 17. Distribution Media Labels-Description (continued) SK3T-2997 Installation Preparation PTFs for V4R2M0/V4R3M0/V4R4M0/V4R5M0 Software Use this CD-ROM only if you are upgrading from V4R1M0 to V4R5M0. This media contains PTFs that you must install on your V4R1M0 system before you can upgrade to V4R5M0. I_BASE_01 4 Licensed Internal Code for OS/400 * This language-independent Licensed Internal Code supports all national language features. The Licensed Internal Code is part of the standard set of media. See note 4 on page 30. B29xx_01 2 Operating System/400 * This standard set media contains only the base part of OS/400. B29xx_02 2 OS/400 no-charge options and licensed programs * This standard set media contains IBM-supplied libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS, no-charge optional parts of OS/400 and no-charge licensed programs. Refer to table Table 18 on page 30 for a list of products contained in this CD-ROM. B29xx_03 2 OS/400 no-charge licensed programs * This standard set media contains more of the no-charge licensed programs. Refer to table Table 19 on page 31 for a list of products contained in this CD-ROM. L29xx_01 2 Priced licensed programs * This locked set media contains keyed products. Refer to table 20 for a list of products contained in this CD-ROM. F29xx_01 2, 3 Single licensed programs * N29xx 2 Cydddrm_01 1 This single set media contains the single licensed programs that you ordered. Each piece of media is labeled in the same manner, F29xx_01. You may receie more than one media olume for a single licensed program. In that case, the additional olumes are labeled F29xx_02, F29xx_03, and so on. For breity, products on the single set CD-ROMs will not be listed in this section. Refer to the Licensed Product Table on page 214 for this information. Secondary Language Media This media contains only language objects for the indicated secondary language. For secondary language media, the alue for 29xx is the feature code of the secondary language as used for installation. See Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes on page 227 for a listing of the National language feature codes. Cumulatie PTF Package Numbers in the positions shown here as yddd indicate the Julian date. Characters in the positions show here as rm indicate the ersion, release, and modification of the cumulatie PTF package. C_yyyyyyy_01 1 Cydddrm This label may also indicate a prerequisite leel of Licensed Internal Code. If a prerequisite exists, you will see another line like this: Preq yyyyyyy/cydddrm. Characters shown here as yyyyyyy indicate a Licensed Internal Code marker leel and a different Julian date. Licensed Internal Code for Cumulatie PTF Package You receie this media olume only if the cumulatie PTF package media indicates a prerequisite (yyyyyyy) that has a different alue than on the Licensed Internal Code media label. This label matches the indicated prerequisite shown on the cumulatie package media olume. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 29

48 Table 17. Distribution Media Labels-Description (continued) SK3T-0118 SoftCopy Library CD SK3T-2027 This media olume ships with all systems. It contains softcopy ersions of AS/400 books and can be used as an online reference. Information Center CD This media olume ships with all systems. It contains task and reference information. Note: The Information Center and the Softcopy Library are packaged together as a dual-cd set, AS/400 Information Center, SK3T * indicates a CD-ROM to include when creating a customized installation list. Notes: 1. Julian dates are shown in the form yddd. The y is the last digit of the year (0 through 9), and ddd is the day of the year (0 through 366). For example, the Julian date for April 6, 1998 would be shown as 8096 because April 6 is the 96th day of the year Media identifiers that contain the string 29xx (where xx are numerals) indicate language-specific media. This string indicates the national language feature code for the primary language. For example, media labeled B2928_01 would be OS/400 with French as the primary language. 3. You may receie additional media olumes that do not conform to these descriptions. Examples include media that contain PRPQs or media for Client Access products which are installed on workstations. Also, IBM Business Partners may label the media differently. 4. Keep all of your distribution media. You may need them for recoery procedures. Table 18. B29xx_02 Standard Set Products Product Description 5769SS1 option 1 OS/400 - Extended Base Support 5769SS1 option 2 OS/400 - Online Information 5769SS1 option 3 OS/400 - Extended Base Directory Support 5769SS1 option 4 OS/400 - S/36 and S/38 Migration 5769SS1 option 5 OS/400 - System/36 Enironment 5769SS1 option 6 OS/400 - System/38 Enironment 5769SS1 option 7 OS/400 - Example Tools Library 5769SS1 option 8 OS/400 - AFP Compatibility Fonts 5769SS1 option 9 OS/400 - *PRV CL Compiler Support 5769SS1 option 11 OS/400 - S/36 Migration Assistant 5769SS1 option 12 OS/400 - Host Serers 5769SS1 option 13 OS/400 - System Openness Includes 5769SS1 option 14 OS/400 - GDDM 5769SS1 option 16 OS/400 - Ultimedia System Facilities 5769SS1 option 21 OS/400 - Extended NLS Support 5769SS1 option 22 OS/400 - ObjectConnect 5769SS1 option 30 OS/400 - Qshell Interpreter 5769SS1 option 31 OS/400 - Domain Name System 5769SS1 option 32 OS/400 - Directory Serices 5769SS1 option 34 OS/400 - Digital Certificate Manager 30 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

49 Table 18. B29xx_02 Standard Set Products (continued) Product Description 5769SS1 option 35 OS/400 - CCA Cryptograhic Serice Proider 5769AS1 *BASE IBM WebSphere Application Serer for AS/ DG1 *BASE HTTP Serer for AS/400 Table 19. B29xx_03 Standard Set Products Product Description 5769JC1 *BASE AS/400 Toolbox for Jaa 5769JV1 *BASE AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa 5769JV1 option 3 Jaa Deeloper Kit JV1 option 4 Jaa Deeloper Kit PM1 *BASE Performance Management/ TC1 *BASE TCP/IP Connectiity Utilities for AS/ WSV *BASE Windows Serer 5769WSV option 1 Windows NT WSV option 2 Windows XE1 *BASE Client Access/400 Express for Windows Table 20. L29xx_01 Locked Set Products Product Description 5769SS1 option 17 PSF/400 Fax Support 5769SS1 option 18 OS/400 - Media and Storage Extensions 5769SS1 option 36 PSF/ IPM Printer Support 5769SS1 option 37 PSF/ IPM Printer Support 5769SS1 option 38 PSF/400 Any Speed Printer Support 5769AF1 *BASE AFP Utilities for AS/ AP1 *BASE Adanced DBCS Printer Support for AS/ BR1 *BASE Backup Recoery and Media Serices for AS/ BR1 option 1 BRMS/400 - Network Feature 5769BR1 option 2 BRMS/400 - Adanced Functions Feature 5769CB1 *BASE ILE COBOL for AS/ CB1 option 1 System/36 Compatible COBOL for AS/ CB1 option 2 System/38 Compatible COBOL for AS/ CB1 option 5 OPM COBOL for AS/ CB1 option 6 *PRV ILE COBOL for AS/ CM1 *BASE Communications Utilities for AS/ CX2 *BASE ILE C for AS/ DP3 *BASE DataPropagator 5769JS1 *BASE Job Scheduler for AS/400 Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 31

50 Table 20. L29xx_01 Locked Set Products (continued) Product 5769PT1 *BASE 5769PT1 option PT1 option PW1 *BASE 5769PW1 option PW1 option PW1 option QU1 *BASE 5769RD1 *BASE 5769RD1 option RD1 option RD1 option RD1 option RD1 option RG1 *BASE 5769RG1 option RG1 option RG1 option RG1 option ST1 *BASE Description Performance Tools for AS/400 Performance Tools - Manager Feature Performance Tools - Agent Feature App De ToolSet for AS/400 - SEU App De ToolSet for AS/400 - Others App De ToolSet for AS/400 - App De Man App De ToolSetfor AS/400 - AppDict Ser Query for AS/400 OnDemand for AS/400 OnDemand Spooled File Archie Feature OnDemand Object Archie Feature OnDemand Record Archie Feature OnDemand AnyStore Feature OnDemand Serer Trail Feature ILE RPG for AS/400 ILE RPG for AS/400 - S/36 compatible RPG ILE RPG for AS/400 - S/38 compatible RPG ILE RPG for AS/400 - RPG/400 ILE RPG for AS/400 - *PRV ILE RPG DB2 Query Mgr and SQL DeKit for AS/400 For a comprehensie list of products, refer to the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 20. Setting System Values Before Installing System alues are IBM-supplied objects that may be modified from their shipped alue to tailor certain aspects of the AS/400 operating system to your enironment. The software installation program will oerlay these objects on your system with alues that are supplied on the installation media. IBM recommends that you record or print out your system alues as a pre-upgrade step. Use the WRKSYSVAL output(*print) command. This will help to ensure that the upgrade process will not fail due to a preious modification of any system alue. This also helps to make sure you will be able to reset the alues after you complete the upgrade. 1. Type the Work with System Values command, WRKSYSVAL, and press Enter. The Work with System Values display appears. 2. Type 2 (Change) in the Option column next to the system alue you want, and press Enter. The Change System Value display appears. 3. Check the system alues as described in Table 21 on page 33. Write down the current alue of QALWOBJRST and any library names that are shown for QSYSLIBL and QUSRLIBL. 32 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

51 If you want the same alues after the installation process completes, you will need to reset the system alues. Table 21. Verify these System Values Before Installing Software System Value Action to Take QSYSLIBL (1) Current libraries: QUSRLIBL (1) Current libraries: If you hae any of the following, use the spacebar to delete the library from the library list. Remoe any licensed program libraries. Remoe any secondary language libraries (QSYS29xx). Note: Do NOT remoe QSYS, QGPL, QUSRSYS or QTEMP. QALWOBJRST (2): Current alue: Change the alue to *ALL before installing OS/400 or licensed programs. Notes: 1. Haing licensed program libraries or secondary language libraries in these library lists can cause errors when you install or delete software. 2. The Allow Object Restore (QALWOBJRST) system alue specifies whether or not objects with security-sensitie attributes can be restored. It is important to set the alue to *ALL before performing the following system actiities: Installing a new release of OS/400. Installing new licensed programs Applying program temporary fixes (PTFs). Recoering your system. These actiities may fail if the alue of QALWOBJRST is not set to *ALL. To ensure system security, return the QALWOBJRST alue to your normal setting after completing the system actiity. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 20. Moed or duplicated IBM-supplied product libraries If you hae moed IBM-supplied product libraries to user auxiliary storage pools (user ASPs), the installation procedures will not update the libraries. To preent this problem, ensure that IBM-supplied product libraries are in the system ASP before you start the installation procedures. The product libraries should remain in the system ASP. PTFs are not applied to product libraries that are not in the system ASP. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 33

52 If you hae duplicated IBM-supplied product libraries, delete the duplicates before you start the installation procedures. The installation process fails, and the new release does not install until duplicated IBM-supplied libraries are deleted. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page Optical Library Users If you use the 3995 optical library, you should check to see if you hae any held optical files before you install V4R5M0. Held optical files are files which hae not been successfully written to optical media. Use the Work with Held Optical File (WRKHLDOPTF) command to check for held optical files. You should either sae or release held optical files before installing V4R5M0. Once V4R5M0 is installed, you will only be able to release held optical files that are from preious releases. Attempting to sae held optical files from preious releases results in message OPT0129 (Requested optical function failed to complete successfully). For more information about held optical files, refer to the book Optical Support, SC Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 20. Ordering and Applying Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) Permanently Apply Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) Before you begin the installation process, you should make sure your system is ready. PTFs that are temporarily applied should be permanently applied before you begin. Temporarily applied PTFs require a considerable amount of disk storage space. You should permanently apply any temporarily applied PTFs to maximize the aailable disk space on your current system. Do this only for products and temporarily applied PTFs that you hae erified on your system. When a new release is installed, the installation process oerwrites the PTFs applied to the preious release. The PTFs for the preious release are no longer applied, but there may be associated objects that remain on the system and take up disk storage space. When you use Operational Assistant and choose to clean up system journals and system logs, PTF sae files from preious releases are deleted from your system. Howeer, for systems that hae the System Manager for AS/400 licensed program installed, the PTF sae files are not deleted. Notes: 1. Information on applying immediate PTFs temporarily or permanently is aailable in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC , in the section on working with PTFs. 34 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

53 2. If you hae SystemView System Manager/400 licensed program (5769-SM1) installed on your system, use the instructions in the book System Manager Use, SC , for managing PTFs on your system. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 21. Ealuate Release-Leel Interoperability The definition of interoperability is the ability of one system to exchange data or objects with another system. The exchange can be performed electronically or by physical media (such as tape). Either system can initiate the exchange. An AS/400 system interoperates with another AS/400 system when exchanging data or when saing and restoring objects. Table 1 on page 11 shows the supported combinations of releases. If you hae seeral AS/400 systems in a network, they must be at compatible release leels. This is necessary if objects and data are to be interchanged between systems. You can use option 10 (Display licensed programs) on the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu to see the installed release of your licensed programs. The following topics contain more information: Exchanging data Saing and restoring objects Ordering and applying PTFs for network interoperability Exchanging Data The source system (the system that sends the information) and the target system (the system that receies the information) must be within the supported release leels. If the source system is V4R5M0, the system receiing information can be at V3R2M0, V4R2M0, V4R3M0, or V4R4M0. For example: OfficeVision/400* users on V4R5M0, V4R4M0, V4R3M0, V4R2M0, and V3R2M0 systems can exchange mail with each other. Client Access users on V4R5M0 can exchange data with Client Access users on any V3R2M0, V4R2M0, V4R3M0, or V4R4M0 host systems. An exception to this is the Client Access Express product, 5769-XE1, which supports functions on V4R2M0 or more recent releases. Refer to AS/400 Client Access Family of Products, G , for more information about exchanging data with Client Access. An application deeloper can send a source file, by using the Send Network File (SNDNETF) command, from a V4R5M0 system to a V3R2M0, V4R2M0, V4R3M0, or V4R4M0 system. An application deeloper can send a source file, by using the SNDNETF command, from a V3R2M0 system to a V4R2M0, V4R3M0, V4R4M0, or V4R5M0 system. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 35

54 Saing and Restoring Objects To be interoperable, objects must be saed by specifying either a specific release leel or *PRV for the alue of the target release (TGTRLS) parameter. Table 22 shows how to specify the alue of TGTRLS for each target (receiing) system: Table 22. Interoperability-Specifying Target Release Source (Sending) System V4R5M0 Target (Receiing) System V4R4M0 V4R3M0 V4R2M0 V3R2M0 Specify TGTRLS(*PRV) or TGTRLS(V4R4M0) TGTRLS(V4R3M0) TGTRLS(V4R2M0) TGTRLS(V3R2M0) You can sae and restore licensed programs just like other objects as long as the release leel is compatible with the operating system release leel. For more information about compatible leels of licensed programs, refer to Licensed Product Table on page 214. For more information on saing objects to a system that is running a preious release, see the section on release-to-release support in the book Backup and Recoery, SC Ordering and Applying Program Temporary Fixes for Network Interoperability To exchange objects in a network between systems running Version 4 and systems running earlier releases, PTFs must be applied to the earlier systems. Objects created on Version 4 cannot be restored to earlier systems in the network until the PTFs are applied to the earlier systems. You can aoid this delay by ordering the needed PTFs and applying them now to the systems that will remain at earlier releases. Use Table 23, below, to determine which PTFs to order for the systems that remain at earlier release leels. You will receie seeral corequisite PTFs when you order any of the PTFs shown. These PTFs are needed for the following: Restoration of sae files Database objects Journal receiers Program objects Objects that are associated with byte stream files: Document objects (*DOC) Stream File objects (*STMF) Symbolic Link objects (*SYMLNK) Table 23. PTFs for Earlier Systems in a Network to Enable Exchanging Data Order this PTF For System Remaining at Release SF33467 V3R2M0 ObjectConnect/400 users that upgrade to V4R3M0 or newer releases must apply all applicable PTFs to all other systems in the network. Do this before the release upgrade. Upgrades from V4R3M0 and newer releases do not require special PTFs, because the base code includes these fixes. 36 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

55 Table 24. PTFs for Earlier Systems in a Network with ObjectConnect/400 Order this PTF For System Remaining at Release SF45273 V3R2M0 SF50270 V3R6M0 SF45274 V3R7M0 SF45132 V4R1M0 SF45321 V4R2M0 None V4R3M0 or newer release Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 21. Preparation Program Temporary Fixes Required Before Installing V4R5M0 Software You do not need to apply these PTFs when upgrading from V4R2M0, V4R3M0, or V4R4M0 to V4R5M0. If you are upgrading from V4R2M0, V4R3M0, or V4R4M0, continue with the next step of Table 11 on page 21. If you are upgrading from V4R1M0, continue with the instructions below. If you are upgrading from V4R1M0 these, PTFs must be applied before you can start or complete software installation procedures. If you are upgrading from V4R1M0 to V4R5M0, you must apply the Installation Preparation PTFs for V4R2M0/V4R3M0/V4R4M0/V4R5M0 Software, SK3T Apply these PTFs as near as possible to the time that you will install the Licensed Internal Code. Refer to the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC , for more information about performing IPLs, applying PTFs, and using the control panel. Installing the Required Program Temporary Fixes to Upgrade from V4R1M0 to V4R5M0 Use the following procedure to apply the appropriate PTFs to your V4R1M0 system. You should adequately sae your system before and after you apply the PTFs. Also, ensure that you hae a current back-up of your system before you apply the PTFs. Refer to the book Backup and Recoery, SC , for information on how to use option 21 of the SAVE menu. Applying the Installation Preparation Program Temporary Fixes: 1. Locate the CD-ROM labeled Installation Preparation PTFs for V4R2M0/V4R3M0/V4R4M0/V4R5M0 Software, SK3T This CD-ROM was shipped with your V4R5M0 distribution media. Load the CD-ROM in the optical deice. 2. Type: GO PTF, and press Enter. 3. Select option 8 (Install program temporary fix package) and press Enter. The Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes display appears. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 37

56 Install Options for Program Temporary Fixes System: Type choices, press Enter. Deice... OPT01 Name, *SERVICE Automatic IPL... N Y=Yes N=No Restart Type... *SYS *SYS, *FULL SYSTEMA PTF type =All PTFs 2=HIPER PTFs and HIPER LIC fixes only 3=HIPER LIC fixes only 4=RefreshLicensed Internal Code Other options... N Y=Yes N=No 4. Specify the following: Deice: OPT01 Automatic IPL: N Restart Type: *SYS PTF type: 1 Other options: N 5. Press Enter. The system applies the appropriate PTFs for your current release. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 21. Ordering the Current Cumulatie PTF Package If some time has passed since you receied your release, you should order the most recent cumulatie PTF package for the new release. First, refer to Obtaining Preentie Serice Planning (PSP) Information on page 26, and then reiew the current PSP information. Check whether the cumulatie PTF package listed is more recent than your cumulatie PTF package. If your cumulatie PTF package is not current, use the following ECS procedure to order the most recent package. 1. Type on a command line: SNDPTFORD SF99rm, where is the ersion, r is the release, and m is the modification leel. 2. Press Enter. The cumulatie PTF package is applied after the installation. For more information about PTFs, access Preentatie Serice Planning information from this Internet location: Follow these links (in order): 1. TechInfo & Databases 2. Pre Ser Planning - PSP 3. All Preentie Serice Planning Documents by Release 4. R AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

57 Scroll down the list to iew PTF information. If you do not hae access to the Internet or electronic customer support, contact your software support proider to obtain this information. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 22. Ordering Group PTFs A group PTF is a single PTF that proides a logical set of PTFs affecting a specific function (for example, Database, JAVA, HIPER, and so on). When new PTFs affecting the function become aailable, group PTFs are dynamically updated. Order the group PTFs that pertain to your system now. You can find a list of group PTFs that are aailable for ordering by linking to the following Web site: If you do not hae access to the Internet, contact your software support proider to obtain this information. Note: For the HIPER group PTFs, you are required to hae the current cumulatie PTF package, on your system. Then after your installation of the cumulatie PTF package, apply the HIPER group PTF. Apply the group PTFs after your installation and after the application of the latest cumulatie PTF package, as directed in Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141. For a list of group PTFs follow these steps: 1. Access this Internet address: 2. Select AS/400 Technical Support. Note: If you hae not already registered, you will be prompted to register, before you can access this informational database. This registration is free. 3. Scroll down the naigation bar on the left, and select Tech Info and Databases. 4. Select Pre Serice Planning (PSP). 5. Select All Preentatie Serice Planning Documents. 6. Select the Collapse button at the top. 7. Select number 13. Group PTFs. You will see a list of group PTFs. 8. Select Next at the bottom to continue to the next page of group PTFs. To use the Database group PTFs as an example: 1. Access the list of group PTFs, as instructed aboe. 2. To preent query performance problems, order the Database group PTF SF99105, and hae the CD-ROM aailable before your release upgrade. 3. Apply the Database group PTF immediately after you apply the latest cumulatie PTF package, as directed in Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 22. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 39

58 Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation If you are upgrading OS/400 and your licensed programs, you need to decide which installation procedure you will use to install the new release. For a reiew of the automatic and manual installation processes, refer to Replacing Licensed Programs, Automatic or Manual Install Process on page 5. When to Use Manual Installation If you are doing any of the installation procedures in the following list, you should use the manual installation process: Adding a disk deice using mirrored protection, deice parity protection, or user auxiliary storage pools. Changing primary language (see Considerations When Changing a Primary Language on page 53) Changing the enironment (AS/400 or System/36), system alues, language feature code, or configuration alues. Planning to use an alternate installation deice when upgrading to V4R5M0. Creating logical partitions during the installation process. Using tapes created with the Sae System (SAVSYS) command. (The SAVSYS command creates tapes meant for recoery.) When to Use Automatic Installation Use the automatic installation process when you determine that you do not need to use the manual process. During most of the automatic installation process, user interention is not required except to load a new media olume when the system prompts for one. Therefore, there is no idle system time waiting for the operator to respond to messages or choose installation options during the installation process. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 22. Use Prepare for Install Creating and Customizing an Installation List Creating and Customizing an Installation List describes how to use the Prepare for install option to create a customized installation list and preselect the licensed programs you want to install. The Prepare for install option compares the programs that are installed on your AS/400 system with the programs on the media. It then generates a list. This list contains preselected programs that will be replaced during the installation. To customize this list, select or deselect programs from this installation list, depending on which programs you want installed or replaced. You must erify that what you ordered can be replaced. You must erify that you hae all of the necessary upgrades on your installation media to complete the automatic installation. Note: Some licensed programs from the single set will not appear on this installation list. The new release of these licensed programs instals during 40 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

59 the upgrade, if a preious release is currently installed on the system. If these licensed programs are new (being installed for the first time), they cannot be added to this customized list. Howeer you can install them by using the method in section Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127. Use the following process to create and customize an installation list from your distribution media: 1. Arrange the optical media for Licensed Internal Code, OS/400, and licensed programs in the order that is shown in Table 17 on page 28 and indicated with an * symbol. The order is ery important, and more specifically, only include the I_BASE_01, B29xx_nn, L29xx_nn and F29xx_nn optical media. Do not include any other optical media when creating the installation list at this time. 2. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(95) - to put your message queue in the break mode. 3. A message display could appear. Press Enter. 4. Type: GO LICPGM 5. Select option 5 (Prepare for install) from the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu and press Enter. The Prepare for Install display appears. 6. Select the option to Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release display appears. Work withlicensed Programs for Target Release System: SYSTEMA Type choices, press Enter. Generate list from 1 1=Distribution media 2=Merge withadditional distribution media 3=Modify preiously generated list Optical deice... OPT01 *NONE, Name Target Release... V4R5M0 VxRxMx 7. Do the following: Load the first optical media in the optical deice. Specify 1 (Distribution media), for the Generate list from prompt. Specify a alue for the optical deice. Specify the target release. Press Enter. 8. When the Display Messages display appears, load the next media olume. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue.....: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity....: 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply.... G Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 41

60 Type G, and press Enter. Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. 9. Continue to load the optical media in order (as in the step aboe) until the system has read all of the olumes. 10. After the system reads all the optical media and the message Load next olume in optical deice (X G) appears, type an X and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release display appears. Work withlicensed Programs for Target Release System: Target release...:v4r5m0 Estimated additional storage for selections (M)...: XX.XX SYSTEMA Type options, press Enter. 1=Select 5=Display release-to-release mapping Licensed Product Opt Program Option Description *BASE AS/400 Licensed Internal Code SS1 *BASE Operating System/ SS1 OS/400 - Library QGPL SS1 OS/400 - Library QUSRSYS SS1 1 OS/400 - Extended Base Support SS1 2 OS/400 - Online Information SS1 3 OS/400 - Extended Base Directory Support _ 5769SS1 4 OS/400 - S/36 and S/38 Migration _ 5769SS1 5 OS/400 - System/36 Enironment The list you see contains the licensed programs that are on the optical distribution media and in the installed product table on your system. Preselected licensed programs indicate that the product on the distribution media can replace a product that is installed on the system. (Preselected means a 1 appears in the option column.) Verify that you receied all of the licensed programs and priced features that you ordered. Notes: a. Use the F11 key to see alternate iews which display information about licensed programs in greater detail. Press F11 to toggle through these iews: Display expected action Display product option Display additional storage Display expected release b. Use option 5 (Display release-to-release mapping) to see what, if any, currently installed product can be replaced by the selected product. c. IBM ships specific licensed programs with each software order at no charge to you. These products are listed in Table 25, below. (They do not appear in the media description report.) 42 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

61 d. If you ordered Client Access products, you will receie seeral licensed programs. Refer to Notes and Packaging Details for Client Access on page 179 for information about Client Access products. e. If the display contains the message, Problem occurred loading olume into deice, or if it states that a product was not found on the media, one of these situations occured: You missed loading one of the media You left the same media in the drie and the system read it again the target release no longer supports a licensed program To correct the first two situations, begin again with step 1 on page 41. Otherwise, continue with the next step below. Table 25. No-charge licensed programs that are aailable with V4R5M0 OS/ AS1 WebSphere Application Serer 5769-DG1 HTTP Serer 5769-JC1 AS/400 Toolbox for Jaa 5769-JV1 Deeloper Kit for Jaa, plus options 3 & PM1 Performance Management/ TC1 TCP/IP Connectiity Utilities for AS/ WSV AS/400 for Windows Serer, plus options 1 & XE1 AS/400 Client Access Express for Windows Select additional licensed programs or optional parts of licensed programs to add to your customized list. Type a 1 in the Option column to select a licensed program to install. To remoe a selected product from the list, blank out or remoe the 1 in the Option column. When you complete your selections, press Enter. A message at the bottom of the display will prompt you to enter more changes, or press Enter to confirm the changes. The Confirm Target Release Licensed Programs display appears. Press Enter to confirm the list. The Prepare for Install display appears. Select the option to List Licensed Programs Not Found on Media and press Enter. The Licensed Programs Not Found On Media display appears. If no products are listed, you hae all the media needed to replace your existing software. Press Enter to return to the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Go to the next step (step 15 on page 44) to create a printed list of the licensed programs you selected. If there are any products listed: Delete the licensed programs that are no longer supported. Then, you may need to obtain the others before you begin installing software. Do the following: a. Check to see whether you accidentally omitted an optical disc when you performed step 7 on page 41. b. Compare your media labels to the product tables (Table 18 on page 30, Table 19 on page 31, Table 20 on page 31, and Licensed Product Table on page 214) to see if the product was shipped. Also check the media description report, while refering to The Media Description Report on page 213 for more information. If you did not receie a licensed program that you expected, contact your software proider. c. When you receie the product or locate the media, use the distribution media and product tables (Table 17 on page 28, Table 18 on page 30, Table 19 on page 31, Table 20 on page 31, and Licensed Product Table on page 214 Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 43

62 on page 214) and the media description report to add its contents to the installation list. Use the procedure Merging Additional Licensed Programs into the Installation List, below. Then, go to the next step to create a printed list of the programs you selected to install Note: If you want to modify the installation list, type 3 (3=Modify preiously generated list) on the Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release display. From the Prepare for Install display, select the option to Display Licensed Programs for the Target Release and press Enter. Specify *PRINT for output on the Display Licensed Programs for Target Release display and press Enter. This creates a spooled file that you can print and use as a reference while performing the installation. You should see the message Task to prepare for install successfully completed appear at the bottom of the display. Press F3 to exit. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 22. Merging Additional Licensed Programs into the Installation List Licensed programs that were not included in the preious list now can be added. These programs could be from the single set of media or independently shipped. The order in which you load the additional optical media is not important at this point. Note: Not all products will be included in this list. Among those are PRPQs, LPOs, and licensed programs on the single set. If you want to install these products for the first time, use the LICPGM menu option 1 or 11. Do the following to add licensed programs from additional optical media to the installation list: 1. Load the installation media that contains the additional licensed programs. Wait for the In Use indicator to go out. 2. Starting from the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu, select option 5 (Prepare for install), and press Enter. The Prepare for Install display appears. 3. Select the option to Work with licensed programs for the target release, and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release display appears. 4. Select option 2 (Merge with additional distribution media) for the Generate list from prompt so that optical media contents can be added to the list. The target release alue of the existing list appears. Specify a name for the optical deice, and press Enter. 5. When the Display Messages display appears, load the next media olume. 44 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

63 Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library... : QSYS Library...: Seerity.... : 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply...G Type G, and press Enter Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release display appears. The list includes your preiously generated list plus the content of the additional optical media. Type a 1 next to the additional licensed programs or optional parts that you want to select, and press Enter. The Confirm Licensed Programs for Target Release display appears. Press Enter to confirm the list. You see the Prepare for Install display. Select the option to Display Licensed Programs for the Target Release, and press Enter. Specify *PRINT for output on the Display Licensed Programs for Target Release display, and press Enter. This creates a spooled file that you can print and use as a reference while performing the installation. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 22. Cleaning Up Your System Storage Space Cleaning up your system before you begin to install a new release makes more storage space aailable for the installation process. Refer to the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC to keep your AS/400 system running smoothly. Consider the following things that you can do to clean up your system and make more disk space aailable: You can use the automatic clean-up option in Operational Assistant* to keep your system free of unnecessary clutter. You should permanently apply any PTFs that are temporarily applied on your system if you hae not already done so. (See Permanently Apply Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) on page 34.) Delete PTF sae files and coer letters that are no longer needed. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 45

64 Delete any software applications that you installed from software sampler CD-ROMs. You should delete licensed programs or optional parts that you no longer use. Refer to How to Delete Licensed Programs During Clean Up. Be sure to read Notes About Deleting Licensed Programs on page 182 for additional information. Hae each user clean up the objects that are owned by their user profiles. Delete any user profiles that you no longer need. Refer to Cleaning Up User Profiles on page 47. If you hae not already done so, delete the enrollment for any user who is no longer with your organization or who is no longer using OfficeVision functions. Also, delete old mail, calendars, documents, and folders that you no longer need. For information about how to do these tasks, refer to the book Managing OfficeVision/400, SH Using Prepare for Install to Clean Up Your System Storage Space The Prepare for Install option on the Work with Licensed Programs menu proides tools to help you clean up licensed programs and user profiles. You should do this before you install a new release of software. How to Delete Licensed Programs During Clean Up: Cleaning up your system before installing a new release of software can include deleting products. You may no longer need some licensed programs, or you may plan to not replace them. Occasionally, the system may require that you delete an obsolete product before you install a new release. The Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu option Prepare for install proides an easy way for you to identify and delete licensed programs when you are preparing to install a new release of software. Do the following: 1. Select option 5 (Prepare for install) from the Work with Licensed Programs display, and press Enter. The Prepare for Install display appears. 2. Select the option Work with Licensed Programs to Delete, and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs to Delete display appears. The display shows a list of installed products that should be deleted from the system. Licensed programs may appear in this list for the following reasons: The licensed program should not remain on the system because it is not supported in the target release. The licensed program is installed, but no replacement product was found on the optical distribution media. A preselected licensed program was remoed from the installation list so its associated installed product appears on this display. If the installed product remains on the system, it will be replaced by the licensed program that is on the distribution media. 3. Press F11 (Display reasons), then press the Help key to display the reason each product is included in the list for deletion. Carefully reiew the reason for deletion before you take any action. When you are sure of which products to delete, sae a copy of the products, using option 1 (Sae) in case you may need them again. Then use option 4 (Delete) to delete the products before you install the target release of software. Option 4 immediately deletes the product from your system. 46 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

65 Cleaning Up User Profiles: Cleaning up user profiles and the objects that are owned by user profiles before installing a new release is good system hygiene. Note: Do not delete any IBM-supplied user profiles (profiles that start with the letter Q). Hae each user sign on and do the following: 1. Type the command WRKOBJOWN. The Work with Objects by owner display is shown. It lists all of the objects that are owned by the user. Use option 4 (Delete) to delete objects that are no longer needed. 2. Type the command WRKSPLF to list all of the spooled files that are owned by the user. Delete spooled files that are no longer needed. If the users cannot do this, you can do it as follows: 1. Sign on as security officer (QSECOFR user profile). 2. Select option 5 (Prepare for install) from the Work with Licensed program (LICPGM) menu. 3. Select the option to work with user profiles from the Prepare for Install display. The Work with User Profiles display appears. 4. Use option 12 (Work with objects by owner) to display the objects that are owned by a user profile. First, use the F21 key (F21=Select Assistance leel) to change your assistance leel to Intermediate. Do the following: For each user profile, delete objects that are no longer needed. Use the WRKSPLF SELECT(*ALL) command to delete spooled files that are no longer needed. 5. Delete the user profiles that you no longer need. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Ealuating Your Disk Storage Needs You must ensure that you will hae adequate disk storage before starting to install software. To make more efficient use of your storage, you should clear your system of items you no longer require before estimating how much storage you need. Refer to Cleaning Up Your System Storage Space on page 45. Checking Disk Storage Space Requirements Before you schedule a time to install this release, determine the aailable storage space and the storage space that is required for this release. 1. Type GO LICPGM. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. 2. Choose option 5 (Prepare for Install). 3. Type 1 next to Estimated storage requirements for system ASP. 4. The Estimated Storage Requirements for System ASP display appears. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 47

66 Estimated Storage Requirements for System ASP System: XXXXXXXXX When upgrading to the target release, type the additional storage required below. You will need to factor in new and updated PRPQ and LPO sizes, as well as, other third-party software sizes. The information you proide, along with the alue for "Estimated additional storage for selections (M)" on the Work with Licensed Programs for Target Release display, will be used to estimate storage requirements. Type alue, press Enter. Additional storage required... M Enter the total storage that is needed for additional applications. Include storage for single set licensed programs that were not included on your customized installation list, and storage for PRPQs, LPOs, or third party software. Round up to the nearest whole number. Refer to the product documentation to determine how much additional storage is required. The system uses this number to calculate the disk storage that is required to install the target release. Note: Include third party software only when you intend to store it in the system ASP. Refer to the book Backup and Recoery, SC , or the Backup and Recoery articles in the Information Center for more information about system ASP. If you are upgrading from a release older than V4R4M0, the words on these two displays, both aboe and below, may appear differently from the displays on your AS/400. The displays are similar, though. They are titled, Estimated Storage Requirements for System ASP, and contain similar information. 5. Press Enter to continue to the next display. The second Estimated Storage Requirements for System ASP display appears. Estimated Storage Requirements for System ASP System: Target Release...: V4R5M0 Current supported system capacity (M)...: Storage used (M)...: 6428 Storage required to install target release (M)..: 7398 Install growth: Licensed program growth(m)...: 916 Install will multi-process...: Yes XXXXXXXX Press Enter to continue F3=Exit F11=Show multi-process details F12=Cancel 6. This display shows you information that you will need to determine whether enough disk storage is aailable to complete the installation. The numbers in the sample display aboe are only an example. The numbers that display for your system will differ. Compare the alue for Storage required to install target release with the alue for Current supported system capacity. If the alue for Current supported system capacity is greater than the alue for Storage required to install target release, you can continue with the installation process. If 48 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

67 7. the system capacity is less than the storage required, you may need to add additional disk units or install fewer optional programs. In the example that is shown aboe, the installation can proceed because the storage capacity of 12583M is larger than the 7398M storage required to install. Press Enter to return to the Prepare for Install display. You should repeat this process if you make any changes to your system that affect the aailable disk storage space. Compressed Objects and Storage Space: All of the licensed programs and some objects of the operating system ship in a compressed form which requires less storage space on your system. System jobs (QDCPOBJx, where x is a number) automatically decompress these objects during the installation process if your system has sufficient unused disk storage. If enough storage space is not aailable, the system decompresses the objects when you use them, which could affect the performance of the system. The system decompresses objects according to the following criteria: Greater than 750M aailable storage The system submits jobs to decompress all system objects just installed M aailable storage The system only decompresses frequently-used objects automatically. Object usage information (the number of days an object has been used and the last-used date) is used to identify frequently used objects. The system decompresses any object that was used at least 5 times when the last use was within the last 14 days. The system leaes the remaining low-use objects in compressed form. This does not include decompression of objects that are shipped in the base operating system and in library QSYS. The system resets usage information for those objects during the installation process. For all other licensed programs, the object usage information is kept during the installation process. A call to a system program does not update its usage information; the system does not automatically decompress programs in constrained storage mode. Howeer, high-use programs ship in decompressed form and are not considered compressible. Less than 250M aailable storage The system does not submit the jobs and decompresses the objects as they are used. Note: The QDCPOBJx system jobs may run for some time after the installation process completes. More information about compressing and decompressing objects is aailable in the book CL Programming, SC Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Verifying the Integrity of System Objects The installation process requires that the QSECOFR and QLPINSTALL user profiles exist in the system distribution directory. Also, the QSECOFR user profile cannot Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 49

68 contain secondary language libraries or alternate initial menus. The process requires that all database cross reference files are not in error before the install process begins. Verifying User Profiles and Checking Cross Reference Files The following procedure will add the QSECOFR and QLPINSTALL user profiles if you hae deleted them from the system distribution directory. It will also check for errors in database cross reference files on your system. 1. Type: GO LICPGM at the command line, and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs menu appears. 2. Type 5 (Prepare for Install), and press Enter. The Prepare for Install display appears. 3. Select the option to Verify System Objects, and press Enter. The system erifies the system directory entries and adds the QSECOFR and QLPINSTALL user profiles if necessary. Database cross reference files are checked for errors. 4. If the database cross reference files are in error, you will see message CPI3DA3. Follow the instructions of this message to resole the errors before you continue. 5. If the database cross reference files are not in error, you will see a completion message at the bottom of the display. Press F3 (Exit) to return to the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Checking the QSECOFR User Profile The QSECOFR user profile cannot hae a secondary language library (QSYS29xx) at a preious release in its library list when you install a new release. If you hae an initial program for the QSECOFR user program, be sure that it does not add a secondary language library to the system library list. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Additional Considerations Estimating Installation Time Use the Checklist for Estimating Installation Time and other information in Appendix D to estimate the time that is needed to install this release of software on your system. Making the Most of Your Installation Time, below, and Conditions that Affect Installation Time on page 186 contain information you should read that could help reduce the installation time. Making the Most of Your Installation Time The following actions will minimize the time required to install your system: Use the automatic installation process rather than performing a manual installation process. Refer to Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation on page 40 for more information. Perform the licensed program installation with all subsystems ended (ENDSBS *ALL). If you are performing an automatic installation, you are operating in the 50 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

69 preferred enironment. This enironment proides maximum system resources to the installation process and eliminates certain functions required only when subsystems are actie. Verify that you hae enough auxiliary storage to perform the installation. If there is additional auxiliary storage aailable, the installation process time can be reduced. Option 5 (Prepare for Install) on the Work With Licensed Program (LICPGM) menu will tell you if the install can multiprocess. If you are not using the automatic installation process, be sure to set the QSYSOPR message queue in *BREAK mode before you start the installation process. Load the next olume of installation media when prompted by the system. The files are loaded faster when the system can use multiprocess installation instead of single-process installation. Howeer, if you encounter a message prompting you to load the next olume of installation media, the actie jobs will not continue installing the licensed programs until you respond to the message. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Gathering Performance Information Gathering performance data before installing this release gies you a base with which to compare your system s performance after the installation is complete. You can gather the information by using the Start Performance Monitor (STRPFRMON) command or the Work with Performance Collection (WRKPFRCOL) command. If you use the STRPFRMON command or WRKPFRCOL command, you should collect two sets of data. The first set should be an oeriew for a 24-hour period. Collect two 24-hour periods of data on days when the system load is normal to heay. Start Performance Monitor (STRPFRMON) Type choices, press Enter. Member... *GEN Name, *GEN Library... QPFRDATA Name Text 'description'... *SAME Time interal (in minutes) , 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, Stops data collection... *ELAPSED *ELAPSED, *TIME, *NOMAX Days from current day Hour Minutes Data type... *ALL *ALL, *SYS Select jobs... *ALL *ALL, *ACTIVE Trace type... *NONE *NONE, *ALL Dump the trace... *YES *YES, *NO Job trace interal seconds Job types... *DFT *NONE, *DFT, *ASJ, *BCH... + for more alues More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=RefreshF10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Set these fields as follows: Time interal (in minutes) 15 Hour 24 Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 51

70 The second set of performance data should be detailed for a 1-hour period. Collect the data oer seeral periods while the system is used interactiely and in batch at moderate to heay use. Collect the data at the same time eery day. Start Performance Monitor (STRPFRMON) Type choices, press Enter. Member... *GEN Name, *GEN Library... QPFRDATA Name Text 'description'... *SAME Time interal (in minutes) , 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, Stops data collection... *ELAPSED *ELAPSED, *TIME, *NOMAX Days from current day Hour Minutes Data type... *ALL *ALL, *SYS Select jobs... *ALL *ALL, *ACTIVE Trace type... *ALL *NONE, *ALL Dump the trace... *YES *YES, *NO Job trace interal seconds Job types... *DFT *NONE, *DFT, *ASJ, *BCH... + for more alues More... F3=Exit F4=Prompt F5=RefreshF10=Additional parameters F12=Cancel F13=How to use this display F24=More keys Set these fields as follows: Time interal (in minutes) 5 Hour 1 Trace type *all Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Prepare to Install Softcopy Information Most AS/400 system and product documentation is aailable as online books on CD-ROM media. These online books can be used on personal computers. A small amount of planning before you install softcopy information will make the task a simple process. If you hae Internet access, you can also read the online books at the following Internet location: Where to Find Softcopy Information You receie the AS/400e Softcopy Library CD-ROM, SK3T-0118, with your order. The readme.txt file contains detailed information to help you decide what parts of the softcopy library you need. It also tells you how to install the softcopy library to ensure the most benefit for your enterprise. Note: If you ordered the Redbook Library on CD-ROM, you receie an additional booklet with it. If the primary language of your AS/400 system is not English, you receie the softcopy library in the appropriate national language ersion (NLV) and English. You can order the softcopy library in the NLV for any secondary languages that are installed on your AS/400 system. There may be more than one language on the distribution media for the NLV softcopy library. 52 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

71 Accessing Softcopy Information We recommend using the softcopy library exclusiely from a personal computer. You do not need to store the books or booksheles on your AS/400 system. This keeps more DASD aailable for business use. If you plan to use the Softcopy library on your AS/400, the Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141, directs you when to install the softcopy library. Additional Considerations to install the Softcopy Library on the AS/400 If you want to keep any IBM-supplied booksheles installed on your current AS/400 system, you need to sae them before you install your target release. Refer to the AS/400e Softcopy Library CD-ROM, SK3T-0118, for more information on saing and installing booksheles on your AS/400 system. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Planning for National Language Support This topic briefly describes key facts you should know if you use secondary languages or if you need to change the primary language of your system. The primary language is the national language that is installed on the system as the default language used to display and print information. The primary language is also used to serice the system. Note: If the primary language is uppercase English (2938 or 2950), you need to type uppercase characters when you respond to system messages. Secondary languages are one or more additional national languages that can be installed on the system to display and print information. The book National Language Support, SC , contains more information about planning for and using national languages on your AS/400 system. Considerations When Changing a Primary Language You can change the primary language of your system in these two ways: By using secondary language media to replace the language objects. While replacing a release using the manual installation process. You cannot change your primary language to a language you currently hae installed as a secondary language on your system. You must delete the secondary language before you can change it to your primary language. Use Option 22 from the Work with Licensed Programs menu to delete a secondary language. If you use Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language, the release and modification leel of your system must be the same as the release and modification leel of your secondary language media. You need the media that contains OS/400 and the media that contains the secondary language. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 53

72 When changing your primary language from a single-byte character set (SBCS) to a double-byte character set (DBCS) or from a DBCS to SBCS, refer to the book National Language Support, SC The installation process takes significantly more time than a typical software installation. Make sure that you configure your console deice to support the default code page of the primary language you are going to install. Change the console deice to one that supports the code page of the new primary language before installing V4R5M0. While F type keyboards are supported for many national language ersions, they are not supported for Czech, Farsi, Hungarian, Russian, Polish, Sloakian, or Thai. If you change your primary language to one of these national language ersions, the system console cannot hae an F type keyboard. Change the system console to a deice that does not hae an F type keyboard before installing any of these national language ersions as a primary language. If you do not, an error occurs and the installation fails. Considerations for Secondary Languages IMPORTANT: If you are installing a double-byte character set (DBCS) secondary language, you must hae a DBCS primary language installed on your system. You can install a single-byte character set (SBCS) secondary language on a system with a DBCS primary language. Secondary language libraries must be at the same release leel as OS/400. The process to add a secondary language installs only one secondary language at a time. If you need to add more than one secondary language, you need perform the procedure to install a secondary language multiple times. This book contains the following two procedures to install secondary languages: Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu on page 135 installs secondary language objects for OS/400 and installed licensed programs. Use this procedure when you are installing a secondary language after installing the new release or when you are adding additional secondary languages to the system. Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command on page 138 restores a secondary language for only one licensed program or optional part. Use this procedure when you want to restore a secondary language for only one licensed program. Use this procedure when you are installing secondary language objects for licensed programs that you installed using the RSTLICPGM command. Only the secondary language objects for the installed licensed programs are installed. If you add a licensed program or an optional part after the secondary language is installed, you will not hae the secondary language objects for licensed programs you add later. Install the secondary language again to get the new language objects for the added licensed program. Before You Replace a Release: When you plan to install a new release, consider the following: Plan to install the new release of any secondary languages you hae currently installed on your system. Note: Delete secondary languages you no longer need to sae storage space. If your system was shipped from a different country, you may not need the secondary languages that are installed on the system. 54 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

73 If you want to delete a secondary language for all of the licensed programs installed on your system, use option 22 on the Work with Licensed Program menu. If you want to delete a secondary language for only one licensed program, use the Delete Licensed Program (DLTLICPGM) command. If you are changing the primary language to a language that is already installed as a secondary language, delete the secondary language before you install it as a primary language. The QSECOFR user profile cannot hae a secondary language library at a preious release in its library list when you install a new release. If you hae an initial program for the QSECOFR user profile, be sure it does not add a secondary language library to the system library list. ( Checking the QSECOFR User Profile on page 50 ensures that you do this.) If you added a secondary language library (QSYS29xx) to the system alues QSYSLIBL or QUSRLIBL, use the WRKSYSVAL command to remoe the library from the library list before you install a new release. ( Setting System Values Before Installing on page 32 ensures that you do this.) The book National Language Support, SC also contains more information about secondary language libraries in user profiles. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Identifying Changes to IBM-Supplied Objects When you replace your software with the V4R5M0 release, the system keeps changes you made to some IBM-supplied objects. Certain job descriptions and subsystem descriptions are restored during the installation process. The installation process creates three new libraries: QINSYS QINMEDIA QINPRIOR The system saes your customized descriptions in library QINSYS. When the descriptions are installed into QSYS, the system compares those alues with the descriptions in QINSYS. If there are any differences, the system uses your customized alue from QINSYS. If there are conflicts in certain alues, the system uses the alue from the installation media, and the conflicting alue remains in QINSYS. QINMEDIA holds the description from the installation media. QINPRIOR holds the descriptions from the prior release leel so that you can compare the current and preious release descriptions. Use the PRTSYSINF command before you upgrade to hae a copy of the IBM supplied objects. After the upgrade you can change these objects back to the preious customization. Changes to IBM-Supplied Objects: If you hae made changes to any of the IBM-supplied descriptions shown in the table below, the system keeps your changes. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 55

74 Table 26. IBM Supplied Descriptions that Retain Customized Information Job Descriptions Subsystem Descriptions QDFTJOBD Default job description QBASE Basic controlling QZMFEJBD QSYSWRK autostart job entry QBATCH Batch QESAUTON Automatic problem notification QCMN Communications QFSIOPWK File serer I/O processor QCTL Controlling subsystem QMSF Used by QPGMF job QINTER Interactie QPDAUTOPAR Used for automatic problem analysis QPGMR Programmer QQQTEMPS DB2/400 job description used by QSYSWRK QSNADS Systems Network Architecture (SNA) Distribution QSPLERROR Spooling error QSPL Spooling subsystem QSTRUPJD Auto start QSYSWRK User subsystem QSYSWRK System subsystem QUSRWRK User subsystem QTMSNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) job description QCTLIJBD Controlling subsystem IGC Moed or Duplicated IBM-Supplied Product Libraries: If you hae moed IBM-supplied product libraries to user auxiliary storage pools (user ASPs), the installation procedures will not update the libraries. To preent this problem, ensure that IBM-supplied product libraries are in the system ASP before you start the installation procedures. The product libraries should remain in the system ASP. PTFs are not applied to product libraries that are not in the system ASP. 56 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

75 If you hae duplicated IBM-supplied product libraries, delete the duplicates before you start the installation procedures. The installation process fails, and the new release does not install until duplicated IBM-supplied libraries are deleted. Duplicated IBM-supplied Objects: If you hae duplicated any IBM-supplied objects, you may want to make new duplicates after you install the release. This allows you to take adantage of functions added in the new release. Examples of duplicated objects that you may hae include the following: Message text descriptions Commands Command defaults Deleting Logical Files Created Oer IBM-Supplied Physical Files in QSYS: If you hae created logical files oer IBM-supplied physical files in QSYS, the logical files will be deleted during the installation process. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Basic System Hardware Considerations During software installation, you are concerned with three basic hardware items: the control panel, the console, and the installation deice. Get to Know the Control Panel Examine the control panel for your new system. Ensure that you and the operators who perform the software installation know how to use the control panel functions. The book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC , contains information you can reiew to learn how to operate the control panel. Check the Console The software installation process expects the console, or the PC that is assigned as the console, to be attached at port 0 and address 0 of the first workstation controller. In most cases, your hardware should be defined in this way. You should erify that the console is attached at port 0 address 0. Refer to the topic Physical Planning Reference at this Web site, for rules about attaching PCs. Prepare Installation Deice and Media V4R5M0 software distribution media is optical media. Howeer, there may be times when you also use tape media for installation. Put your tapes or optical media in the same room as your system seeral hours before you begin the installation. This way, the media are at the same temperature and humidity as the system. When Installing from Optical Media: The optical deice used with the optical media class is considered the alternate IPL deice. On some systems, the optical deice is mounted ertically. Sets of tabs retain the media in the media drawer. For Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 57

76 ertically mounted deices, ensure that the lower set of tabs are fully extended before you attempt to load optical media. Use care when loading optical media into ertically mounted units. If the tabs are not fully extended, the media can fall and be damaged. When loading ertically mounted units, the labeled side of the optical media faces the extended tabs. Keep optical media in its protectie case when not in use. When handling optical media, do not touch the surface. If the media has dust or fingerprints on it, it can be cleaned with a lint free cloth (the tape cleaning cloth can be used). Gently wipe the media from the center to the outside of the disc. When you install from optical media, it is important to know what each media olume contains so that you do not exit the installation process prematurely. The process of creating a master installation list will help you become familiar with what software is contained on each media olume. The system must be powered on before you can load optical media in the media drawer. Starting from a Power Off Condition on page 158 describes how to start the system when power is off. For more information about using optical media, refer to the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC When Installing from Tape: Determine which tape unit to use for the alternate IPL. The tape unit for the alternate IPL on the 9404 system unit and the 9402 system unit is either the tape unit in the system unit or a tape unit attached to the system unit. The system unit is not the expansion unit. If you hae only one tape unit, use it as the tape unit for the alternate IPL. If you do not know which tape unit to use, then contact your hardware serice representatie. Note: If you are using a 2440 tape drie with the high-speed feature to install a new release, disable the high-speed feature on the tape unit. Do this before you load the first tape. Instructions for disabling and enabling the high-speed feature are located in the book Backup and Recoery, SC If the high-speed feature is not disabled before you begin the installation process, SRC B1xx 1934 is shown. This SRC indicates that you hae the wrong tape mounted. To help preent media errors, be sure to clean the heads on your alternate IPL tape drie before you begin the installation process. Refer to your tape drie reference guide if you need more information on how to clean the heads. If you receie a media error message during your installation process, go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 for recoery information. Sharing a Tape Deice: If you hae a 3480 or 3490 tape deice and are sharing that tape deice with another system, be sure you inform eeryone when you plan to use the tape drie for an installation process. Be sure other users do not assign the tape drie while you are using it because the installation process will fail during the installation of the Licensed Internal Code. Installing from a Tape Library: When you install a release using a tape library deice, do not use the deice in library mode or random mode. The 3494 deice should use standalone mode. The 9429, 9427, 3590, and 3570 deices should use either automatic, sequential, or manual mode. Refer to the operator s guide for the media library deice for information on setting up and using the correct mode. 58 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

77 Installing from an Alternate Installation Deice: If you use an alternate installation deice, you need to ensure that the deice is set up and enabled. You also need to hae the optical media for Licensed Internal Code as well as your tape media. Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew on page 229 describes the alternate installation deice function, identifies situations in which older tape deices may require its use. This topic also describes how to set up, enable, or disable an alternate installation deice. Installing from a non-ibm Tape Deice: If you are using a non-ibm tape deice, read informational APAR II09865 for more details on installing a release. If your tape deice emulates an IBM tape deice, you may experience problems during the installation process, and receie message CPF5401. If this occurs, contact your endor to confirm whether your tape drie is compatible with V4R5M0. Determining Installation Deice Names This topic describes the naming conentions for the deice that can be used for the alternate IPL. The optical drie is the installation deice for software distribution media. Examples in this book use OPT01 for the optical deice (optical media class). This is the AS/400 normal naming conention. Your system may be set up to use the System/36 naming conention. Use Table 27 to select the correct deice name for your system or use the name you hae selected for your installation deice. Table 27. Naming Conentions MediaType System/36 Names AS/400 Normal Names Optical Media (CD or DVD) OPTxx OPTxx Cartridge TC TAPxx Reel T1 TAPxx Note: When a media library deice is created through automatic configuration, the deice description will be TAPMLBXX(XX = numbers). If you are not using the automatic installation process, the display prompts you for the name of your installation deice. You could hae more than one tape deice that can be used for the alternate IPL. You must use your configuration list to determine the name you hae assigned to this tape deice and enter that name on the Install Options display. If you are using the automatic installation process, the system determines the name of the installation deice from the installation profile on the distribution media. The installation deice name will be OPTxx where xx is the number assigned to each optical unit. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 59

78 Ending Tasks Ensuring Two-Phase Commit Integrity Before you replace your software, you must either complete or cancel all pending resynchronizations of commitment control definitions. You need to perform this task only if all of the following are true: Your system is connected in a network. Your system runs applications that use two-phase commit support. Two-phase commit support is used when an application updates database files on more than one system. Two-phase commit support ensures that the databases remained synchronized. If you are not sure whether your system uses two-phase commit support, perform steps 1 and 2, below. You may need to continue with the rest of the procedure. Remember that any actions you take with respect to a pending resynchronization affect the other systems that are participating in the logical unit of work (transaction) with your system. Therefore, you or someone else will also need to handle pending resynchronizations on the connected systems before you begin your upgrade procedure. If you perform this procedure 1 or 2 days before you install the new release, you should recheck for resynchronizations before starting the installation. To work with pending resynchronizations on your source system, do the following: 1. To display all commitment definitions that may require resynchronization, type the following command: WRKCMTDFN JOB(*ALL) STATUS(*RESYNC) 2. If you see the message (No commitment definitions are actie), you can skip the rest of this procedure. 3. On the Work with Commitment Definitions display, type a 19 (Cancel Resync) in the Option column for each commitment definition. You see the Cancel Resync display. 4. If the alue in the column Resync Required is Yes for any remote location listed, then do the following for that location: a. Attempt an action, such as restarting communications, and allow the resynchronization to complete. b. If you cannot allow the resynchronization to complete, specify option 1 (Select) to cancel resynchronization to that remote location. You may receie message CPF83E4, which indicates that the logical unit of work is in an undecided state. You will hae to make an educated decision to force either a commit operation or a rollback operation before you can successfully cancel resynchronization. These options are aailable from the Work with Commitment Definitions display. By canceling resynchronization, you may cause the databases between the two systems to be in an inconsistent state. You must then take the responsibility for determining the action taken by all the other locations that participated in this Logical Unit of Work (LUW), and resynchronize the database changes. 60 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

79 5. Refresh the display periodically. When resynchronization for a commitment definition completes or cancels successfully, the alue in the Resync in Progress column will be No. Note: The resynchronization or a cancel of resynchronization may not take place immediately. They are dependent on the state of the other systems that are participating in the logical unit of work. For more information on commitment control, resynchronization, see Commitment Control in the book Backup and Recoery, SC Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Stopping the Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 and Ending Application Serers Before you begin the installation process, you must ary off the Integrated Netfinity Serer. If your system has an actie Integrated Netfinity Serer, it may cause the installation process to fail. Stopping the serer also stops the operating system and any applications that are running on the serer. As a precaution, record the associated resources for your hardware. For these instructions, refer to the section Upgrading OS/400 and AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer in Chapter 3 of the book AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer - Setup, SC Or refer to the Information Center topic and follow these links (in order): Network Operating Systems; Windows Serer on AS/400; Installation and configuration of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer; Upgrading Windows serers on AS/400. Other application serers, such as 5769-LNT, Lotus Domino Enterprise Serer for AS/400, should be ended before upgrading your software. Note: Some application serers will no longer work when you upgrade to V4R5M0. These licensed programs are 57xx-SA3, OS/400 Integration for Noell Netware, and 57xx-XZ1, OS/2 Warpserer for AS/400. To aoid data loss, you must migrate your data from the serer before installing V4R5M0. Otherwise, you will lose your data. For information on migrating your data to an accessible location, refer to Table 10 Beginning Tasks, task 9 on page 21. Notify users before stopping the Integrated Netfinity Serer. Refer to step 15 on page 143 for instructions on starting the serer after you hae completed your installation. Use the Network Serer Administration menu to stop the Integrated Netfinity Serer. 1. Type: GO NWSADM on the AS/400 command line. The Network Serer Administration display appears. 2. Select option 3, Stop a network serer. Return to the Installation Preparation Checklist task that sent you here on page 23. Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software 61

80 Notes About Saing your System Before you install a new release on your system, you should hae a current back-up copy of your system. You do not need to sae your system when you hae a current back-up copy that can be used to recoer if a failure occurs. Be sure to keep this back-up copy until you sae your entire system again. To automatically sae your entire system, refer to Details: Saing eerything in the Information Center. See Prerequisite and Related Information on page xii for locating the Information Center. Or, refer to Using Sae menu option 21 in the book Backup and Recoery, SC Before you begin the process for saing the system for a recoery procedure, determine the optical or tape deice for the alternate IPL. This is the deice to use when saing your system. Sae your system by using the alternate IPL deice. Note: Tapes that are created with the Sae System (SAVSYS) command cannot be used with the automatic installation process. (Also, tapes that are created with this command do not proide a complete back-up.) This completes this planning topic. You can continue with the automatic or manual installation process. 62 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

81 Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation Before You Begin The instructions in this section replace the Licensed Internal Code, Operating System/400, and licensed programs currently installed on your system with the V4R5M0 leel. Should you use this book? Table 1 on page 11 shows which releases are supported when you use this book. Also, reiew Table 2 on page 13, which shows the sequence of the chapters you will use for replacing a release. Or, reiew Table 3 on page 13 if you are replacing a release within a logical partition. Complete the planning tasks in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. Should you use the automatic process? The automatic installation process is recommended for most AS/400 systems. Howeer, you must use the manual process for certain situations. Before you begin this procedure, be sure to read Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation on page 40 for a description of the processes and their similarities and differences. Do you plan to use an alternate installation deice? If you are using an alternate installation deice, ensure that the alternate installation deice is enabled. See Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew on page 229 for information on setting up an alternate installation deice. If you plan to use an alternate IPL deice within a logical partition, refer to the topic Managing logical partitions in the Information Center. See the paragraph below for the location of this information. Do you plan to use or are you using logical partitions? You must read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information at the following Internet location: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. Task 1. Using Automatic Installation The automatic installation process for V4R5M0 will replace all of the products that are currently installed and hae been refreshed. To add new products, use LICPGM menu option 5, Prepare for Install, or use LICPGM menu option 11, Install Licensed Programs, after the automatic installation. You may need to delete some products that you do not want after the installation has finished. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

82 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation While you perform this function, system reference codes (SRCs) appear on the data display of the control panel or irtual control panel (Work with Partition Status display). When the system attention light is on and an SRC starting with A6 appears, the system is waiting for you to do something. (Respond to a message or make a deice ready.) When this book lists an SRC with xx (A6xx 6001), it means that a ariety of characters may occur where the xx appears. The console may also display some SRCs during the installation of Licensed Internal Code. For more details about SRCs, refer to The System Reference Code (SRC) on page 222 or the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Arrange your installation media in the order in which you will use them. Refer to Table 17 on page Verify that your system unit is powered on. If your system unit is powered off, go to Starting from a Power Off Condition on page 158 and perform the procedure there. That procedure will tell you when to return here. 3. Load the installation media olume that contains Licensed Internal Code into the installation resource defined for the system. Wait for the In Use indicator to go out. Notes: a. If you are using a tape deice instead of an optical deice, erify that the tape unit is aried on and allocated to your system. b. If you are using a deice that is enabled as an alternate installation deice, you need to load both the Licensed Internal Code CD-ROM and your tape media. Ensure that the tape media and the Licensed Internal Code are at the same release leel, or your install will fail. 4. Use the control panel to set the mode to Normal. For logical partitions only Instead of using the instructions in step 4, use the Work with Partition Status display to set the mode to Normal. Also, make sure that you hae already selected the alternate IPL deice, before performing the initial program load (IPL) in the next step. Notes: a. If you hae not already set up an alternate IPL deice for a logical partition, refer to Managing logical partitions in the Information Center. Follow these links (in order): Changing logical partition configuration; Selecting or changing a logical partition alternate IPL resource. The method described in Selecting or changing a logical partition alternate IPL resource is preferred. b. If you are using another method to select an alternate IPL deice in a logical partition, refer to Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew on page Type: PWRDWNSYS OPTION(*IMMED) RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(D) AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 Note: Performing this step will configure disk units automatically, if you hae non-configured disk units present. Press Enter. It could take approximately 15 minutes or more for this step. The data display area of the control panel continues to display SRCs. If the system attention light appears and one of the SRCs from Table 29 on page 87 appears in the Data display on the control panel, complete the instructions for that SRC in Correctie Action for Common SRCs on page 86

83 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation page 86. If you hae logical partitions, the SRCs appear in the Work with Partition Status display, instead of the control panel. If the Alternate Installation Deice Failed display appears, there is an alternate installation deice on the system that is enabled. Either it was not disabled before starting the installation, or the deice is otherwise not ready. Do one of the following: To continue the installation with optical media, press Enter. To use the alternate installation deice, make a note of the message at the bottom of the display. Press F12 (Cancel). SRC B appears on the control panel. Use the Correctie Action for Common SRCs on page 86 to determine how to continue. The Licensed Internal Code - Status display appears on your console. After 100% complete is reached, the console may appear blank for approximately fie minutes and the IPL in Progress display may appear. You do not need to respond to these displays. Install Licensed Internal Code - Status Install of the Licensed Internal Code in progress Percent XX % complete Elapsed time in minutes...: x.x Please wait. 9. If an error occurs, you may see a display that requires a response. Perform the action necessary as prompted by the display. Otherwise, continue with the next step. Load the next olume when the system prompts you to do so. You may be prompted for the next olume seeral times during the installation process. Note: The message shown below is sometimes used. Howeer, it is more common to see a similar message that prompts you to type G (go) to continue processing. Follow the instructions on the display. Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation 65

84 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation Message Message ID...: CPA2055 Type...: Inquiry From program...: XXXXXXX Seerity...: 99 Message...: Thenext olume in the sequence is needed to continue the installation process. Cause...: Theendoftheolume has been reached. Recoery...: Load the next olume on the installation deice. Type choice, press Enter. Reply... _ 1=Continue, 2=End installing 10. Type 1, and press Enter. Note: When the installation process starts to install the operating system, some displays appear on the console. One of the displays is called the Licensed Internal Code IPL in Progress. Some of the IPL steps could take a long time (een up to two hours or longer), depending on how much data recoery is required for your system. The last message shown on the IPL in Progress display should be Start the Operating System. Status displays appear during the installation process. The screen shown below indicates how much of the installation is complete as well as how many stages remain. You do not need to respond to this status screen. Message ID...: CPI2070 OS/400 Installation Status Stage 2 XX % Installation Objects Stage Completed Restored 1 Creating needed profiles and libraries....: X >> 2 Restoring programs to library QSYS...: XXXXX 3 Restoring language objects to library QSYS..: 4 Updating program table...: 5 Installing database files....: 6 Completing OS/400 installation...: 11. If you are installing from tape and you receie a message Deice QINDEV not ready, first make the deice ready. Refer to note 3a on page 64. Then press Enter to continue. Status displays may appear. These displays show the status of the licensed programs and language objects as they install on the system. You do not need to respond to these status displays. 66 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

85 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation Installing Licensed Programs Licensed programs processed...: Licensed program install in progress System: XXXX 0 of XXX The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: XofXXX Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769SS1 2 OS/400 - Online Information Note: This display shows which licensed programs and optional parts of licensed programs are being processed. After the *PGM objects and *LNG objects are processed, the display shows the total number of licensed programs processed. One of the following messages may appear when the system is ready for the next media olume that contains licensed programs. When you are installing from optical media, wait for the In Use indicator to go out before you respond to the message. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue.....: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity....: 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply.... G Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 95 Deliery...: *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load a alid olume containing licensed programs in optical deice OPT01 (X G). Reply...G Load the next media olume that contains licensed program products and continue the installation. Occasionally, you will be prompted to load the next olume after a short time has passed. This eent usually happens when the licensed programs on the media are at the same leel as the licensed programs already installed on your machine. Type G, and press Enter. Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation 67

86 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation 13. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The media has been read, and now the licensed programs are going through the installation process. Een though it might take a long time, wait for the Sign On display to appear. When the installation completes successfully, the Sign On display appears. (No message indicates that automatic installation completed successfully. The Sign On display acts as the confirmation.) Continue with Task 2. Verifying Automatic Replacement Completion. If you receie the message Automatic installation not complete, sign on using QSECOFR for your user id and go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Task 2. Verifying Automatic Replacement Completion 1. The Sign On display appears on the console after the installation has completed. Sign On System....: Subsystem...: Display...: User.... QSECOFR Password... Program/procedure... Menu... Current library... XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX Type the following: User: QSECOFR Password: (Enter password, if required.) Press Enter. The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as your initial menu) appears on the console. Type: GO LICPGM. Press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. Use the page down or roll up key to see the second display of the Work with Licensed Programs menu. LICPGM Work withlicensed Programs Select one of the following: Secondary Languages 20. Display installed secondary languages 21. Install secondary languages 22. Delete secondary languages Redistribution 40. Create a distribution tape 41. Work withinstallation profiles Completion Status 50. Display log for messages System: XXXX 4. Type 50, and press Enter. The Display Install History display appears. 68 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

87 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation Display Install History Type choices, press enter. Start date... MM/DD/YY Start time... HH:MM:SS Output... * *, *PRINT Press Enter. Look at the messages that appear on the Display History Log Contents display. If you had an installed licensed program that was not renewed by IBM, it may not be replaced. Refer to Mixed Release Support-Oeriew on page 7 for more information. If any of the messages on the display indicate a failure or a licensed program that is partially installed, go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Otherwise, press F3 (Exit). Verify your licensed programs installed status alues and check for compatibility. It is important to make sure all of your licensed programs are compatible with the operating system. You can determine a licensed program s compatibility by checking the installed status alue. Use LICPGM menu option 10, Display licensed programs, to see the release and installed status alues of the installed licensed programs. If the installed status alue of a licensed program is *COMPATIBLE, it is ready for use. Here are the descriptions of the installed status alues for *COMPATIBLE, *INSTALLED, and *BACKLEVEL. More installed status alue descriptions can be seen in Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211. *COMPATIBLE - The product is installed and its ersion, release, modification, and leel is compatible with the installed leel of the OS/400. You can use this program with the V4R5M0 OS/400. *INSTALLED - The product is installed, but may or may not be compatible with the installed OS/400. It cannot be determined if the licensed program on the media is compatible with the OS/400 or with the currently installed licensed program. Note: Caution! Licensed programs that are now part of the single set will be listed on the display panel as *INSTALLED. You will need to erify that the release leel of the licensed program is compatible with the release leel of OS/400. For IBM products, check the current release leels for licensed programs in the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Or check with your software supplier before you use the licensed program. *BACKLEVEL - The product is installed, but its ersion, release, modification and leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install a current release of this product. And if you hae secondary languages, install a new release of these languages as well, using LICPGM menu option 21. Note: Caution! If you use a licensed program that is listed as *BACKLEVEL, you run the risk of haing an information mix up Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation 69

88 Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation between release leels, or some portions of the licensed program may not work properly. An installed status alue of *COMPATIBLE is desired. More... You hae completed this task. Do you need to install additional licensed programs? No Yes Go to Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 and complete the instructions there. Do you need to install a secondary language? No Yes Go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. 70 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

89 Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Before You Begin The instructions in this section replace the Licensed Internal Code, Operating System/400, and licensed programs currently installed on your system with the V4R5M0 leel. You can also change the primary language on your system. Should you use this book? Table 1 on page 11 shows which releases are supported when you use this book. Also, reiew Table 2 on page 13, which shows the sequence of the chapters you will use for replacing a release. Or, reiew Table 3 on page 13 if you are replacing a release within a logical partition. Complete the planning tasks in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. Do You Hae to Use the Manual Process? The automatic installation process is recommended for most AS/400 systems. Howeer, you must use the manual process for certain situations. Before you begin this procedure, be sure to read Choosing Manual or Automatic Installation on page 40 for a description of the processes and their similarities and differences. If you are changing a primary language, you must be aware of additional considerations before you begin the installation. Be sure to read Considerations When Changing a Primary Language on page 53. You cannot change your primary language to a language you currently hae installed as a secondary language on your system. You must delete the secondary language first before you can change it to your primary language. Do you plan to use an alternate installation deice? If you are using an alternate installation deice, ensure that the alternate installation deice is enabled. See Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew on page 229 for information on setting up an alternate installation deice. If you plan to use an alternate IPL deice within a logical partition, refer to the topic Managing logical partitions in the Information Center. See the paragraph below for the location of this information. Do you plan to use or are you using logical partitions? You must read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information at the following Internet location: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

90 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation For logical partitions only If you hae logical partitions and you want to replace a release using manual installation, refer to the instructions For logical partitions only on page 77, instead of the instructions below. Task 1. Replacing the Licensed Internal Code While you perform this function, system reference codes (SRCs) appear on the data display of the control panel or irtual control panel (Work with Partition Status display). When the system attention light is on and an SRC starting with A6 appears, the system is waiting for you to do something. (Respond to a message or make a deice ready.) When this book lists an SRC with xx (A6xx 6001), it means that a ariety of characters may occur where the xx appears. The console may also display some SRCs during the installation of Licensed Internal Code. For more details about SRCs, refer to The System Reference Code (SRC) on page 222 or the Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC book. 1. Arrange your installation media in the order in which you will use them. Refer to Table 17 on page Verify that your system unit is powered on. If your system unit is not powered on, go to Starting from a Power Off Condition on page 158 and perform the procedure there. That procedure tells you when to return here. 3. Ensure that power is on for the console. 4. Load the installation media olume that contains Licensed Internal Code into the installation resource defined for the system. Wait for the In Use indicator to go out. Notes: a. If you are using a tape deice instead of an optical deice, erify that the tape unit is aried on and allocated to your system. b. If you are using a deice that is enabled as an alternate installation deice, you need to load both the Licensed Internal Code CD-ROM and your tape media. Ensure that the tape media and the Licensed Internal Code are at the same release leel, or your install will fail. 5. Use the control panel to set the mode selection to Manual. 6. Type: PWRDWNSYS OPTION(*IMMED) RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(D) Press Enter. This step could take approximately 15 minutes or more to complete If the system attention light appears and an SRC listed in Table 29 on page 87 appears in the data display on the control panel, complete the instructions for that SRC in Correctie Action for Common SRCs on page 86. The Select a Language Group display shows the primary language that is currently installed on the system. 72 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

91 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Select a Language Group The language feature shown is the language feature installed on the system. Attention: To keep the same primary language, ensure that the media you use for installing the operating system matches the language feature shown. system media does not match what is shown, the installation process will attempt to install the If the operating operating system in a different language feature than Licensed Internal Code. This is undesirable. Type choice, press Enter. Language feature To keep the same primary language, erify that the displayed language feature matches the feature that is printed on the media that contains the operating system. The operating system media are labeled B29xx_nn, where 29xx indicates the feature for the primary language. Note: The language you select and the language of the OS/400 must match. If they do not match, do not continue with the upgrade. Stop and call your software proider. Get the correct language feature before continuing. If the languages do not match, you may hae CCSID-related errors and the installation may fail. Refer to Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes on page 227 for a list of language feature codes. To change the primary language, type the language feature that appears on the media that contains the operating system. 9. Press Enter. After you enter the language feature, the Confirm Language Group display appears. Confirm Language Group Language feature...: 2924 Press Enter to confirm your choice for language feature. Press F12 to change your choice for language feature. Press Enter. 10. The Install Licensed Internal Code display appears. Select one of the following: Install Licensed Internal Code System: XXXX 1. Install Licensed Internal Code 2. Work withdedicated Serice Tools (DST) 3. Define alternate installation deice Type 1 (See note) Press Enter. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 73

92 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 11. Note: If you hae an alternate installation deice attached to the system, type a 3 to erify its address and determine whether it is enabled or disabled. Continue with the Verifying Alternate Installation Deice Subtask in step 11. If you are not using an alternate installation deice, go on to step 13. Verifying Alternate Installation Deice Subtask: The Select Alternate Installation Deice Bus display appears. Select Alternate Installation Deice Bus Type Option, press Enter. 1=Select Option Bus Number Selected _ 1 _ * _ 4 _ 5 _ 6 _ 7 _ 8 _ 9 _ A _ B _ C _ D F2=Deselect Deice F3=Exit F12=Cancel System: XXXX More... a. Verify that the selected deice is on the correct system bus. Type 1 in the Options field next to the selected bus, and press Enter to iew information about the deice that is attached to the bus. This may take seeral minutes. If you see the message No alternate installation deice configured, wait one minute and refresh the screen. b. The Select Alternate Installation Deice display appears. Use this display to erify or change the resource name, type, model, and serial number for the deice. Select Alternate Installation Deice System: XXXX Type Option, press Enter. 1=Select 5=Details Resource Serial Option Name Type Model Number Selected _ TAP * c. Type 1 to select the deice and make any needed corrections to select, enable, or disable the deice. Press Enter to confirm the changes. d. The message Alternate installation deice selected appears. Press F3 to return to the Install Licensed Internal Code display. e. Type 1, and press Enter to install the Licensed Internal Code. End of Verifying Alternate Installation Deice Subtask. If there is an alternate installation deice defined and enabled, the Confirm Alternate Installation Deice display appears. To install from the alternate installation deice, press Enter. To install from optical media, press F12 to Cancel. You see the Licensed Internal Code display. Perform step 10 on page 73 and select option 3 (Define alternate installation deice). Perform step 11 and disable the alternate installation deice. The Install Licensed Internal Code (LIC) display appears on your console. 74 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

93 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Install Licensed Internal Code (LIC) Disk selected to write the Licensed Internal Code to: Serial Number Type Model I/O Bus Controller Deice xx-xxxxxxx xxxx xxx x x x Select one of the following: 1. Restore Licensed Internal Code 2. Install Licensed Internal Code and Initialize system 3. Install Licensed Internal Code and Recoer Configuration 4. Install Licensed Internal Code and Restore Disk Unit Data 5. Install Licensed Internal Code and Upgrade Load Source Type Press Enter. The Install Licensed Internal Code - Status display appears on your console. You do not need to respond to this display. It will remain on your console for approximately 30 minutes. Install Licensed Internal Code - Status Install of the Licensed Internal Code in progress Percent XX % complete Elapsed time in minutes......: x.x Please wait If an error occurs, you may see a display that requires a response. Perform the action necessary as prompted by the display. Otherwise, continue with step 16. After approximately 10 minutes, the IPL or Install the System display appears. The Licensed Internal Code is now replaced. Do not remoe the distribution media at this time. The Disk Configuration Warning Report display may appear. If it does, display the detailed report for each warning shown on the display. Press the Help key from the Disk Configuration Warning Report display for more information about your choices. Also refer to Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages on page 225 for more information. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 75

94 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Disk Configuration Warning Report Type option, press Enter. 5=Display Detailed Report Press F10 to accept all the warnings and continue the IPL. The system will attempt to correct the warnings. OPT Warning _ xxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxx _ xxxxx_xx_xxxxx xxxxxx_ xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx More... F3=Exit to use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) F10=Accept warnings and continue the IPL 18. Note: If the warning Disk unit not formatted for optimal performance appears on this display, do the following: Type 5, and press Enter to display the detailed report. Write down the information displayed. After the upgrade completes, you will need this information to format these disk units to gain optimal performance. Press F12 to cancel and return to the Disk Unit Warning Report. Press F10 to accept the warnings and continue the IPL. If your system processor configuration has changed, you could see other displays at this point. After you supply the requested information, the installation continues and the IPL or Install the System display appears. Refer to System Password on page 211 for more information. Continue with Task 2. Replacing the Operating System on page AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

95 Table 28. Manual Installation for a Secondary Logical Partition For logical partitions only Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation If your system has secondary logical partitions and you are installing software on a secondary partition, the SRCs are iewable under the Working with System Partitions display in Start Serice Tools (SST) or Dedicated Serice Tools (DST). Refer to the articles about Managing Logical Partitions in the AS/400 Information Center for more information. The secondary partition control panel is accessed from the Work with System Partitions display under SST or DST from the primary partition. 1. Arrange your installation media in the order in which you will use them. Refer to Table 17 on page Verify that your system unit is powered on. If your system unit is not powered on, go to Starting from a Power Off Condition on page 158 and perform the procedure there. That procedure tells you when to return here. 3. Ensure that power is on for the console. If you are working on a secondary partition, ensure that power is on for the console of that secondary partition. 4. Verify that this partition has an alternate initial program load (IPL) resource assigned. For most cases, this is the optical deice that supports the optical media class. Note: You can use the following displays and instructions to locate the alternate IPL resource. Use the Work with System Partitions then Work with Partition Configuration displays under SST or DST. Select the desired partion then select the option for alternate IPL resource. A % indicates the resource currently selected. Refer to the AS/400 Information Center article Managing Logical Partitions. See the topics Displaying and printing logical partition information and Changing logical partition configuration for more information. 5. Load the installation media olume that contains Licensed Internal Code into the installation resource defined for the system. Wait for the In Use indicator to go out. Notes: a. If you are using a tape deice instead of an optical deice, erify that the tape unit is aried on and allocated to your system. b. If you are using a deice that is enabled as an alternate installation deice, you need to load both the Licensed Internal Code CD-ROM and your tape media. Ensure that the tape media and the Licensed Internal Code are at the same release leel, or your install will fail. 6. Use the Work with Partition Status display to set the mode to Manual. Also, make sure that you hae already selected the alternate IPL deice, before performing the initial program load (IPL) in the next step. Note: If you hae not already set up an alternate IPL deice for a logical partition, refer to Managing logical partitions in the Information Center. Follow these links (in order): Changing logical partition configuration; Selecting or changing a logical partition alternate IPL resource. The method described in Selecting or changing a logical partition alternate IPL resource is preferred. If you are using another method to select an alternate IPL deice in a logical partition, refer to Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew on page Type: PWRDWNSYS OPTION(*IMMED) RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(D) Note: This should be done from the partition where you are doing the installation. If you are installing on the primary partition, then power down all of the secondary partitions first (if any exist). Otherwise, the primary partition IPL will abnormally power down all secondary partitions. Press Enter. This step could take approximately 15 minutes or more to complete. If the system attention light appears and an SRC listed in Table 29 on page 87 appears in the data display on the control panel, complete the instructions for that SRC in Correctie Action for Common SRCs on page 86. Note: If you are installing a secondary partition, the system attention light will not appear. You must monitor the secondary partition SRCs from the Work with System Partitions display under SST or DST. When the State changes to Failed, that is the equialent of haing the attention light on for the primary partition. 8. Now continue with step 8 on page 72 of the instructions in Task 1. Replacing the Licensed Internal Code. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 77

96 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Task 2. Replacing the Operating System 1. The IPL or Install the System menu appears on your console. Load the first olume of installation media that contains OS/400. (This olume is labeled B29xx_01, where 29xx is the identifier for the primary language.) When you are installing from optical media, wait until the In Use indicator goes out before you continue. Then do the following to respond to the display: Select one of the following: IPL or Install the System System: XXXX 1. Perform an IPL 2. Install the operating system 3. Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) 4. Perform automatic installation of the operating system 5. Sae Licensed Internal Code Type 2, and press Enter. 2. The Confirm Install of OS/400 display is shown on your console. Press Enter. 3. If the Add All Disk Units to the System menu does not appear, go to step 4 on page 80. a. Adding Disk Units Subtask If you see the Add All Disk Units to the System display, choose one of the following: If you do not want deice parity protection or mirrored protection or user ASPs, select option 3 (Add all disk units to the system auxiliary storage pool). By adding disk units before you install the operating system, you improe your oerall system performance because the operating system is distributed across all of your disk units. Adding disk units takes approximately 45 minutes for the first 64 disk units. If you add more than 64 disk units, it will take an additional 45 minutes. Note: If you hae RAID-capable disk units on your system or if your system ASP has mirrored protection, your display will not hae option 3. If you want to configure disk protection (deice parity protection or mirrored protection) or user ASPs, select option 2 (Perform disk configuration using DST). You will see the Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) menu. Refer to the book Backup and Recoery, SC , for information about the proper sequence for configuring disk protection. For logical partitions only If you will be creating secondary logical partitions later, you do NOT want to configure all units now. Refer to the worksheet supplied by the Technology Solutions Center for the configuration selection. To access this worksheet or locate the Technology Solutions Center, refer to the Logical Partitioning Web site: Then, follow these links (in order): Planning for Logical Partitions; LPAR Hardware Planning Guide. Scroll down to Pre-Order Tasks, and select either, LPAR Hardware Planning Worksheet or Contact the Technology Solutions Center. 78 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

97 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Add All Disk Units to the System System: XXXX Select one of the following: 1. Keep the current disk configuration 2. Perform disk configuration using DST 3. Add all disk units to the system auxiliary storage pool 4. Add all disk units to the system ASP and balance data Type 3, and press Enter. Note: If either the Disk Configuration Error Report display or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appears, go to Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages on page 225 to determine the appropriate action. b. You could see the following display if your disk configuration has changed. Type 5 next to the problem and press Enter to display the detailed report. Problem Report Note: Some action for the problems listed below may need to be taken. Please select a problem to display more detailed information about the problem and to see what possible action may be taken to correct the problem. Type option, press Enter. 5=Display Detailed Report OPT Problem c. If the following display appears, a disk unit that you selected to add to your disk configuration may already hae data on it. If you choose to continue, any data on that is on the disk units listed will be remoed. Be certain that you want to configure the disk before you continue. Follow the instructions on the display. Press Enter to return to the Problem Report screen. Press F10 to continue the Add Disk Unit subtask. Possibly Configured Units Problem: These non-configured units appear to be configured units of some other disk configuration and may contain alid data. This option will clear the data from these units and destroy the other disk configuration. Press Enter to continue Press F12=Cancel to return and change your choices. Serial Resource Other System Number Type Model Name Serial Number F3=Exit F12=Cancel More.. d. The following display shows the percentage of disk units added. This display does not require a response. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 79

98 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Function Status You selected to add units. % Complete e. When the process completes, continue the manual installation process with the next step below. This completes the subtask for adding disk units. Status displays appear on the console. You do not need to respond to these status displays. Some of the IPL steps may take a long time. The time aries depending on how much data recoery is required for your system. The Install the Operating System display appears when the IPL for the Licensed Internal Code completes. Type options, press Enter. Install the Operating System Install option =Take defaults (No other options are displayed) 2=Change install options Date: Year Month Day Time: Hour Minute Second Type the following: Install option 1 Date: (Use the current year, month, and day.) Time: (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) 6. Press Enter. Status messages appear during the installation process. You do not need to respond to these displays. The following is an example of a status display. This screen may be present for 2 hours or more. 80 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

99 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Message ID... : CPI2070 OS/400 Installation Status Stage 2 XX % Installation Objects Stage Completed Restored 1 Creating needed profiles and libraries...: X >> 2 Restoring programs to library QSYS...: XXXXX 3 Restoring language objects to library QSYS.. : 4 Updating program table...: 5 Installing database files......: 6 Completing OS/400 installation...: The display may be blank for a long time. Then the Installation Status screen appears again with the indicator pointing to stage 5. After the base operating system has been replaced, the Sign On display appears on your console. Continue with Task 3. Replacing the Licensed Programs. Task 3. Replacing the Licensed Programs 1. Begin this task at the Sign On display. Sign On System....: Subsystem...: Display...: User.... QSECOFR Password... Program/procedure... Menu... Current library... XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXX Type the following: User: QSECOFR Password: (Enter password, if required.) Press Enter. 2. The IPL Options display appears. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 81

100 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation IPL Options Type choices, press Enter. System date... XX/XX/XX MM/DD/YY System time... XX:XX:XX HH:MM:SS Clear job queues.... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear output queues... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear incomplete job logs... N Y=Yes, N=No Start print writers... Y Y=Yes, N=No Start system to restricted state... N Y=Yes, N=No Set major system options.... N Y=Yes, N=No Define or change system at IPL.... N Y=Yes, N=No Last power-down operation was ABNORMAL Notes: a. Ignore the message on the bottom of the IPL Options display. b. If you need to change system alues, such as the alue for the QSECURITY system alue, you can do so now. Type Y for the Define or change the system at IPL prompt. Follow the instructions on the displays. Type the following: System date (Use the current date.) System time (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) Set major system options N Press Enter. The Edit Rebuild of Access Paths display could be shown. If it is, press Enter to continue. Additional display messages could be shown. Press Enter after each message to continue. The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as an initial menu) appears on your console. Do the following to put the system in a restricted state and filter the messages that appear: a. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(60) Press Enter. b. A message display could appear. Press Enter. c. Type: ENDSBS *ALL *IMMED Press Enter. d. When the following message appears, press Enter to continue: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) command being processed e. The message System ended to restricted condition appears. Press Enter to continue. f. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR SEV(95) Press Enter. g. A message display could appear. Press Enter. The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as an initial menu) appears on your console. Load the media olume that contains optional parts of OS/400. B29xx_02 is the olume label, where 29xx indicates the identifier for primary language. Type: GO LICPGM. Press Enter. 82 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

101 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 7. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. LICPGM Select one of the following: Manual Install 1. Install all Work withlicensed Programs System: XXXX 8. Type 1, and press Enter. The Manual Install display appears. Manual Install Type choices, press Enter. Install option =Installed products 2=All products 3=New products System: XXXX Installation deice OPT01 Name Replace if current N Y=Yes N=No Automatic IPL... N Y=Yes N=No Type the following: Install option 1 (See note) Installation deice OPT01 (See note) Replace if current N Automatic IPL N Press Enter. 9. Note: In this example, the installation deice is OPT01. If you use a different naming conention, type the name that you hae assigned to the installation deice. Status displays may appear. These displays show the status of the licensed programs and language objects as they install on the system. You do not need to respond to these status displays. Installing Licensed Programs Licensed programs processed...: Licensed program install in progress System: XXXX 0 of XXX The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 83

102 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: XofXXX Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769SS1 2 OS/400 - Online Information Note: This display shows which licensed programs and optional parts of licensed programs are being processed. After the *PGM objects and *LNG objects are processed, the display shows the total number of licensed programs processed. If a message similar to the following appears, load the next media olume that contains licensed program products, and continue the installation. When you are installing from optical media, wait for the In Use indicator to go out before you respond to the message. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 95 Deliery...: *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply...G Type G Note: Type G, and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you wish to continue processing. Type X, and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load that contain licensed programs, or if you wish to terminate the loading process. 11. Press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears on your console when the installation process completes. One of the following messages appears on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display: Work withlicensed programs function has completed. Work withlicensed programs function not complete. For either message, continue with Task 4. Verifying Completion of Manual Replacement. Task 4. Verifying Completion of Manual Replacement 1. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. Use the page down or roll up key to see the second display of the Work with Licensed Programs menu. 84 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

103 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation LICPGM Work withlicensed Programs Select one of the following: Secondary Languages 20. Display installed secondary languages 21. Install secondary languages 22. Delete secondary languages Redistribution 40. Create a distribution tape 41. Work withinstallation profiles Completion Status 50. Display log for messages System: XXXX 2. Type 50, and press Enter. The Display Install History display appears. Display Install History Type choices, press enter. Start date... MM/DD/YY Start time... HH:MM:SS Output... * *, *PRINT Press Enter. Look at the messages that appear on the Display History Log Contents display. If you had an installed licensed program that was not renewed by IBM, it may not be replaced. Refer to Mixed Release Support-Oeriew on page 7 for more information. If any of the messages on the display indicate a failure or a licensed program that is partially installed, go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Otherwise, press F3 (Exit). Verify your licensed programs installed status alues and check for compatibility. It is important to make sure that all of your licensed programs are compatible with the operating system. You can determine a licensed program s compatibility by checking the installed status alue. Use LICPGM menu option 10, Display licensed programs, to see the release and installed status alues of the installed licensed programs. If the installed status alue of a licensed program is *COMPATIBLE, it is ready for use. Here are the descriptions of the most common installed status alues for *COMPATIBLE, *INSTALLED, and *BACKLEVEL. More installed status alue descriptions can be seen in Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211. *COMPATIBLE - The product is installed and its ersion, release, modification, and leel is compatible with the installed leel of the OS/400. You can use this program with the V4R5M0 OS/400. *INSTALLED - The product is installed, but may or may not be compatible with the installed OS/400. It cannot be determined if the licensed program on the media is compatible with the OS/400 or with the currently installed licensed program. Note: Caution! Licensed programs that are now part of the single set will be listed on the display panel as *INSTALLED. You will need to Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 85

104 Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation erify that the release leel of the licensed program is compatible with the release leel of OS/400. For IBM products, check the current release leels for licensed programs in the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Or check with your software supplier before you use the licensed program. *BACKLEVEL - The product is installed, but its ersion, release, modification and leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install a current release of this product. And if you hae secondary languages, install a new release of these languages as well, using LICPGM menu option 21. Note: Caution! If you use a licensed program that is listed as *BACKLEVEL, you run the risk of haing an information mix up between release leels, or some portions of the licensed program may not work properly. An installed status alue of *COMPATIBLE is desired. More... You hae completed this task. Do you need to install additional licensed programs? No Yes Go to Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 and complete the instructions there. Do you need to install a secondary language? No Yes Go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. Correctie Action for Common SRCs This section gies a brief explanation of common system reference codes (SRCs) that you may see while replacing a release. If you are looking at SRC codes on a system with logical partitions, the SRC gies an indication of of the type of partition to which it pertains. For example, the SRC B1xx xxxx indicates a primary partition. The SRC B2xx xxxx indicates a secondary partition. 86 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

105 Table 29. Common SRC codes Symptom Action A1xx 19xx A12x 19xx (x is any character) These SRCs appear if the installation deice for an alternate IPL is not ready. Check the following: Is the correct media olume loaded? Is the deice ready? Recoery Common SRCs Is the deice being used for a different purpose than the deice was used for the preious IPL? Is the installation media loaded in the alternate IPL or alternate installation deice allocated for that partition? Any of these situations may cause these SRCs to appear. In the first two examples, ensure that the media olume is loaded correctly and that the deice is ready. In the last example, you will need to wait while the system finds the new installation deice. A A B B1xx 4504 B1xx 1933 B1xx 4505 B1xx 4507 Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs on page 89. This SRC appears when Licensed Internal Code is damaged. Use the control panel or irtual control panel (Work with Partition Status display) to set the IPL type to D and the mode to Manual. Then use the instructions for Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation on page 71. This SRC appears if the installation media is not readable. Either the media is dirty or damaged, or there is an error with the optical deice. Clean the media or acquire a new set of media. Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs on page 89. This SRC appears when an error is detected with the Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400. Make sure that you ary off the Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 before you perform the function that resulted in this SRC. If the SRC still occurs, try the installation again. If the same error occurs again, contact your serice representatie. Note: Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 is the new name for Integrated PC Serer (IPCS) or File Serer Input/Output Processor (FSIOP). This SRC appears when the system cannot locate the deice used for the alternate IPL. Check that the installation media is loaded in correct deice and, if necessary, make the deice ready. Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs on page 89. These SRCs appear if the installation media is dirty or if the wrong media was loaded. Verify that the correct media is loaded. If the problem still remains, clean the optical disc. If you are using tape, clean the tape head and tape path. Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs on page 89. These SRCs appear if the tape deice for the alternate IPL was not found or was not ready. Make sure the tape deice is powered on and the correct tape is loaded and ready. To make tape deices ready, you may need to open and close the tape deice door. Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs on page 89. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 87

106 Recoery Common SRCs Table 29. Common SRC codes (continued) Symptom Action B2pp 1310 (pp equals the partition ID) No alternate IPL deice IOP selected. The IPL will attempt to continue, but there might not be enough information to find the correct alternate IPL load source. Go to the primary partition Work With System Partitions display and configure an alternate IPL deice IOP for the secondary partition.then, retry the secondary partition IPL. If it continues to fail, contact your serice proider. B2pp 1320 (pp equals the partition ID) B2pp 3110 (pp equals the partition ID) B2pp 3200 (pp equals the partition ID) B2xx xxxx B A For more information, refer to the Managing Logical Partitions articles in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, or iew the Web site at: No default load source IOP selected for a type A or type B IPL. The IPL will attempt to continue, but there might not be enough information to find the correct load source. Go to the Work With System Partitions display and configure a load source IOP for the secondary partition. Then, retry the secondary partition IPL. If it continues to fail, contact your serice proider. For more information, refer to the Managing Logical Partitions articles in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, or iew the Web site at: Partition power on failed. Look further into the SRC history for prior B2xx xxxx failure SRCs to pinpoint the source of the problem. Select Work with System Partitions, then Display partition information, then Display secondary partition reference code history. Resole each problem found, and then retry the secondary partition IPL. If it continues to fail, contact your serice proider. Secondary partition failed to initialize program load. If you performed a power-on from IPL type D, remoe the installation media (optical or tape media), clean the deice and clean the media if possible. Iinsert the media again and attempt to power-on usint IPL type D. All other SRCs: If you performed a power-on using IPL type D, clean the deice and media, and then retry the same type of power-on. For more information, refer to the Managing Logical Partitions articles in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, or iew the Web site at: If you hae them, you can also use the AS/400 Licensed Internal Code Diagnostic Aids - Volume 1, LY or Problem Analysis book for your system. If you hae no documentation, contact your next leel of support. This SRC may appear if you use the command PWRDWNSYS RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(D) and you hae an AS/400 model 530 with feature code To work around this problem: power off the system, change the IPL source to D, then power on the system. Here are the steps: Switch system to manual Use the function data buttons Press the up or down arrow until 02 shows in the display Press Enter Press the up or down arrow until DN shows in the display Press Enter Power on the system 88 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

107 Recoery Common SRCs Table 29. Common SRC codes (continued) Symptom Action B This SRC occurs when you exit from the automatic installation because an alternate installation deice that is attached to the system has one of the following problems: The deice is enabled, but it is not ready because the tape is not loaded. The deice is not enabled as an alternate installation deice. The deice itself has a problem. B To use the alternate installation deice, do the following: Power off the system. If necessary, fix the deice. Power on the system. Verify that the alternate installation deice is enabled as an alternate installation deice. Load the tape media in the alternate installation deice and start the installation procedure again. This SRC occurs when an IPL is attempted after an installation failure. You need to re-install the some or all of the operating system. Start with the media olume containing the base operating system. (For optical media, this olume is labeled B29xx_01.) Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs This SRC appears if the tape deice is assigned to another system or partition. Go to the other system or partition and ary off this tape deice. Make sure the correct tape is loaded. Any other SRC Then perform the appropriate procedure under Installation Recoery after SRCs. Go the Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147, and follow the instructions there. Installation Recoery after SRCs After taking the correctie action for the SRC, perform one of the following procedures. Use the procedure that is appropriate for the installation process, either automatic or manual, that was in use when the SRC appeared. If You Were Using Automatic Installation 1. Set the mode selector or toggle on the control panel to Manual. 2. Press the power switch to delayed off, press it again, and wait for the entire system to power off. 3. Set the mode selector or toggle on the control panel to Normal. 4. Press the power switch on and make the installation deice ready. If the system attention light appears and the same SRC appears again, go to Licensed Internal Code Recoery on page 149. Otherwise, continue with step 8 on page 65. If You Were Using Manual Installation 1. Make sure that the media is loaded in the installation deice for the alternate IPL. 2. Press the power switch to delayed off, press it again, and wait for the entire system to power off. 3. Press the power switch on and make the installation deice ready. If the system attention light appears and the same SRC appears again, go to Licensed Internal Code Recoery on page 149. Otherwise, continue with step 8 on page 72. Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation 89

108 Quick Recoery Common SRCs 90 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

109 Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) Before You Begin This section contains instructions to install licensed programs that are on the distribution media. These instructions assume that V4R5M0 of the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system are installed and the system is powered down. If you are not sure whether the operating system is already installed, contact your serice representatie. Should you use this book? Table 1 on page 11 shows which releases are supported when you use this book. Also, reiew Table 4 on page 14, which shows the sequence of the chapters you will use for installing a new system. Complete the planning tasks in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. Note: If you hae added a new disk unit to your system, you should load the operating system again to use that disk unit. This will improe the performance of your system by distributing the operating system across all of your disk units. Complete Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) on page 101 if you are adding disk units. If you are planning to use deice parity protection, auxiliary storage pools, or mirrored protection, refer to the book Backup and Recoery, SC , before you begin. Do you plan to use logical partitions? You must read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information on the Internet at this location: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. For logical partitions only If you perform these actions on a system with secondary logical partitions, the instructions pertain only to that partition. If that partition is the primary partition, these instructions will change the power status and perform an IPL on the entire system. Attention! You must power down all secondary partitions before performing these instructions. Otherwise, you may loose data or damage system software objects. You must perform these instructions for each partition with which you will do the related work. Also, references to the control panel refer to the irtual control panel (Work with Partition Status display). If you perform these actions on a system without secondary logical partitions, the instructions pertain to the entire system. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

110 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Task 1. Doing the Initial Program Load (IPL) 1. Ensure that the system is powered off before you begin. 2. Turn the power on for the display station used as the console. 3. If the installation deice has separate on and off switches, erify that the switch is in the On position. 4. Use the control panel to set the IPL type to A and to set the mode to Manual. 5. Press the Enter button on the control panel. 6. Turn the system power on by pressing the power button. 7. After some time, the IPL or Install the System display appears. Select one of the following: IPL or Install the System System: XXXX 1. Perform an IPL 2. Install the operating system 3. Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) 4. Perform automatic installation of the operating system 5. Sae Licensed Internal Code Type 1, and press Enter. 8. Status displays are shown on the console. You do not need to respond to any of these displays. The following is an example of a status display: Licensed Internal Code IPL in Progress IPL: Type... Attended Start date and time. xx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx Preious system end. Normal IPLstep...: Storage Management Recoery The following list shows some of the IPL steps that are shown on the IPL Step in Progress display. Some of the IPL steps could take a long time. Authority Recoery Journal Recoery Database Recoery Journal Synchronization Start the Operating System Some of the IPL steps could take a long time. 9. Seeral messages may appear on the console. The following is an example of a message that may appear: Display Messages System....: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 10 Deliery...: *BREAK Press Enter to continue. System object xxxxx created again during IPL. 10. To continue, press Enter after each message that you receie. The Sign On display appears. 92 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

111 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Sign On System....: Subsystem..: Display...: User....QSECOFR Password.... Program/procedure... Menu.... Current library... XXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX Type QSECOFR for the User prompt, and type your password, if required. Press Enter Note: In case you hae to change the password for the QSECOFR user profile, record the new password now. Store it in a safe location. The OS/400 IPL in Progress display appears. If the Select Products to Work with PTFs display appears, press F3 (Exit). The IPL Options display appears. IPL Options Type choices, press Enter. System date... XX/XX/XX MM/DD/YY System time... XX:XX:XX HH:MM:SS Clear job queues.... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear output queues... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear incomplete job logs... N Y=Yes, N=No Start print writers... Y Y=Yes, N=No Start system to restricted state... Y Y=Yes, N=No Set major system options.... Y Y=Yes, N=No Define or change the system at IPL.... N Y=Yes, N=No Last power-down operation was ABNORMAL Notes: a. Ignore the message on the bottom of the IPL Options display. b. If you need to change system alues, such as the alue for the QSECURITY system alue, you can do so now. Type Y for the Define or change the system at IPL prompt. If you do, also use the control panel to set the mode selection to the mode on which you want the system to run. Follow the instructions on the displays. Type the following: System date (Use the current date.) System time (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) Start system to restricted state Y Set major system options Y Press Enter. Additional display messages could be shown. Press Enter after each message to continue. The Set Major System Options display appears. Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) 93

112 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Set Major System Options Type choices, press Enter. Enable automatic configuration...y Y=Yes, N=No Deice configuration naming...*normal *NORMAL, *S36, *DEVADR Default special enironment....*none *NONE, *S36 Respond to the prompts on the Set Major System Options display. Enable automatic configuration The alue Y (Yes) automatically configures local deices. N (No) indicates no automatic configuration. Refer to the book Local Deice Configuration, SC , for information about automatic configuration. Deice configuration naming Specify *NORMAL to use a naming conention unique to the AS/400 system. The alue *S36 uses a naming conention similar to System/36. Refer to the book Local Deice Configuration, SC , for information about deice configuration naming and *DEVADR. Default special enironment The default alue *NONE indicates no special enironment. *S36 sets up the System/36 enironment. Refer to the book System/36 Enironment Programming, SC , for more information about working in the System/36 enironment on the AS/400 system Press Enter. The Edit Rebuild of Access Paths display could be shown. If it is, press Enter to continue. Seeral blank displays and Display Messages displays appear. To continue, press Enter for each message display. Do not respond to blank displays. The following display is an example of a message that appears: Display Messages System....: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 10 Deliery...: *BREAK Press Enter to continue. All jobs in system lost. Job and output queues cleared. 18. When the AS/400 Main Menu appears on your console, you hae completed this task. Continue with Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs. Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs If you hae secondary logical partitions, you must perform this procedure on each partition to which you want to install the licensed programs. 1. Begin at the AS/400 Main Menu. Do the following to put the system in a restricted state and filter the messages that appear: a. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(60) Press Enter. b. A message display could appear. Press Enter. c. Type: ENDSBS *ALL *IMMED 94 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

113 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Press Enter. d. When the following message appears, press Enter to continue: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) command being processed e. The message System ended to restricted condition appears. Press Enter to continue. f. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR SEV(95) Press Enter. g. A message display could appear. Press Enter. When the AS/400 Main Menu appears, load the media olume that contains optionally installable parts of OS/400. For optical media, this olume has the label B29xx_02, where 29xx indicates the primary language of the system. Type: GO LICPGM, and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. LICPGM Work withlicensed Programs Select one of the following: Manual Install 1. Install all Preparation 5. Prepare for install Licensed Programs 10. Display installed licensed programs 11. Install licensed programs 12. Delete licensed programs 13. Sae licensed programs System: XXXX Type 11 (option 11. Install licensed programs), and press Enter. Please read the note below for an alternatie to using option 11. Note: If you want to install all licensed programs that are on the distribution media, use Manual Install option 1, Install all, instead of using option 11. (See the Work with Licensed Programs display in the example aboe.) This will sae time for the installation. Or, if you want most of the licensed programs on the media, then Manual Install option 1 is also the preferred choice. If you want most of the licensed programs and choose this method of installation, you will hae to delete the extra unwanted licensed programs. The Manual Install display appears after selecting Manual Install option 1. Select option 2 (2=All products) on this display to install all of the licensed programs on the media. Then, continue with step 8 on page 97 of these instructions. 5. For more information about using Manual Install option 1, refer to Using Option 1. Install All on page 161. The Install Licensed Programs display appears. Page through the display to find the licensed programs you want. Type a 1 in the option column next to the licensed programs that you want to install. Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) 95

114 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Install Licensed Programs System: XXXX Type options, press Enter. 1=Install Licensed Product Option Program Option Description 5769SS1 OS/400 - Library QGPL _ 5769SS1 OS/400 - Library QUSRSYS _ 5769SS1 1 OS/400 - Extended Base Support _ 5769SS1 2 OS/400 - Online Information _ 5769SS1 3 OS/400 - Extended Base Directory Support _ 5769SS1 4 OS/400 - S/36 and S/38 Migration _ 5769SS1 5 OS/400 - System/36 Enironment _ 5769SS1 6 OS/400 - System/38 Enironment _ 5769SS1 7 OS/400 - Example Tools Library _ 5769SS1 8 OS/400 - AFP Compatibility Fonts _ 5769SS1 9 OS/400 - *PRV CL Compiler Support _ 5769SS1 11 OS/400 - S/36 Migration Assistant More... F3=Exit F11=Display status/release F12=Cancel F19=Display trademarks Notes: a. The libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS, and Extended Base Support (option 1) and Extended Base Directory Support (option 3) may be preselected. If you are adding additional (new) licensed programs or optional parts, these items may be installed already. They would be preselected only if they are in an error state. b. A licensed program that you want to install might not appear on the Install Licensed Programs display. If a licensed program does not appear, you can add it by entering information into the blank fields at the top of the list. This product then appears on the list with the other products, after you press Enter. Type 1 in the Option column Type the product identifier in the Licensed Program column Type the product option alue in the Product Option column Press Enter When you are typing the product option, the system accepts only the following three alues: *BASE, option number, or *ALL. A alue of *BASE will only install the base product of the associated product identifier. The product option number will only install the particular option of the associated product identifier. A alue of *ALL will install the base product and all options of the associated product identifier. Keep in mind, that the licensed programs that you add will appear on the list with only the product identifier. They will not list a descriptie name for the product. Also, you should check the documentation that came with the product to see whether there are any special instructions Press Enter. The Confirm Install of Licensed Programs display appears on the console. Press Enter to confirm your choices. The Install Options display appears. 96 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

115 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Install Options Type choices, press Enter. Installation deice... OPT01 Name System: XXXX Objects to install =Programs and language objects 2=Programs 3=Language objects Automatic IPL... N Y=Yes N=No Type the following: Installation deice OPT01 (See note) Objects to install 1 Automatic IPL N Press Enter. 8. Note: In this example, OPT01 is used for the installation deice. If you use a different naming conention, type the name that you hae assigned to the installation deice. One or both of the following displays show the status of the licensed programs and language objects as they install on the system. You do not need to respond to these status displays. Installing Licensed Programs Licensed programs processed...: Licensed program install in progress System: XXXX 0 of XXX The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: XofXXX Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769SS1 12 OS/400 - Host Serers Note: This display shows which licensed programs and optional parts of licensed programs are being installed. After the *PGM objects and *LNG objects for each licensed program or optional part hae been installed, the licensed program identifier disappears from the display and the number in the licensed programs processed field changes to show how many are processed. You will see the Display Messages display. Load the next media olume that contains licensed program products. If you are installing from optical media, wait for the In Use indicator to go out before responding to the message. Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) 97

116 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed Display Messages System: XXXX Queue..... : QSYSOPR Program....: *DSPMSG Library... : QSYS Library...: Seerity.... : 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply...G Type G, and press Enter. Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears on your console when the installation process is complete. One of the following messages appears on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display: Work withlicensed programs function not complete. Go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Work withlicensed programs function has completed. Verify your licensed programs installed status alues and check for compatibility. It is important to make sure all of your licensed programs are compatible with the operating system. You can determine a licensed program s compatibility by checking the installed status alue. Use LICPGM menu option 10, Display licensed programs, to see the release and installed status alues of the installed licensed programs. If the installed status alue of a licensed program is *COMPATIBLE, it is ready for use. Below are the descriptions of the installed status alues for *COMPATIBLE, *INSTALLED, and *BACKLEVEL. More installed status alue descriptions can be seen in Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211. *COMPATIBLE - The product is installed and its ersion, release, modification, and leel is compatible with the installed leel of the OS/400. You can use this program with the V4R5M0 OS/400. *INSTALLED - The product is installed, but may or may not be compatible with the installed OS/400. It cannot be determined if the licensed program on the media is compatible with the OS/400 or with the currently installed licensed program. Note: Caution! Licensed programs that are now part of the single set will be listed on the display panel as *INSTALLED. You will need to erify that the release leel of the licensed program is compatible with the release leel of OS/400. For IBM products, check the current release leels for licensed programs in the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Or check with your software supplier before you use the licensed program. 98 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

117 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed *BACKLEVEL - The product is installed, but its ersion, release, modification and leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install a current release of this product. And if you hae secondary languages, install a new release of these languages, as well, by using Chapter 11 and LICPGM menu option 21. Note: Caution! If you use a licensed program that is listed as *BACKLEVEL, you run the risk of haing an information mix up between release leels. Or, some portions of the licensed program may not work properly. An installed status alue of *COMPATIBLE is desired. More... You hae completed this task. Do you need to install additional licensed programs? No Yes Go to Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 and complete the instructions there. Do you need to install a secondary language? No Yes Go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) 99

118 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System with the Operating System Already Installed 100 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

119 Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) Before You Begin This section contains instructions to install the operating system and licensed programs on your new system. It explains how to change the primary language when you are installing the operating system if you need to change it at this time. Refer to the book National Language Support, SC , for any special considerations you may need to know about other languages. Note: These instructions assume that the V4R5M0 release of the Licensed Internal Code is installed and the system is powered down. If you do not know what leel of Licensed Internal Code is on your system, contact your serice representatie. Should you use this book? Table 1 on page 11 identifies which releases are supported with this book. Also, reiew Table 4 on page 14, which shows the sequence of the chapters you will use for installing a new system. Reiew the Installation Preparation Checklist in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. The Installation Preparation Checklist has preparatory information that you should be mindful of before your installation. You will need to perform selected tasks. Do you plan to use logical partitions? You must read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information on the Internet at this location: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. For logical partitions only If you perform these actions on a system with secondary logical partitions, the instructions pertain only to that partition. If that partition is the primary partition, these instructions will change the power status and perform an IPL on the entire system. Attention! You must power down all secondary partitions before performing these instructions. Otherwise, you may loose data or damage system software objects. You must perform these instructions for each partition with which you will do the related work. Also, references to the control panel refer to the irtual control panel (Work with Partition Status display). If you perform these actions on a system without secondary logical partitions, the instructions pertain to the entire system. Task 1. Installing the Operating System 1. Ensure that the system is powered down before you begin. 2. Turn the power on for the display station used as the console. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

120 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed 3. If the installation deice has a separate power switch, set it to the On position. 4. Use the control panel to set the IPL type to A and set the mode to Manual. On some AS/400s, you will arrow up to 02, press Enter, and then scroll through to select AM. 5. Press the Enter button on the control panel. 6. Turn the power on for the system by pressing the power button. Note: If either the Disk Configuration Error Report display or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appears, go to Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages on page 225 to determine the appropriate action. 7. The IPL or Install the System menu appears on your console. Select one of the following: IPL or Install the System System: XXXX 1. Perform an IPL 2. Install the operating system 3. Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) 4. Perform automatic installation of the operating system 5. Sae Licensed Internal Code Load the first olume of installation media that contains OS/400. (This olume is labeled B29xx_01, where 29xx is the identifier for the primary language.) When you are installing from optical media, wait until the In Use indicator goes out before you continue. Then do the following to respond to the display: Type 2, and press Enter. 8. The Confirm Install of OS/400 display is shown on your console. Press Enter. 9. The Select a Language Group display shows the primary language currently on the system. This alue should match the language feature number that is printed on the installation media. Refer to Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes on page 227 for a list of language feature codes. Select a Language Group Note: The language feature shown is the language feature installed on the system. System: XXXX Type choice, press Enter. Language feature Verify that the displayed alue is correct, or type the numbers of the feature code for the language you want. Press Enter. After you enter the language feature, the Confirm Language Feature Selection display appears on your console. Press Enter. If the Add All Disk Units to the System menu is not shown, go to the IPL Step in Progress display in step 12 on page AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

121 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed a. Adding Disk Units Subtask If you see the Add All Disk Units to the System display, choose one of the following: If you do not want deice parity protection or mirrored protection or user ASPs, select option 3 (Add all disk units to the system auxiliary storage pool). By adding disk units before you install the operating system, you improe your oerall system performance because the operating system is distributed across all of your disk units. Adding disk units takes approximately 45 minutes for the first 64 disk units. If you add more than 64 disk units, it will take an additional 45 minutes. Note: If you hae RAID-capable disk units on your system or if your system ASP has mirrored protection, your display will not hae option 3. If you want to configure disk protection (deice parity protection or mirrored protection) or user ASPs, select option 2 (Perform disk configuration using DST). You will see the Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) menu. Refer to the book Backup and Recoery, SC , for information about the proper sequence for configuring disk protection. For logical partitions only If you will be creating secondary logical partitions later, you do NOT want to configure all units now. Refer to the worksheet supplied by the Technology Solutions Center for the configuration selection. To access this worksheet or locate the Technology Solutions Center, refer to the Logical Partitioning Web site: Then, follow these links (in order): Planning for Logical Partitions; LPAR Hardware Planning Guide. Scroll down to Pre-Order Tasks, and select either, LPAR Hardware Planning Worksheet or Contact the Technology Solutions Center. Add All Disk Units to the System System: XXXX Select one of the following: 1. Keep the current disk configuration 2. Perform disk configuration using DST 3. Add all disk units to the system auxiliary storage pool 4. Add all disk units to the system ASP and balance data Type 3, and press Enter. Note: If either the Disk Configuration Error Report display or the Disk Configuration Warning Report display appears, go to Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages on page 225 to determine the appropriate action. b. You could see the following display if your disk configuration has changed. Type 5 next to the problem and press Enter to display the detailed report. Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) 103

122 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed Problem Report Note: Some action for the problems listed below may need to be taken. Please select a problem to display more detailed information about the problem and to see what possible action may be taken to correct the problem. Type option, press Enter. 5=Display Detailed Report OPT Problem c. If the following display appears, a disk unit that you selected to add to your disk configuration may already hae data on it. If you choose to continue, any data on that is on the disk units listed will be remoed. Be certain that you want to configure the disk before you continue. Follow the instructions on the display. Press Enter to return to the Problem Report screen. Press F10 to continue the Add Disk Unit subtask. Possibly Configured Units Problem: These non-configured units appear to be configured units of some other disk configuration and may contain alid data. This option will clear the data from these units and destroy the other disk configuration. Press Enter to continue Press F12=Cancel to return and change your choices. Serial Resource Other System Number Type Model Name Serial Number F3=Exit F12=Cancel More.. d. The following display shows the percentage of disk units added. This display does not require a response. You selected to add units. Function Status % Complete 12. e. When the process completes, continue the software installation process with the next step below. This completes the subtask for adding disk units. Status displays appear on the console. You do not need to respond to any of these displays. The following is an example of a status display: Licensed Internal Code IPL in Progress IPL: Type... Attended Start date and time. xx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx Preious system end. Normal IPLstep...: Storage Management Recoery The following list shows some of the IPL steps that are shown on the IPL Step in Progress display. Some of the IPL steps could take a long time. Authority Recoery Journal Recoery 104 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

123 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed 13. Database Recoery Journal Synchronization Start the Operating System The Install the Operating System display appears. Type options, press Enter. Install the Operating System Install option =Take defaults (No other options are displayed) 2=Change install options Date: Year Month Day Time: Hour Minute Second Type the following: Install option 1 Date (Use the current year, month, and day.) Time (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) 14. Press Enter. Status messages appear during the installation process. You do not need to respond to any of these status displays. The following is an example of a status display: Message ID...: CPI2070 OS/400 Installation Status Stage 2 XX % Installation Objects Stage Completed Restored 1 Creating needed profiles and libraries.... : X >> 2 Restoring programs to library QSYS : XXXXX 3 Restoring language objects to library QSYS.. : 4 Updating program table...: 5 Installing database files : 6 Completing OS/400 installation : 15. Messages similar to the following may appear: Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) 105

124 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed Display Messages System....: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 10 Deliery...: *BREAK Press Enter to continue. System operator message queue QSYSOPR created again. Console alues lost Press Enter. A message similar to the following appears at the bottom of a blank display for a long time. CPI Installing data base files in library QSYS. The Sign On display is shown. Sign On System....: Subsystem..: Display...: User....QSECOFR Password.... Program/procedure... Menu.... Current library... XXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX 18. Type QSECOFR for the User prompt, and type your password, if required. Press Enter. Seeral blank displays and Display Messages displays could be shown. To continue, press Enter for each message display. The following display is an example of a message that could be shown: Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 60 Deliery...: *BREAK Press Enter to continue. System object QWCSCPF created again during IPL. 19. The IPL Options display appears. IPL Options Type choices, press Enter. System date... XX/XX/XX MM/DD/YY System time... XX:XX:XX HH:MM:SS Clear job queues.... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear output queues... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear incomplete job logs... N Y=Yes, N=No Start print writers... Y Y=Yes, N=No Start system to restricted state... Y Y=Yes, N=No Set major system options.... Y Y=Yes, N=No Define or change the system at IPL.... N Y=Yes, N=No Last power-down operation was ABNORMAL Notes: a. Ignore the message on the bottom of the IPL Options display. b. If you need to change system alues, such as the alue for the QSECURITY system alue, you can do so now. Type Y for the Define or 106 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

125 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed change the system at IPL prompt. If you do, also use the control panel to set the mode selection to the mode on which you want the system to run. Follow the instructions on the displays. Type the following: System date (Use the current date.) System time (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) Start system to restricted state Y Set major system options Y Press Enter. Additional display messages could be shown. Press Enter after each message to continue. The Set Major System Options display appears. Set Major System Options Type choices, press Enter. Enable automatic configuration...y Y=Yes, N=No Deice configuration naming...*normal *NORMAL, *S36, *DEVADR Default special enironment....*none *NONE, *S36 Respond to the prompts on the Set Major System Options display. Enable automatic configuration The alue Y (Yes) automatically configures local deices. N (No) indicates no automatic configuration. Refer to the book Local Deice Configuration, SC , for information about automatic configuration. Deice configuration naming Specify *NORMAL to use a naming conention unique to the AS/400 system. The alue *S36 uses a naming conention similar to System/36. Refer to the book Local Deice Configuration, SC , for information about deice configuration naming and *DEVADR. Default special enironment The default alue *NONE indicates no special enironment. *S36 sets up the System/36 enironment. Refer to the book System/36 Enironment Programming, SC , for more information about working in the System/36 enironment on the AS/400 system Press Enter. The Edit Rebuild of Access Paths display could be shown. If it is, press Enter to continue. Seeral blank displays and Display Messages displays are shown. To continue, press Enter for each message display. Do not respond to blank displays. The following display is an example of a message that could be shown: Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) 107

126 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 10 Deliery...: *BREAK Press Enter to continue. Library QHLPSYS in SYSVAL QSYSLIBL not found A message, your password has expired may appear. Press Enter. The Change Password display appears. Change the password from QSECOFR to your own choice. First input the old password, QSECOFR. Then input the new password of your choice. Enter the new password again as erification. When the AS/400 Main Menu appears on your console, you hae completed this task. Continue with Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs. Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs If you hae secondary logical partitions, you must perform this procedure on each partition to which you want to install the licensed programs. 1. Begin at the AS/400 Main Menu. Do the following to put the system in a restricted state and filter the messages that appear: a. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(60) Press Enter. b. A message display could appear. Press Enter. c. Type: ENDSBS *ALL *IMMED Press Enter. d. When the following message appears, press Enter to continue: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) command being processed e. The message System ended to restricted condition appears. Press Enter to continue. f. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR SEV(95) Press Enter. g. A message display could appear. Press Enter. Load the media olume that contains the optionally installable parts of OS/400. For optical media, this olume has label B29xx_02, where 29xx indicates the primary language. The AS/400 Main Menu appears. Type: GO LICPGM. Press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. 108 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

127 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed LICPGM Work withlicensed Programs Select one of the following: Manual Install 1. Install all Preparation 5. Prepare for install Licensed Programs 10. Display installed licensed programs 11. Install licensed programs 12. Delete licensed programs 13. Sae licensed programs System: XXXX Type 11 (option 11. Install licensed programs), and press Enter. Please read the note below for an alternatie to using option 11. Note: If you want to install all licensed programs that are on the distribution media, use Manual Install option 1, Install all, instead of using option 11. (See the Work with Licensed Programs display in the example aboe.) This will sae time for the installation. Or, if you want most of the licensed programs on the media, then Manual Install option 1 is also the preferred choice. If you want most of the licensed programs and choose this method of installation, you will hae to delete the extra unwanted licensed programs. The Manual Install display appears after selecting Manual Install option 1. Select option 2 (2=All products) on this display to install all of the licensed programs on the media. Then, continue with step 8 on page 110 of these instructions. 5. For more information about using Manual Install option 1, refer to Using Option 1. Install All on page 161. The Install Licensed Programs display appears. Page through the display to find the licensed programs you want. Type a 1 in the option column next to the licensed programs that you want to install. Install Licensed Programs System: XXXX Type options, press Enter. 1=Install Licensed Product Option Program Option Description SS1 OS/400 - Library QGPL SS1 OS/400 - Library QUSRSYS SS1 1 OS/400 - Extended Base Support _ 5769SS1 2 OS/400 - Online Information SS1 3 OS/400 - Extended Base Directory Support _ 5769SS1 4 OS/400 - S/36 and S/38 Migration _ 5769SS1 5 OS/400 - System/36 Enironment _ 5769SS1 6 OS/400 - System/38 Enironment _ 5769SS1 7 OS/400 - Example Tools Library _ 5769SS1 8 OS/400 - AFP Compatibility Fonts _ 5769SS1 9 OS/400 - *PRV CL Compiler Support _ 5769SS1 11 OS/400 - S/36 Migration Assistant More... F3=Exit F11=Display status/release F12=Cancel F19=Display trademarks Notes: a. The libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS are preselected, and Extended Base Support (option 1) and Extended Base Directory Support (option 3) are preselected to install. You must install these on your system. b. A licensed program that you want to install might not appear on the Install Licensed Programs display. If a licensed program does not appear, Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) 109

128 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed you can add it by entering information into the blank fields at the top of the list. This product then appears on the list with the other products, after you press Enter. Type 1 in the Option column Type the product identifier in the Licensed Program column Type the product option alue in the Product Option column Press Enter When you are typing the product option, the system accepts only the following three alues: *BASE, option number, or *ALL. A alue of *BASE will only install the base product of the associated product identifier. The product option number will only install the particular option of the associated product identifier. A alue of *ALL will install the base product and all options of the associated product identifier. Keep in mind that licensed programs that you add will appear on the list with only the product identifier and will not gie a descriptie name of the product. Also, you should check the documentation that came with the product to see whether there are any special instructions Press Enter. The Confirm Install of Licensed Programs display appears on the console. Press Enter to confirm your choices. The Install Options display appears. Install Options Type choices, press Enter. Installation deice... OPT01 Name System: XXXX Objects to install =Programs and language objects 2=Programs 3=Language objects Automatic IPL... N Y=Yes N=No Type the following: Installation deice OPT01 (See note) Objects to install 1 Automatic IPL N Press Enter. 8. Note: In this example, OPT01 is used for the installation deice. If you use a different naming conention, type the name that you hae assigned to the installation deice. One or both of the following displays show the status of the licensed programs and language objects as they install on the system. You do not need to respond to these status displays. 110 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

129 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed Installing Licensed Programs Licensed programs processed...: Licensed program install in progress System: XXXX 0 of XXX The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: XofXXX Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769SS1 12 OS/400 - Host Serers Note: This display shows which licensed programs and optional parts of licensed programs are being installed. After the *PGM objects and *LNG objects for each licensed program or optional part hae been installed, the licensed program identifier disappears from the display and the number in the licensed programs processed field changes to show how many are processed. You will see the Display Messages display. Load the next media olume that contains licensed program products. If you are installing from optical media, wait for the In Use indicator to go out before responding to the message. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library... : QSYS Library...: Seerity.... : 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply...G Type G, and press Enter. Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears on your console when the installation process is complete. One of the following messages appears on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display: Work withlicensed programs function not complete. Go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Work withlicensed programs function has completed. Verify your licensed programs installed status alues and check for compatibility. You must make sure all of your licensed programs are Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) 111

130 Installing Software on a New AS/400 System without the Operating System Installed compatible with the operating system, before using any of the installed programs. See the caution notes below. Use LICPGM menu option 10, Display licensed programs, to see the release and installed status alues of the installed licensed programs. If the installed status alue of a licensed program is *COMPATIBLE, it is ready for use. Here are the descriptions of the installed status alues for *COMPATIBLE, *INSTALLED, and *BACKLEVEL. More installed status alue descriptions can be seen in Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211. *COMPATIBLE - The product is installed and its ersion, release, modification, and leel is compatible with the installed leel of the OS/400. You can use this program with the V4R5M0 OS/400. *INSTALLED - The product is installed, but may or may not be compatible with the installed OS/400. You must determine whether the licensed program on the media is compatible with the OS/400 or with the currently installed licensed program. Read the note below. Note: Caution! Licensed programs that are now part of the single set will be listed on the display panel as *INSTALLED. You will need to erify that the release leel of the licensed program is compatible with the release leel of OS/400. For IBM products, check the current release leels for licensed programs in the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Or check with your software supplier before you use the licensed program. *BACKLEVEL - The product is installed, but its ersion, release, modification and leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install a current release of this product. And if you hae secondary languages, install a new release of these languages, as well, by using Chapter 11 and LICPGM menu option 21. Note: Caution! If you use a licensed program that is listed as *BACKLEVEL, you run the risk of haing an information mix up between release leels. Or, some portions of the licensed program may not work properly. An installed status alue of *COMPATIBLE is desired. More... You hae completed this task. Do you need to install additional licensed programs? No Yes Go to Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 and complete the instructions there. Do you need to install a secondary language? No Yes Go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. 112 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

131 Chapter 8. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition The instructions in this section install the Licensed Internal Code on a new secondary logical partition. After you perform the instructions here, you will then use Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) on page 101 to install the Operating System/400, and licensed programs on a new secondary logical partition. Before You Begin Should you use this book? Table 1 on page 11 shows which releases are supported when you use this book. Also, reiew Table 4 on page 14, which shows the sequence of the chapters you will use for installing software on a secondary partition. Reiew the Installation Preparation Checklist in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. The Installation Preparation Checklist has preparatory information that you should be mindful of before your installation. You will need to perform selected tasks. Do You Hae to Use the Manual Installation Process? Yes, you must use the manual process for this procedure. Hae you read about logical partitions? You must read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information on the Internet at: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. You should contact the Technical Support Center (TSC) to help create logical partitions on your system. Contact the Technical Support Center by at: [email protected], or by fax at: (507) Attention! This procedure causes existing data on the disk units assigned to this secondary logical partition to be lost! Make sure you really want to perform this procedure. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

132 Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition Task 1. Installing the Licensed Internal Code on a Secondary Logical Partition While you perform an installation on a secondary logical partition, system reference codes (SRCs) appear on the Work with Partition Status display. You can access this display through Start Serice Tools (SST) or Dedicated Serice Tools (DST). Note: 114 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 In this book, when an SRC appears with the characters xx (B2xx xxxx), it means that a ariety of characters may be shown in the place where the xx appears. The term system refers to the secondary partition on which you are performing the installation. When installing on secondary partitions, the term control panel refers to accessing the Work with System Partitions display under SST or DST from the primary partition. Refer to the AS/400 Information Center article Managing Logical Partitions and topic Controlling your logical partitions with DST and SST for more information. Until you hae completed the installation of LIC, the information shown about the configuration of partitions will be incorrect. Deices attached to the buses of your secondary partitions are not listed until the installation is complete. Therefore, if you look at your configuration from the primary partition before you complete the installation, you will see only the buses, but not the IOP and deice details. 1. Arrange your installation media in the order in which you will use them. Refer to Table 17 on page Verify that the primary partition is powered on. If power is not on, go to the AS/400 Information Center article Managing Logical Partitions and topic Restarting and powering down a system with logical partitions for more information. Return here when done. 3. Ensure that power is on for the primary partition s console and the console for your secondary partition. 4. Verify that this secondary partition has an alternate IPL resource assigned. Note: Refer to the AS/400 Information Center article Managing Logical Partitions. See the topics Displaying and printing logical partition information and Changing logical partition configuration for more information. 5. Load the installation media olume that contains Licensed Internal Code into the installation resource defined for this secondary partition. Wait for the In Use indicator to go out. Note: If you are using a tape deice instead of the optical deice optimized for optical media, erify that the tape unit is aried on and allocated to your system (partition). 6. Use the Work with Partition Status display to set the mode selection to Manual. 7. Use the Work with Partition Status display to set the IPL source to D. 8. Use the Work with Partition Status display to power on this secondary partition.

133 9. If there is an alternate installation deice defined and enabled, the Confirm Alternate Installation Deice display appears. To install from the alternate installation deice, press Enter. 10. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition To install from optical media, press F12 to Cancel. You see the Licensed Internal Code display. Perform step 12, below, and select option 3 (Define alternate installation deice). Perform the instructions in How to Disable an Alternate Installation Deice on page 232 and disable the alternate installation deice. The Select a Language Group display is shown. Note: The installation media for Licensed Internal Code is now language-independent. It is ery important that you complete this step carefully. The language for Licensed Internal Code and OS/400 must match. If they do not match, do not continue with the installation. Stop and call your software proider. Get the correct language feature before continuing. If the languages do not match, you may hae CCSID-related errors and the installation may fail. Refer to Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes on page 227 for a list of language feature codes. Select a Language Group The language feature shown is the language feature installed on the system. Attention: To keep the same primary language, ensure that the media you use for installing the operating system matches the language feature shown. system media does not match what is shown, the installation process will attempt to install the If the operating operating system in a different language feature than Licensed Internal Code. This is undesirable. Type choice, press Enter. Language feature Type the primary language feature code. The language feature is shown on the label of your OS/400 installation media as B29xx_nn, where 29xx indicates the feature for the primary language. 11. Press Enter. After you enter the language feature, the Confirm Language Group display appears. Confirm Language Group Language feature...: 2924 Press Enter to confirm your choice for language feature. Press F12 to change your choice for language feature. 12. Press Enter. The Install Licensed Internal Code display appears. Chapter 8. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition 115

134 Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition Select one of the following: Install Licensed Internal Code System: XXXX 1. Install Licensed Internal Code 2. Work withdedicated Serice Tools (DST) 3. Define alternate installation deice Type 1 (See note) Press Enter. 13. Note: If you hae an alternate installation deice attached to the system, type a 3 to erify its address and determine whether it is enabled or disabled. Continue with the Verifying and Selecting an Alternate Installation Deice in Appendix H on page 233. If you are not using an alternate installation deice, go on to step 13. The Install Licensed Internal Code (LIC) display appears on your console. Install Licensed Internal Code (LIC) Disk selected to write the Licensed Internal Code to: Serial Number Type Model I/O Bus Controller Deice xx-xxxxxxx xxxx xxx x x x Select one of the following: 1. Restore Licensed Internal Code 2. Install Licensed Internal Code and Initialize system 3. Install Licensed Internal Code and Recoer Configuration 4. Install Licensed Internal Code and Restore Disk Unit Data 5. Install Licensed Internal Code and Upgrade Load Source Type 2, and press Enter. Read the warning and reply to the Confirmation display. Note: Attention! This procedure causes existing data on the disk units assigned to this secondary logical partition to be lost! Make sure you really want to perform this procedure. The Initialize the Disk - Status display appears while the load source for the secondary partition is being initialized. The Install Licensed Internal Code - Status display appears on your console. You do not need to respond to this display. It will remain on your console for approximately 30 minutes. 116 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

135 Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition Install Licensed Internal Code - Status Install of the Licensed Internal Code in progress Percent XX % complete Elapsed time in minutes......: x.x Please wait On the Select Planned Operating System display, select OS/400. If an error occurs, you may see a display that requires a response. Perform the action necessary as prompted by the display. Otherwise, continue with step 19. After approximately 10 minutes, the IPL or Install the System display appears. The Licensed Internal Code is now replaced. Do not remoe the distribution media at this time. The Disk Configuration Warning Report display may appear. If it does, display the detailed report for each warning shown on the display. Press the Help key from the Disk Configuration Warning Report display for more information about your choices. Also refer to Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages on page 225 for more information. Disk Configuration Warning Report Type option, press Enter. 5=Display Detailed Report Press F10 to accept all the warnings and continue the IPL. The system will attempt to correct the warnings. OPT Warning _ xxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxx _ xxxxx_xx_xxxxx xxxxxx_ xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx More... F3=Exit to use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) F10=Accept warnings and continue the IPL Note: If the warning Disk unit not formatted for optimal performance appears on this display, do the following: Type a 5, and press Enter to display the detailed report. Write down the information displayed. After the upgrade completes, you will need this information to format these disk units to gain optimal performance. Press F12 to cancel and return to the Disk Unit Warning Report. Press F10 to accept the warnings and continue the IPL. Continue with Task 1, step 7 in Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) on page 101. Chapter 8. Installation for a New Secondary Logical Partition 117

136 118 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

137 Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language Before You Begin This section contains the instructions to change the primary language of your system. If you hae secondary logical partitions, you must perform these instructions for each partition to which you change the primary language. Reiew Table 6 on page 15 to determine the most efficient method for changing your primary language. This table will direct you to the best chapters to use for changing your primary language. Before you begin to change the primary language, be sure you hae read the information in Planning for National Language Support on page 53. For more specific information about national language considerations, refer to the book National Language Support, SC Before you use this chapter, obtain the following: You need the media that contains the Operating System/400 (5769-SS1). The media label includes the characters B29xx_01, where 29xx is the language feature code for the primary language that is already on the system. You also need the media that contains the secondary language you want to install. The media label includes the characters N29xx and the name of the language. The character N indicates that the media contains only language objects, and 29xx is the language feature code of the secondary language. Note: If the label on the secondary language media does not match this description, do not continue with the instructions in this part. If the letter B precedes the language feature code, go to Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) and use those instructions to change your primary language. The release and modification leel of your system must be the same as the release and modification leel of your secondary language media. Attention: You cannot change your primary language to a language you currently hae installed as a secondary language on your system. You must delete the secondary language first before you can change it to your primary language. Go to Using Option 22. Delete Secondary Languages on page 167 for more information about deleting secondary languages. Complete the planning tasks in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. Task 1. Changing the Primary Language If you hae secondary logical partitions, you must perform these instructions for each partition to which you change the primary language. 1. Begin at the AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as your initial menu). Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

138 Changing Your Primary Language Load the first olume of the media containing the operating system (5769-SS1). For optical media, this olume is labeled B29xx_01, where 29xx indicates the primary language that is already on the system. Note: Do not load your secondary language media at this time. 2. Use the control panel to switch the mode to Manual. 3. Type: PWRDWNSYS OPTION(*IMMED) RESTART(*YES) Press Enter. 4. Wait for the IPL or Install the System display to appear on your console. Select one of the following: IPL or Install the System System: XXXX 1. Perform an IPL 2. Install the operating system 3. Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) 4. Perform automatic installation of the operating system 5. Sae Licensed Internal Code Type 2, and press Enter. 5. The Confirm Install of OS/400 display is shown on your console. Press Enter. 6. The Select a Language Group display shows the primary language currently installed on the system. Change the primary language of your system by specifying the language feature code of the secondary language media on this display. For example, say the primary language is English (2924) and you are using secondary language media to change it to Portuguese (2922). This display would appear showing You would type Select a Language Group Note: The language feature shown is the language feature installed on the system. System: XXXX Type choice, press Enter. Language feature Type the numbers of the feature code for the language you want. Press Enter. 7. After the language feature code is entered, the Confirm Language Feature Selection display appears on your console. Press Enter. 8. Some status displays appear on the console. You do not need to respond to any of these status displays. The following is an example of a status display: 120 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

139 Changing Your Primary Language Licensed Internal Code IPL in Progress IPL: Type... Attended Start date and time. xx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx Preious system end. Normal IPLstep...: Storage Management Recoery The following list shows some of the IPL steps that are shown on the IPL Step in Progress display. Some of the IPL steps could take a long time. Authority Recoery Journal Recoery Database Recoery Journal Synchronization Start the Operating System Some of the IPL steps could take a long time. 9. The Install the Operating System display appears when the IPL is complete. Install the Operating System Type options, press Enter. Install option =Take defaults (No other options are displayed) 2=Change install options Date: Year Month Day Time: Hour Minute Second Type the following: Install option 2 Date (Use the current year, month, and day.) Time (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) 10. Press Enter. The Installation Status display appears. You do not need to respond to this display. The Specify Install Options display appears. Specify Install Options Type options, press Enter. Restore option...4 1=Restore programs and language objects from current media set 2=Do not restore programs or language objects 3=Restore only language objects from current media set 4=Restore only language objects from a different media set using the current install deice. Job and output queues option...2 1=Clear, 2=Keep Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language 121

140 Changing Your Primary Language Type the following: Restore option 4 Job and output queues option Press Enter. The Installation Status display appears. You do not need to respond to this display. When the following message appears, load the olume that contains secondary language media, which is labeled N29xx. The alue 29xx is the feature code of the secondary language. Message Message ID...: CPA2057 Type...: Inquiry From program...: XXXXXXX Seerity...: 99 Language ID...: 2922 Message...: Theinstallation media containing language objects for the system language is needed to continue the installation process. Recoery...: Load the installation media containing language objects for the specified language. Type choice, press Enter. Reply =Continue, 2=End installing Type 1, and press Enter. 12. The system searches through the media and loads the necessary language information. The Installation Status display appears, indicating that the language is being changed (in stage 3). The installation continues through the remaining stages. This display does not require a response. After the base part of the operating system has been changed to the new primary language, the Sign On display appears on your console. Continue with Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs to change the language objects for the licensed programs. Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs If you hae secondary logical partitions, you must perform this procedure on each partition to which you want to install the licensed programs. 1. Begin at the Sign On display. Sign On System....: Subsystem..: Display...: User....QSECOFR Password.... Program/procedure... Menu.... Current library... XXX XXXXX XXXXXXXX Type QSECOFR for the User prompt, and type your password, if required. Press Enter. 2. Seeral display messages appear. To continue, press Enter on each display. The following is an example of a message that may appear: 122 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

141 Changing Your Primary Language Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 10 Deliery...: *BREAK Press enter to continue. System object QWCSCPF created again during IPL. 3. The IPL Options display appears. IPL Options Type choices, press Enter. System date... XX/XX/XX MM/DD/YY System time... XX:XX:XX HH:MM:SS Clear job queues.... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear output queues... N Y=Yes, N=No Clear incomplete job logs... N Y=Yes, N=No Start print writers... Y Y=Yes, N=No Start system to restricted state.... N Y=Yes, N=No Set major system options.... N Y=Yes, N=No Define or change the system at IPL.... N Y=Yes, N=No Last power-down operation was ABNORMAL Note: Ignore the message on the bottom of the IPL Options display. Type the following: System date (Use the current date.) System time (Use the current time, 24-hour clock.) Set major system options N Press Enter. 4. Additional display messages could be shown. Press Enter after each message to continue. 5. The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as the initial menu) appears on your console. Do the following to put the system in a restricted state and filter the messages that appear: a. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(60) Press Enter. b. A message display could appear. Press Enter. c. Type: ENDSBS *ALL *IMMED Press Enter. d. When the following message appears, press Enter to continue: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) command being processed e. The message System ended to restricted condition appears. Press Enter to continue. f. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR SEV(95) Press Enter. g. A message display could appear. Press Enter. Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language 123

142 Changing Your Primary Language 6. The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as your initial menu) appears again. Type: GO LICPGM. Press Enter. 7. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. LICPGM Select one of the following: Manual Install 1. Install all Work withlicensed Programs System: XXXX 8. Type 1, and press Enter. The Manual Install display appears. Manual Install Type choices, press Enter. Install option =Installed products 2=All products 3=New products System: XXXX Installation deice OPT01 Name Replace if current N Y=Yes N=No Automatic IPL... N Y=Yes N=No Type the following: Install option 1 Installation deice OPT01 (See note) Replace if current N Automatic IPL N Press Enter. 9. Note: In this example, OPT01 is used for the installation deice. If you use a different naming conention, type the name that you hae assigned to the installation deice. One or both of the following displays show the status of the licensed programs and language objects as they are being installed on the system. You do not need to respond to these status displays. Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: 0ofXXX Licensed program install in progress The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. 124 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

143 Changing Your Primary Language Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: X Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769SS1 OS/400 - Library QUSRSYS If you see the following message, load the next olume of the secondary language media and continue the installation. Note: Be certain that the label on the next olume is for the same secondary language. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue.....: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity....: 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply.... G Type G, and press Enter. 11. More... Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears on your console when the language objects for all of the licensed programs are installed. One of the following messages appears on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display: Work withlicensed programs function has completed. Press F3 (Exit) to return to the AS/400 Main Menu. Work withlicensed programs function not complete. Go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures to determine the problem. You hae completed this task. To complete your installation, you must go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and follow the instructions there. Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language 125

144 Changing Your Primary Language 126 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

145 Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs Before You Begin This section contains instructions to install additional licensed programs or optional parts of licensed programs on your system. (Separately ordered features are installed as a licensed program.) Complete the planning tasks in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. You can use this section to add additional licensed programs either as part of a software release upgrade or independently of one. If you install an additional licensed program independently of a software release upgrade, check the following: Ensure that you hae a recent copy of the cumulatie PTF package. You should also get the latest high-impact perasie (HIPER) PTFs. Use the Preentie Serice Planning (PSP) information to determine if any prerequisite PTFs will need to be installed or if any special instructions are included for installing the licensed program. The PTFs for licensed programs are on a separate media. Use the AS/400 PTF Shipping Information Letter to install the cumulatie PTF package after adding additional licensed programs. If you add additional licensed programs and you hae a secondary language installed on your system, you must install the secondary language after you install the licensed programs. Otherwise, the added licensed program will not hae secondary language support. Note: Restricted State Required: The system must be in a restricted state to install the following libraries and options of OS/400. OS/400 libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS OS/400 option 12 - Host Serers Some licensed programs and libraries require a restricted state, while others only require a partially restricted system. Howeer, we recommend putting the system in a restricted state to aoid installation failures and to get the best performance during your upgrade. Other licensed programs may require special actions before saing, restoring, or installing a new copy of the product. For example, MQSeries for AS/400 requires its own specific procedure to restrict the product. If you want to install other licensed programs while the system is not in a restricted state, you can skip steps 3a through 3e of Task 1. If you are selecting more than one licensed program and want to ensure that the products you select install as fast as possible, you should reiew the information in Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

146 Installing Additional Licensed Programs Multiprocess Installation Oeriew on page 186. Table 43 on page 197 shows which licensed programs may hae conditions that affect the installation time. Do you plan to use logical partitions? You must read the articles about logical partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic. You also can iew this information at the following Internet location: Additionally, refer to the articles at the Logical Partitioning Web site: For a brief description within this book, read About Logical Partitions on page 220. Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu 1. Sign on the system using QSECOFR. Note: The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as your initial menu) appears on the console. 2. Insert a olume in the installation deice. If you are installing from optical media, wait until the In Use indicator goes out before you continue. To install the no-charge optional parts of OS/400 or no-charge licensed programs, load OS/400 media olume B29xx_02 (29xx indicates the national language feature code for the primary language of your system). To install keyed products, load the olume labeled L29xx_01. To install priced features of OS/400 or licensed program products, load the olume labeled F29xx_ The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as your initial menu) appears. Do the following to put the system in a restricted state and filter the messages that appear: a. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(60) Press Enter. b. A message display could appear. Press Enter. c. Type: ENDSBS *ALL *IMMED Press Enter. d. When the following message appears, press Enter to continue: ENDSBS SBS(*ALL) command being processed e. The message System ended to restricted condition appears. Press Enter to continue. f. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR SEV(95) Press Enter. g. A message display could appear. Press Enter. 4. The AS/400 Main Menu (or the menu you chose as your initial menu) appears again. Type: GO LICPGM. Press Enter. 5. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears. 128 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

147 Installing Additional Licensed Programs LICPGM Work withlicensed Programs Select one of the following: Manual Install 1. Install all Preparation 5. Prepare for install Licensed Programs 10. Display installed licensed programs 11. Install licensed programs 12. Delete licensed programs 13. Sae licensed programs System: XXXX Type 11 (option 11. Install licensed programs), and press Enter. Please read the note below for an alternatie to using option 11. Note: If you want to install all of the licensed programs that are on the distribution media, use Manual Install option 1, Install all. (See the Work with Licensed Programs display aboe.). Do this instead of using option 11. This will sae time for the installation. Or, if you want most of the licensed programs on the media, then Manual Install option 1 is also the preferred choice. If you choose this method of installation and want most of the licensed programs, delete the extra unwanted licensed programs. The Manual Install display appears after you select Manual Install option 1. Select option 2 (2=All products) on this display to install all of the licensed programs on the media. Then, continue with step 9 on page 130 of these instructions. 6. For more information about using Manual Install option 1, refer to Using Option 1. Install All on page 161. The Install Licensed Programs display appears. Page through the display to find the licensed programs you want. Type a 1 in the option column next to the licensed programs to be installed. Install Licensed Programs System: XXXX Type options, press Enter. 1=Install Licensed Product Option Program Option Description 5769SS1 OS/400 - Library QGPL _ 5769SS1 OS/400 - Library QUSRSYS _ 5769SS1 1 OS/400 - Extended Base Support _ 5769SS1 2 OS/400 - Online Information _ 5769SS1 3 OS/400 - Extended Base Directory Support _ 5769SS1 4 OS/400 - S/36 and S/38 Migration _ 5769SS1 5 OS/400 - System/36 Enironment _ 5769SS1 6 OS/400 - System/38 Enironment _ 5769SS1 7 OS/400 - Example Tools Library _ 5769SS1 8 OS/400 - AFP Compatibility Fonts _ 5769SS1 9 OS/400 - *PRV CL Compiler Support _ 5769SS1 11 OS/400 - S/36 Migration Assistant More... F3=Exit F11=Display status/release F12=Cancel F19=Display trademarks Notes: a. The libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS, and Extended Base Support (option 1) and Extended Base Directory Support (option 3) are preselected if you are installing licensed programs as part of a new system installation. If you are adding additional (new) licensed programs or optional parts, these items would be preselected only if they are in an error state. b. A licensed program you want to install may not be listed on the Install Licensed Programs display. If a licensed program is not listed, it can be Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs 129

148 Installing Additional Licensed Programs added to the list by entering information into the blank fields at the top of the list. After you press Enter, this product then appears on the list with the other products. Type 1 in the Option column Type the product identifier in the Licensed Program column Type the product option alue in the Product Option column Press Enter For the product option, only three alues are accepted: *BASE, option number, or *ALL. A alue of *BASE will only install the base product of the associated product identifier. The product option number will only install the particular option of the associated product identifier. A alue of *ALL will install the base product and all of the options of the associated product identifier. Keep in mind that licensed programs that you add will appear on the list with only the product identifier and will not gie a descriptie name of the product. Also, you should check the documentation that came with the product to see whether there are any special instructions. If you get a message that the product already appears in the list, scroll down to the product. Make sure that there is a 1 in the Option column. Make sure that it is selected for installation Press Enter. The Confirm Install of Licensed Programs display appears on the console. Press Enter to confirm your choices. The Install Options display appears. Install Options Type choices, press Enter. Installation deice... OPT01 Name System: XXXX Objects to install =Programs and language objects 2=Programs 3=Language objects Automatic IPL... N Y=Yes N=No Type the following: Installation deice OPT01 (See note) Objects to install 1 Automatic IPL N Press Enter. 9. Note: In this example, OPT01 is used for the installation deice. If you use a different naming conention, type the name that you hae assigned to the installation deice. One or both of the following displays show the status of the licensed programs and language objects as they are being installed on the system. You do not need to respond to these status displays. 130 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

149 Installing Additional Licensed Programs Installing Licensed Programs Licensed programs processed...: Licensed program install in progress System: XXXX 0 of XXX The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. Installing Licensed Programs or PTFs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: XofXXX Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769SS1 12 OS/400 - Host Serers Note: This display shows which licensed programs and optional parts of licensed programs are being installed. After the *PGM objects and *LNG objects for each licensed program or optional part hae been installed, the licensed program identifier disappears from the display and the number in the licensed programs processed field changes to show how many are processed. You will see the Display Messages display. Load the next media olume that contains licensed program products. If you are installing from optical media, wait for the In Use indicator to go out before responding to the message. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue.....: QSYSOPR Program...: *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity....: 95 Deliery... : *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply.... G Type G, and press Enter Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears on your console when the installation process is complete. One of the following messages appears on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display: Work withlicensed programs function not complete. Go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Work withlicensed programs function has completed. Verify your licensed programs installed status alues and check for compatibility. It is important to make sure all of your licensed programs Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs 131

150 Installing Additional Licensed Programs are compatible with the operating system. You can determine a licensed program s compatibility by checking the installed status alue. Use LICPGM menu option 10, Display licensed programs, to see the release and installed status alues of the installed licensed programs. If the installed status alue of a licensed program is *COMPATIBLE, it is ready for use. Here are the descriptions of the installed status alues for *COMPATIBLE, *INSTALLED, and *BACKLEVEL. More installed status alue descriptions can be seen in Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211. *COMPATIBLE - The product is installed and its ersion, release, modification, and leel is compatible with the installed leel of the OS/400. You can use this program with the V4R5M0 OS/400. *INSTALLED - The product is installed, but may or may not be compatible with the installed OS/400. It cannot be determined if the licensed program on the media is compatible with the OS/400 or with the currently installed licensed program. Note: Caution! Licensed programs that are now part of the single set will be listed on the display panel as *INSTALLED. You will need to erify that the release leel of the licensed program is compatible with the release leel of OS/400. For IBM products, check the current release leels for licensed programs in the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Or check with your software supplier before you use the licensed program. *BACKLEVEL - The product is installed, but its ersion, release, modification and leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install a current release of this product. And if you hae secondary languages, install a new release of these languages as well, using LICPGM menu option 21. Note: Caution! If you use a licensed program that is listed as *BACKLEVEL, you run the risk of haing an information mix up between release leels, or some portions of the licensed program may not work properly. An installed status alue of *COMPATIBLE is desired. More... You hae completed this task. Do you hae more licensed programs or optional parts to install, but they did not appear in the list displayed in step 6 on page 129 (or could not be added to the list)? No Yes Go to Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command on page 133, below, to install these licensed programs or optional parts. Do you need to install a secondary language? No Yes Go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. 132 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

151 Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command You may be instructed to use the RSTLICPGM command to install non-ibm licensed programs. All IBM-supplied licensed programs, including PRPQs, LPOs and single set licensed programs, should hae been installed already by using the LICPGM menu options 1 or 11, or during automatic installation. Note: If you do not hae non-ibm licensed programs, you can skip this task. If you need to install a secondary language, go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. Otherwise, you must complete the installation process. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. 1. You may hae receied special installation instructions with these products. If you did, you should use those instructions. 2. Load the media containing the licensed program or optional part on the installation deice. In the following steps, OPT01 is used for the installation deice. If you are using a different naming conention, use the name you hae assigned to the installation deice. 3. To install a new licensed program, type the command: RSTLICPGM LICPGM(xxxxxxx) DEV(OPT01) OPTION(*BASE) Installing Additional Licensed Programs where xxxxxxx is the product identifier for the licensed program you are installing. 4. Press Enter. To install a new optional part, type the command: RSTLICPGM LICPGM(xxxxxxx) DEV(OPT01) OPTION(n) where xxxxxxx is the product identifier for the licensed program you are installing and n is the option number. 5. Press Enter. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you hae installed all of the new licensed programs and optional parts that could not be installed in Task 1. More... You hae completed this task. Do you need to install a secondary language? No Yes Go to Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language on page 135 and complete the instructions there. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs 133

152 Installing Additional Licensed Programs 134 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

153 Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language Before You Begin This section contains instructions for installing a secondary language on your system (or partition if you hae secondary logical partitions). Complete the planning tasks in Chapter 3. Preparing to Install Software on page 19. Be sure to read the secondary language considerations in Planning for National Language Support on page 53. IMPORTANT: Before you install a secondary language on your system, go to the book National Language Support, SC , for more information about installing and using secondary languages. If you are installing a double-byte character set (DBCS) secondary language, you must hae a DBCS primary language installed on your system. You can install a single-byte character set (SBCS) secondary language on a system with a DBCS primary language. Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu 1. You must sign on to the system as QSECOFR. If you are not, sign off and then sign on again using QSECOFR. 2. Note the national language ersion identifier on the secondary language media. You will need this in step 8 on page 136. Secondary language media is identified by the N29xx on the label. The identifier is in the form 29xx, where xx is a unique number for each language. Refer to Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes on page 227 to see a list of national language feature codes. 3. Load the secondary language media olume on the installation deice. 4. Type the following command on any command line: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(95) Press Enter. 5. A message display could appear. Press F3 (Exit). Note: Ignore the messages that are shown. 6. Type the following command on any command line: GO LICPGM Press Enter. 7. The Work with Licensed Programs menu appears. Use the page down or rollup key to see the second display of the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

154 Installing a Secondary Language LICPGM Work withlicensed Programs Select one of the following: Secondary Languages 20. Display installed secondary languages 21. Install secondary languages 22. Delete secondary languages System: XXXX Type 21, and press Enter. 8. The Install Secondary Languages display appears. Install Secondary Languages System: XXXX Primary language...: 2924 Description...: English Type options, press Enter. 1=Install Installed Option Language Description Library Release _ 2902 Estonian QSYS2902 _ 2903 Lithuanian QSYS2903 _ 2904 Latian QSYS2904 _ 2905 Vietnamese QSYS2905 _ 2906 Lao QSYS2906 _ 2909 Belgian EnglishQSYS Sloenian QSYS2911 _ 2912 Croatian QSYS2912 Type 1 in the option column next to the language you want to install. Press Enter. 9. After the language feature is entered, the Confirm Install of Secondary Languages display is shown. Confirm Install of Secondary Languages System: XXX Press Enter to confirm your choices for 1=Install. Press F12 to return to change your choices. Installed Option Language Description Library Release Sloenian QSYS Press Enter. The Install Option for Secondary Languages appears. Install Option for Secondary Languages Type choice, press Enter. Installation deice... OPT01 Name Replace if Current... N Y=Yes N=No System: XXX Type the following: Installation deice OPT01 (See note) Replace if Current N Press Enter. Note: OPT01 is used for the installation deice in this example. If you are using a different naming conention, type the name you hae assigned to the installation deice. 136 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

155 Installing a Secondary Language One or both of the following displays show the status of the language objects as they are installed on the system. Installing Licensed Programs Licensed programs processed...: Licensed program install in progress System: XXXX 0ofXXX The following display is an example of the display that appears during the installation process. Installing Licensed Programs System: XXXX Licensed programs processed...: XofXXX Licensed Program Option Description Type 5769RG1 *BASE ILE RPG for AS/ If you see the following message, load the next olume of the secondary language media and continue the installation. Note: Be certain that the label on the next olume is for the same secondary language. Display Messages System: XXXX Queue...: QSYSOPR Program.... : *DSPMSG Library...: QSYS Library...: Seerity...: 95 Deliery...: *BREAK Type reply (if required), press Enter. Load the next olume in optical deice OPT01 (X G) Reply...G Type G, and press Enter. 12. Note: You may be prompted to load the next olume, een if you hae no more olumes to load. The system is waiting for your response to continue reading the media or to finish the loading process. Type G and press Enter after loading the next olume, if you hae another olume to load and want to continue processing. Type X and press Enter, if there are no more olumes to load or if you want to terminate the loading process. The Work with Licensed Programs display appears on your console when the installation process is complete. One of the following messages appears on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display: Work withlicensed programs function not complete. Go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. Work withlicensed programs function has completed. Note: Some licensed program options do not hae language objects or are not supported for secondary languages. For example, options 6, 7, and 9 of the operating system are not supported. Option 8 of the operating system does not hae any language objects. You can use LICPGM menu option 20 to see Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language 137

156 Installing a Secondary Language the products that hae secondary languages installed. More... You hae completed this task. Do you need to install secondary languages for licensed programs, which are not shown in the list using option 10 of the Work with Licensed Programs menu? No Yes Go to Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command to install secondary languages for these licensed programs. You hae completed this task. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command You may be instructed to use the RSTLICPGM command to install secondary languages for non-ibm licensed programs. All IBM-supplied licensed programs, including PRPQs, LPOs and single set licensed programs, should hae had secondary languages installed already by using the LICPGM menu option 21. Note: If you do not hae non-ibm licensed programs, you can skip this task. Howeer, you must complete the installation process. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there You may hae receied special installation instructions with independently shipped licensed programs (those that are not on the same media as the software release). If you did, you should use those instructions. In the following steps, OPT01 is used for the installation deice. If you are using a different naming conention, use the name you hae assigned to the installation deice. Load the media olume containing the secondary language that you want to install. To install a secondary language for a licensed program, type the command: RSTLICPGM LICPGM(xxxxxxx) DEV(OPT01) OPTION(*BASE) RSTOBJ(*LNG) LNG(29xx) where xxxxxxx is the product identifier for the licensed program and 29xx is the national language ersion feature code. 4. Press Enter. To install secondary language for an optional part of a licensed program, type the command: RSTLICPGM LICPGM(xxxxxxx) DEV(OPT01) OPTION(n) RSTOBJ(*LNG) LNG(29xx) where xxxxxxx is the product identifier for the licensed program, n is the option number, and 29xx is the national language ersion feature code. Press Enter. 138 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

157 5. Installing a Secondary Language Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you hae installed all of the secondary languages for the licensed programs and optional parts that were independently installed. More... You hae completed this task. You must complete the installation process before putting your system into operation. Go to Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation on page 141 and complete the instructions there. Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language 139

158 Installing a Secondary Language 140 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

159 Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation Use this checklist to complete any of the installation processes in this book. 1. Remoe the media olume when the installation is complete. If your media is tape, wait for the tape to rewind completely. 2. If you hae any IBM or non-ibm products with special installation instructions, install these products now. Check the product s documentation, and follow the special instructions there. Otherwise, continue with the next step. 3. Install the cumulatie PTF package (the package that came with your distribution media or a more recent current cumulatie PTF package). Use the instructions in the AS/400 PTF Shipping Information Letter. Then return here and continue with the next step. Note: If you do not install the cumulatie PTF package now, you need to perform an IPL and let the Initialize System (INZSYS) process complete. Before you do, set the mode selection to Normal and set the IPL type to B (or the IPL type you use for eeryday operation). Refer to INZSYS Recoery Information on page 157 for more information. For logical partitions only Attention! Do not use this step to install the cumulatie PTF package on a system with logical partitions. You could potentially lose data. Instead refer to the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC , or for directions to do this correctly, use the article Managing Logical Partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T You also can iew this information on the Internet at: These two references explain how to install the cumulatie PTF package on a system with logical partitions. 4. Apply any group PTFs that you may hae ordered. Refer to Ordering Group PTFs on page 39 for more information. Refer to the coer letter and instructions for the program temporary fix (PTF) to apply group PTFs. For general information on applying PTFs, refer to the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Look for messages in the install history log that indicate the status of the Initialize System (INZSYS) process. Use option 50 (Display log) on the Work with Licensed Programs display to look for messages. Note: On some systems, the INZSYS process could take 2 or more hours to complete; on most systems, it should complete within a few minutes. a. Type GO LICPGM, and press Enter. b. Type 50 on the Work with Licensed Programs display, and press Enter. c. The Display Install History display appears. Press Enter. The Display History Log Contents display appears. If you do not see either of the following messages on the display, wait a few minutes and select option 50 again. Find the message Initialize System (INZSYS) started. After this message appears, wait for a period of time and look for the Initialize System (INZSYS) processing completed successfully message. If Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

160 Completing Installation you do not see this message on the display, go to INZSYS Recoery Information on page 157 to determine the problem. Install software license keys for your OS/400 and keyed products. Use the Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command to display the installed keyed products to add license key data, or to enter the usage limit. Refer to Installing license keys: WRKLICINF command on page 173 for instructions. For each product, update the license key and update the usage limit to match the usage leel that was ordered. Contact your software proider if you are unsure of the usage leel you purchased. If you purchased a pre-loaded system, the licensed information is already installed. If you are upgrading your system, the license information will arrie with the upgrade media. You must install the license key within 70 days of your upgrade. Contact your software proider if you hae a problem with this key. After updating the license information, return here and continue with the next step. Set the usage limit for usage-based priced (UBP) products by using the WRKLICINF command. The usage limit is listed on the Proof of Entitlement (POE) for each usage-based priced product. Refer to Setting the Usage Limit on page 174 for instructions. After updating the usage limit, return here and continue with the next step. Install your choice of options from the bonus pack CD-ROM, if you hae the product 5769-WSV (Integration for Windows Serer). You can install either: Option 1 for Windows NT 4.0 Option 2 for Windows 2000 Or both options 1 and 2 For more information, refer to Installing AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer in Chapter 3 of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer - Setup, SC Or refer to the Information Center topic and follow these links (in order): Network Operating Systems; Windows Serer on AS/400; Installation and configuration of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer; Upgrading Windows serers on AS/ Perform the Leel Check command for the product 5769-WSV, Integration for Windows Serer. See Installing upgrades to Windows serers when you upgrade AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer in Chapter 3 of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer - Setup, SC Or refer to the Information Center topic and follow these links (in order): Network Operating Systems; Windows Serer on AS/400; Installation and configuration of AS/400 Integration for Windows Serer; Upgrading Windows serers on AS/400. If you hae installed the product 5769VI1, Image Plus VisualInfo for AS/400, you can use the product. Howeer, you must apply a PTF and perform post-installation commands before you can sae the product. For more information, refer to the section Post Installation in the product document IBM ImagePlus VisualInfo for AS/400: Planning and Installation Guide, GC If you hae not already erified the compatibility of your licensed programs with the OS/400, then do this now. Use LICPGM menu option 10, Display installed licensed programs. If *COMPATIBLE is not listed next to a licensed program, then go to Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211, and determine how to proceed. 142 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

161 11. Completing Installation Sae your system using your normal sae procedures. (Refer to the instructions in the book Backup and Recoery, SC ) Make sure that the Initialize System (INZSYS) process is complete before you sae your system Note: Before you start a sae operation, use the Work with Actie Jobs (WRKACTJOB) command to check the status of QDCPOBJx jobs. These jobs decompress objects. There could be more than one QDCPOBJx job. You can start your sae operation if these jobs are in an inactie state. If you put the system in a restricted state by ending subsystems, the QDCPOBJx jobs become inactie. The jobs will restart when the system is not in a restricted state. See Compressed Objects and Storage Space on page 49 for more information about decompressing objects. If you plan to use the softcopy library from a workstation or the AS/400, refer to the AS/400e Softcopy Library CD-ROM, SK3T You will find the installation instructions in the readme.txt file. If you installed Client Access products, you may hae other tasks you need to complete on workstations. Use the following references to locate the correct publication for installing a client on the workstation. If the Client Access ersion you are using is for: Microsoft Windows 95/98/NT**, see: Client Access Express for Windows-Setup, SC Microsoft Windows 95/NT**, see: Client Access for Windows 95/NT - Setup, SC Microsoft Windows 3.1**, see: Client Access for Windows Setup, SC Note: The aboe manual replaces Client Access for Windows 3.1-Getting Started,. The aboe manual also includes the installation information that was distributed in the informal documentation that was shipped with the product (USLT156U). DOS with Extended Memory, see: Client Access/400 for DOS with Extended Memory Setup, SC DOS, see: Client Access/400 for DOS Setup, SC OS/2 1.3, see: Client Access/400 for OS/2 Setup, SC Optimized for OS/2, see: Client Access Optimized for OS/2 - Setup, SC You may hae installed licensed programs that require additional installation steps on PCs. Or, you may hae programs that install on PCs through a Client Access function. If you hae products such as this, complete your PC installation by using the instructions for the product. If you hae an Integrated Netfinity Serer that you stopped before you began the installation process, restart it now. a. Type GO NWSADM on the AS/400 command line. The Network Serer Administration display appears. b. Select option 2, Start a network serer. If you installed 5769-TC1, TCP/IP Utilities, go to the TCP/IP Configuration and Reference, SC , for adanced configuration and set up information. Chapter 12. Checklist for Completing the Installation 143

162 Completing Installation 17. If you installed 5769-JV1, AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa, you will need to run the erification program. Type jaa com.ibm.as400.system.hello at the command line, and press Enter. Additional information about the AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa licensed program is aailable on the World Wide Web (WWW) at the following uniform resource locators (URLs): 18. Located in the United States: Located in Denmark: You might hae to run the CVTPRFDTA command to conert the collected data to a format that is usable by this new release. Run the conersion, if you hae both of the following conditions: 5769-PM1, Performance Manager for AS/400 or 5769-PT1, Performance Tools for AS/400 installed Performance data on your system that was collected prior to performing the installation of this new release For instructions, see Conerting the performance data on page 178. You hae completed installing V4R5M0 on your system. 144 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

163 Part 2. Appendixes Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

164 146 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

165 Appendix A. Recoery Procedures If you encounter a problem during installation, the information in this appendix may help you locate and correct the problem, then complete installing licensed programs. Error messages and system reference codes (SRCs) let you know that an error occurred during the installation process. Use the error messages or SRCs to determine which part of the process failed. Note: If an SRC appeared during the automatic or manual installation procedures, you should check Correctie Action for Common SRCs on page 86 first. Where You Begin Recoery First, determine the type of failure by using Table 30. Table 30. Type of failure When Failure Occurred Saing system before install Installing new release or licensed program Power failure during an installation process What To Do If a problem occurs while you are saing the system, reiew your job log to determine what caused the failure. Correct the error and complete your system sae procedure. Do not continue to replace the new release until you hae a complete backup copy of your system. If you cannot complete installing the new release, you will need this backup copy to restore the system to the preious release. Use Table 31 to direct you to the recoery information you need to find the problem, determine what caused it, correct the problem, and then complete installing this release. In the farthest left column, locate the installation section you were using when the failure occurred. In the second column, locate which task you were performing in that section. Locate the first task that failed during your installation and then use the information in the last column to determine your recoery starting point. If you hae a power failure anytime during the installation process, go to the Table 31 to determine where to start the installation again. You should be able to start with the task where you were at when the failure occurred. For example, if you had completed installing the operating system when the power failed, and are installing licensed programs, start with the task to install licensed programs. If you are using the automatic process, start at the beginning. The system can determine which tasks hae not been completed and will resume at the appropriate task. If the installation process fails and you cannot continue the current install, use the book Backup and Recoery, SC , and your system s backup to restore the preious release leel. Table 31. Where to start recoery Installation Section in Use Task Number in Use at Time of Failure Where to Start Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation Task 1. Using Automatic Installation on page 63 Go to Starting Point for Automatic Installation Recoery on page 148. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

166 Recoery Procedures Table 31. Where to start recoery (continued) Installation Section in Use Task Number in Use at Time of Failure Where to Start Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation Chapter 6. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (with the Operating System Already Installed) Chapter 7. Installing Software on a New AS/400 System (without the Operating System Installed) Chapter 9. Changing Your Primary Language Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs Chapter 11. Installing a Secondary Language Task 1. Replacing the Licensed Internal Code on page 72 Task 2. Replacing the Operating System on page 78 Task 3. Replacing the Licensed Programs on page 81 Task 1. Doing the Initial Program Load (IPL) on page 92 Task 1. Installing the Operating System on page 101 Task 1. Changing the Primary Language on page 119 Task 2. Installing the Licensed Programs on page 122 Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu on page 128 Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command on page 133 Task 1. Using the Work with Licensed Programs Menu on page 135 Task 2. Using the Restore Licensed Program Command on page 138 Go to Licensed Internal Code Recoery on page 149. Go to Operating System Recoery on page 150. Go to Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery on page 152. Go to Operating System Recoery on page 150. Go to Operating System Recoery on page 150. Go to Operating System Recoery on page 150. Go to Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery on page 152. Go to Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery on page 152. Look at the messages for the command. Go to Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery on page 152. Look at the messages for the command. Starting Point for Automatic Installation Recoery If you used the automatic installation process in Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation on page 63, use the following table to determine where the failure occurred and the appropriate recoery section. After you hae the problem corrected, go to Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again on page 155 to start the installation process again. Notes: 1. To use automatic installation recoery, you must use the same ersion, release, and modification leel distribution media that caused the failure. 2. If you hae a failure during the automatic installation process, and sign on to do problem analysis, your system will be running under the QSYSSBSD controlling subsystem. When your system completes an IPL after the installation has completed successfully, your controlling subsystem is actie again. 148 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

167 Recoery Procedures Table 32. Where to start recoery for the automatic installation process Finding the Problem (Symptom) Where to Start Go to step 4 on page 150 of Licensed Internal Code SRC B Recoery. SRCs other than B900 xxxx Go to Licensed Internal Code Recoery, below. SRCs starting with B900 xxxx Go to Operating System Recoery on page 150. Messages starting with CPZ20xx Go to Operating System Recoery on page 150. Message indicating automatic installation not complete Go to Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery on page 152. Licensed Internal Code Recoery 1. If the Install Licensed Internal Code - Error display appears, use Table 33 to determine the action to take for the reason code displayed. Install Licensed Internal Code - Error Error: An unrecoerable error occurred. The error reason code is listed below. This install can not be completed. Gie the reason code to you serice representatie. Do not re-ipl the system until your serice representatie can retriee any needed information. Error reason code...: Press Enter to return to the Dedicated Serice Tools display. Table 33. Return code for Licensed Internal Code - Error display Reason Code Action All others If you are using optical media, clean the media. If you are using tape, clean the tape deice. Then retry the installation. Retry the installation. If the installation fails again with the same reason code, retry the installation with another set of media. If the same failure occurs, contact your serice representatie For Licensed Internal Code SRCs, go to one of the following manuals. If the SRC is of the form A6xx 6xxx, refer to the appendix on Licensed Internal Code SRCs in the book Backup and Recoery, SC If any SRC other than an A6xx 6xxx appears, go to the starting point for problem handling in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC , and follow the instructions. Find the SRC that is shown on the control panel display and take the appropriate recoery action. Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 149

168 Recoery Procedures 4. Note: If the SRC indicates that you hae a media error, thoroughly clean the installation deice. If you are using optical media, clean the media. If you are using tape, clean the tape head and tape path thoroughly. Then continue with the next step. If you receie another error message that indicates a media error on the same media, get another set of media to complete the installation process. You are trying to do one of the following: Install from optical media when an alternate installation deice is enabled. Use an alternate installation deice which is not enabled. Go to How to Set Up an Alternate Installation Deice on page 230 and How to Disable an Alternate Installation Deice on page 232 and perform the appropriate procedure. 5. Note: If you cannot find the address information, or the configuration has changed and the address is wrong, you must determine the address by physical inspection. This inspection can be difficult and may ary depending on your system model and the specific configuration of your IO buses. For this reason, IBM recommends that you call your next support leel for help in determining the addresses for the alternate installation deice. A serice agreement may be required for this type of assistance. Start the installation process again. If you were using the automatic installation process, go to Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again on page 155 to start the installation process again. You must load the first olume in the installation deice to start the automatic recoery installation process. If you were using the manual installation process, go to Starting the Manual Installation Process Again on page 156 to start the installation process again. Operating System Recoery If a problem occurs when you are replacing or installing the operating system, an SRC appears on the control panel display, or an error message appears on the console. Use table 34 and table 35 below to determine the cause of the problem and take the action indicated. Then continue with step 2. If you were using the automatic installation process, start the process again using the instructions in Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again on page 155. Start the manual installation again using the following steps Note: Attention! If you do this on a primary partition when secondaries are actie, this will cause all partitions to IPL immediately. If you hae actie secondary partitions, power them off prior to using this procedure. a. b. Load the first olume into the installation deice for the alternate IPL. Prepare the deice. Use the control panel to set the mode to Manual and select function 03. Press Enter on the control panel. 150 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

169 c. Return to the task that failed and start the task again at the step where the IPL or Install the System display appears on the console. d. Table 34. Operating system problems Recoery Procedures After you respond to the Confirm Install of Operating System display you should see the Select a Language Group display. Verify that the language feature that is displayed matches the language feature for the OS/400 installation media that you are using. Symptom B through B F Action The SRCs in this range are displayed by the installation of the operating system process. Fill out the problem summary form in the appendix of the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Go to the SRC table in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling and take the appropriate recoery action. Then return to this manual to start the installation process again. B through B900 37FF The SRCs in this range are displayed by the start operating system process. Go to the section on starting point for system problem handling in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Take the appropriate recoery action. Other SRCs not listed in this table. If the SRC is not in the range of SRCs listed in this table, go to the section on starting point for system problem handling in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Table 35. Error messages The following table contains some of the failure messages that could occur during the installation of the operating system. Message CPZ2003 CPZ2004 CPZ2005 CPZ2010 CPZ2011 Description Cause: The installation process receied a tape or optical media error code. Recoery for Error Code Ex or Ex10 001A: 1. Clean the media. If you are using tape, clean the tape head and tape path thoroughly. If you are using optical media, clean the media with a clean lint free cloth. Gently wipe the disc from the center to the outside of the disc. 2. Try the installation process again. If you were using the automatic installation process, go to Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again on page 155 to start the installation process again. If you were using the manual installation process, go to step 3 on page 150 to start the installation process again. If you receie another error message indicating a media error on the same installation media, contact your software proider to get another set of installation media to complete the installation process. Recoery for all other error codes: Contact your serice representatie Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 151

170 Recoery Procedures Table 35. Error messages (continued) Message CPZ2022 Description Cause: The restore options read from the installation profile are not alid. Note: If you create distribution media and specify *NONE for the installation profile name, the media will contain an empty installation profile. These media cannot be used to perform an automatic installation. Recoery: Record the recoery information for the error message. Try to install the operating system again using the manual installation process. You can also try to use the automatic installation process with a different set of media. If the problem occurs again during an automatic installation process, contact your next leel of serice. CPZ2023 Cause: The installation options read from the installation profile are not compatible with the current state of the system. The installation requested by the options read from the installation profile cannot be performed. For example, this condition can occur when an installation is requested that does not load program objects and the QSYS library is damaged. Recoery: Try to install the operating system again using the manual installation process. CPZ20xx Cause: These termination messages are displayed by the installation of the operating system process. Print the display if possible; otherwise, copy all of the information. Recoery: Read the instructions for the messages that are displayed on the console. Perform the recoery action described in the message to correct the problem and then try the installation process again. Note: A short time after you press Enter, a B900 xxxx SRC is displayed. The system reference code (SRC) table in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC contains additional information. Licensed Programs, PTFs, and Secondary Language Recoery 1. Type GO LICPGM on any command line. 2. Type 50 (Display log for messages) on the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Press Enter. 3. The Display Install History display appears. Press Enter. 4. The Display History Log Contents display appears. Look at the messages to determine the installation status of the licensed programs and PTFs. The messages show what part of the licensed program installation function has failed. Areas where the failure could hae occurred are: Installing the IBM-supplied libraries Installing the licensed programs Installing PTFs Installing a secondary language Initialization process If a problem, such as a power failure, occurs during a process in the preceding list, you could see a message that the process has started. An example of such a message is Licensed program installation process started. Howeer, the failed or completed status message may not display. 5. There should be one or more messages that indicate which IBM-supplied library or licensed program failed. Be sure to look at all of the messages. Use F10 (Display all) to see all messages. 6. To see the online help information, moe the cursor to the message and press the Help key. Look at the online help information for the error 152 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

171 message to get the message identifier and more information about the cause and recoery for the failure. Go to Table 36 on page 154 for a list of some possible messages you could see. 7. A copy of the job log has been spooled to an output queue. Note: To locate and display the job log, enter one of the following Work with Spool File (WRKSPLF) commands: For the automatic installation process, type the following command: WRKSPLF SELECT(QLPAUTO) ASTLVL(*INTERMED), and press Enter. For the manual installation process, type the following command: WRKSPLF SELECT(QSECOFR) ASTLVL(*INTERMED), and press Enter. For the PTF process, type the following command: WRKSPLF SELECT(QSYS *ALL *ALL SCPF) ASTLVL(*INTERMED), and press Enter. If the display shows More..., on the bottom of the display, page down (Roll up) until Bottom... appears. Select option 5 (5=Display) on the last entry. Note: Ignore any error messages listed in the nnnnnn/qsys/qlpinstall job log. These messages are not installation error messages. 8. Scan the job log for error messages. Determine the cause and recoery for each error message in the job log. Go to Table 36 on page 154 for a list of some possible messages you could see. Note: Be sure to scan the entire job log. There could be more than one failure. Scan the job log by using the message ID. Remember that the message ID is case-sensitie. 9. Select option 10 (Display installed licensed programs) on the Work with Licensed Programs display. The Installed Status column indicates which licensed programs and optional parts are installed. The Installed Status column also indicates if each licensed program installed successfully and if it is compatible with the installed operating system. Refer to Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211, for a description of the installed status alues. You can press the F11 key to see a iew of the display that shows the Installed Release column. The ersion, release, and modification leel alue appears for licensed programs that are either installed compatibly or are installed at a back leel. Page down (Roll up) through all of the displays to see the status of your licensed programs. Check to see if the licensed program that you are installing had a different language feature code than your primary language feature code. If it does, the licensed program is flagged as *ERROR, or the column is blank. The language objects for the licensed program are installed in a secondary language library. Obtain distribution media with the correct primary language feature code. Press the F3 key to return to the Work with Licensed Programs menu. 10. Recoery Procedures After you determine the cause of the error and complete the recommended recoery action, resume the installation process. If you were using the automatic installation process, go to Starting the Automatic Installation Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 153

172 Recoery Procedures Table 36. Error messages Message Description CPA3DD2 CPA3DD3 CPA3DDD CPA3DDF CPA3DE1 Process Again on page 155. If you were using the manual installation process, go to Starting the Manual Installation Process Again on page 156. The following table contains some of the error messages with possible causes of the errors. Look at the messages on your system to determine the exact cause and recoery. Cause: The system could not identify the last olume loaded in the deice. Recoery: Open the deice door, erify that correct olume is loaded, and close the deice door. Cause: The installation process is expecting more licensed programs to be loaded. Recoery: If you hae more media that contains licensed programs, load the olume and type a G to continue the installation process. If you do not hae any more olumes that contain licensed programs, type an X to indicate that there is no more media to load. When the installation process completes, use option 50 of the LICPGM menu to erify messages in the installation history log. Cause: The olume loaded does not contain licensed programs that are supported through the Work with Licensed Programs (LICPGM) menu. CPD32B0 reason code 7 CPF327E reason code 3 CPD3713 CPD3D82 CPF3D8F CPF371C CPF3731 CPF371D CPF371E CPF3D96 Recoery: Load the optical media that contains licensed programs. Cause: 5769SS1 Extended Base Support failed to install. Recoery: Use the Reclaim Storage (RCLSTG) command and try to install option 1 again. Cause: The licensed program is currently installed on your system and was not found on the distribution media. Recoery: Get another set of distribution media that contains the licensed program. Install the licensed program again from Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127, or delete the licensed program from your system if you no longer want it. Cause: These messages could be shown if you did not end all of the subsystems before you started the installation process. Recoery: End all subsystems and start installing the licensed programs again. Cause: Look at the messages preiously listed in the job log to determine the failure. Recoery: Take the recommended recoery action. Note: If you receied one of these messages, the installation process ended before you completed installing the licensed programs. Cause: These messages could be shown if the wrong olume is loaded. The online information of the message can help determine the cause. Recoery: Load the correct olume and start the process again. Cause: Errors occurred during the restoring process for a licensed program. Recoery: Take the recommended recoery action explained in the online help information. If you receie these messages, the installation continued with the other licensed programs if the problem was not too seere. Howeer, problems with the tape or system storage leel would hae caused the installation to end. 154 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

173 Table 36. Error messages (continued) Message Description CPF3D80 CPF3D81 CPF3D84 CPF3D8B CPF3D8C CPF3D90 CPF3D91 CPF3D82 CPF3D83 CPF3D85 CPF3D86 CPF3D8E Cause: Errors occurred when restoring a licensed program or PTFs. Recoery Procedures Recoery:Use the Display Job (DSPJOB) command. Enter DSPJOB nnnnnn/qlpinstall/qbchinst or DSPJOB nnnnnn/qlpinstall/qlpinstall where nnnnnn is the job number of the job log in the message help of the error message. Select option 4 on the Display Job display to display spooled files. Select option 5 on the Display Job Spooled Files display to determine the cause of the failure. Correct the error and start the installation process again. Ignore error messages in the nnnnnn/qsys/qlpinstall job log. These messages are not installation error messages. Cause: There is not enough auxiliary storage to install the licensed programs you selected. Recoery: Go to Appendix C. Licensed Program Information on page 171 to determine the space requirements for each licensed program you want to install. Obtain additional auxiliary storage and start the installation process again. Cause: An object or PTF is not installed because it requires successful installation of a licensed program. That licensed program may not be installed or may be installed at the wrong release leel. CPF3DD3 CPI3D82 CPI3D84 CPI3D85 Media Error Messages Recoery: See the preious messages in the job log to determine if the licensed program is installed successfully. Correct any errors or install the required licensed program and start the installation process again. Cause: The deice description could not be found or could not be used. Recoery: Create a deice description for the installation deice (optical or tape). Use the CRTOPTDEV command to create a deice description for the optical deice that supports the optical media class. Use the CRTDEVTAP command to create a deice description for the tape deice. Then start the process again. Cause: A licensed program included on the distribution media was not currently installed on the system. Recoery: Use the online information of the message for recoery help. Use Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 to install the licensed program. Cause: A media error occurred during the installation process. Recoery: If you are using optical media, clean the disc, then follow the recoery actions that are indicated for this message. If you are using tape, clean the tape head and tape path thoroughly. If you receie another error message indicating a media error on the same tape, get another set of tapes to complete the installation process. Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again Use one of the three methods in the following table to start an automatic installation again. Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 155

174 Recoery Procedures Table 37. Starting the Automatic Installation Process Again Method Instructions Method 1: Licensed Internal Code When to Use: This method should be used if the Licensed Internal Code needs to be installed again. If you are sure the Licensed Internal Code has been successfully installed, you do not need to use this method. No message indicates that the Licensed Internal Code has been installed successfully; howeer, messages do indicate that the operating system has been installed successfully. If the operating system has been installed successfully, so has the Licensed Internal Code. Method 2: Operating System Method 3: Licensed Programs How to Use: To start an installation process again, use the instructions in Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation of this manual. Start at the Beginning of Chapter 4. When to Use: If you are sure the Licensed Internal Code has been installed successfully, use Method 2 to install the operating system again. Method 2 is faster than using Method 1 because the Licensed Internal Code does not need to be installed again. No message indicates that the Licensed Internal Code has been installed successfully; howeer, messages do indicate that the operating system has been installed successfully. If the operating system has been installed successfully, so has the Licensed Internal Code. How to Use: 1. Use the control panel to the set the mode selector to Manual and the function selected is 03 (Start IPL). 2. Press the Enter button on the control panel. 3. Load the olume B29xx_01 in the installation deice. 4. When the IPL or Install the System display is shown, set the mode selector on the control panel to Normal. 5. Select option 4 (Perform an automatic install of the operating system) on the IPL or Install the System display. 6. Continue with step 9 on page 65. When to Use: Use the Work with Licensed Programs display to install only the licensed programs that failed to install. Make sure the Licensed Internal Code and the operating system are successfully installed. How to Use: Determine which products failed to install. Use option 11 (Install licensed programs) on the Work with Licensed Programs display. Refer to Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127 to install the licensed programs from a list. Starting the Manual Installation Process Again Use this section to start the manual installation process again when recoering from an error while installing licensed programs, PTFs, or secondary languages. One of the four following methods can be used to start a manual installation process. Your Licensed Internal Code and the operating system do not need to be installed again. The following table contains specific information when and how to use each method. 156 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

175 Recoery Procedures Table 38. Starting the Manual Installation Process Again Method Instructions Method 1 When to Use: This method should be used if seeral licensed programs are not installed. Method 2 Method 3 Method 4 How to Use: To start an installation process again using method 1, use option 1 (Install all) on the Work with Licensed Programs display. Refer to Using Option 1. Install All on page 161 to install all of the licensed programs. When to Use: This method should be used if one or more licensed programs are not installed and you want to install only those licensed programs or optional parts that failed. How to Use: To start the installation of only those licensed programs or optional parts that failed, use the instructions in Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page 127. Complete all of the instructions in that part. When to Use: This method can be used if only one or two licensed programs had PTFs that fail to install. Consider installing PTFs for only those licensed programs that failed. HowtoUse:To install PTFs for selected licensed programs, use the GO PTF menu and select option 7. When to Use: This method should be used if seeral licensed programs had PTFs that fail to install. Consider installing the entire cumulatie PTF package again. How to Use: To install the cumulatie PTF package, use the instructions in the AS/400 System PTF Shipping Information Letter INZSYS Recoery Information The installation of V4R5M0 is complete when the licensed program portion of the installation process completes and the Initialize System (INZSYS) process successfully completes. The installation process must end before the INZSYS process is automatically started. This process is initiated during each IPL after you install the QUSRSYS library until the INZSYS process has successfully completed. The INZSYS process will not be initiated during the IPL if the system is in the restricted state. If the INZSYS process is initiated during the IPL, it runs in the SCPF system job. Note: If you perform an IPL before installing a cumulatie PTF package, make sure that the INZSYS process has completed before you start to install the PTF package. Using any PTF commands before INZSYS completes causes the INZSYS to fail. The completion time for INZSYS aries. Allow sufficient time for this process to complete. When you select option 50 (Display log for messages) on the Work with Licensed Programs menu, you should see the message Initialize System (INZSYS) started. Later, you should see the message Initialize System (INZSYS) processing completed successfully. If you do not see the completed message, or if the message Initialize System (INZSYS) failed appears, look at the job log to determine the problem. Use the information in the job log to correct the problem. Then start the conersion process again. To start the conersion process yourself, you can either use a batch job or enter INZSYS on the command line. If you use a batch job, you can use your work station while the process is running, but the system cannot be in restricted state. Batch jobs do not run when the system is in a restricted state. If you enter INZSYS Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 157

176 Recoery Procedures from a command line, we recommend that the system be in restricted state. Setting the system to restricted state will reduce the time that is needed for the INZSYS process to complete. Before you use the INZSYS command, set the mode selection to Normal and set the IPL type to B (or the IPL type that you use for eeryday operation). To set the system to restricted state, do the following: 1. Type: CHGMSGQ QSYSOPR *BREAK SEV(60) 2. A message display could be shown. Press Enter. Note: Ignore the messages that are shown. 3. To put the system in a restricted state, type the End Subsystem (ENDSBS) command: ENDSBS *ALL *IMMED The message System ended to restricted condition appears. Press Enter to continue. To start the conersion process again, do the following: 1. Type: INZSYS 2. Use option 50 (Display log for messages) on the Work with Licensed Programs menu to make sure that the process completes successfully. Do not attempt to sae your system until the INZSYS process has completed successfully. Starting from a Power Off Condition 158 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 You are here because your system unit power is off. Perform the following steps to power on the system and begin a normal installation. When you complete this section, you should return to the appropriate step of your original installation procedures. 1. Use the control panel to select function 02 and press the Enter button. Then select IPL type D. 2. Set the mode selector on the control panel to the appropriate position. If you were directed here from Chapter 4. Replacing a Release Using Automatic Installation, set the mode selector to Normal. If you were directed here from Chapter 5. Replacing a Release Using Manual Installation, erify that the mode selector is in the Manual position. On some AS/400s, you will not hae a mode selector. Instead, you will arrow up to 02, press Enter, and the scroll through to DM or DN. 3. Press Enter on the control panel. 4. Make sure that the power is on for the display station being used as the console. 5. Verify that the switch is in the On position if the installation deice used for the alternate initial program load (IPL) has separate on and off switches. 6. Load the media and make the deice ready. If you cannot load the media now, you will be able to in step Optional: If you hae a 1/4-inch cartridge tape, load the first tape olume into the tape deice for the alternate IPL. Close the door on the tape deice. 8. Turn the power on for the system by pushing the power switch once.

177 9. If you could not load your media in the preious steps, load the first olume into the tape or optical deice for the alternate IPL now. 10. You are ready to return to your original installation procedures. Recoery Procedures If you are performing an automatic installation, continue with step 6 on page 64. If you are performing a manual installation, continue with step 7 on page 72. Appendix A. Recoery Procedures 159

178 Recoery Procedures 160 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

179 Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Manual Install Options This appendix contains information about the options on the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Use this information to determine when and how you can use these options. For each display, you can use the Help key for more information about the display. Use the Install all option on the Work with Licensed Programs menu if you want to install all of the licensed programs on the distribution media. Using Option 1. Install All Option 1 (Install all) on the Work with Licensed Programs menu allows you to install all of the licensed programs and optional parts of the licensed programs from distribution media. Secondary languages on a distribution media can also be installed with this option. The Manual Install display allows you to make choices for the prompts in the following list. Use the Help key for more information about each prompt. 1. Install option This option determines what types of licensed programs and optional parts are installed from the distribution media. You can choose to install only new releases of products that already exist on your system, install all products, install only new products, or install new releases of products that exist on your system plus additionally selected products. Notes: a. The Install option does not apply to the QGPL and QUSRSYS libraries. QGPL and QUSRSYS libraries always install if they are not at the new release leel. For all Install option choices, only new objects are installed in the QGPL and QUSRSYS libraries. b. To complete the installation successfully, the installation media must contain all renewed products that are currently installed on your system. The installation media may contain products whose ersion, release, and modification leel is earlier than that of the new operating system release. (The products did not renew at the same time as the operating system.) 2. Installation Deice Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

180 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Automatic Install Options The examples in this manual use OPT01 for the name of the installation deice. Go to Determining Installation Deice Names on page 59 for more information about the installation deice naming conention. 3. Replace if current By specifying *NO, the licensed programs that are currently installed and at the same release leel on the installation media will not be replaced during an upgrade. You can change the Replace if Current parameter to *YES if you want to replace licensed programs that are already installed, including products installed at the same release leel as on the installation media. By choosing *YES, you may hae to reapply PTFs to some licensed programs that were replaced from the media. 4. Automatic IPL This option determines whether the system will automatically IPL when the installation process has completed successfully. Note: Attention! If you do this on a primary partition when secondaries are actie, this will cause all partitions to IPL immediately. If you hae actie secondary partitions, power them off prior to using this procedure. The Prepare for install option helps you to create an installation list and select the programs that you want to install during the automatic installation process. Prepare for install also helps you erify the contents of the installation media and determine the storage requirements, among other necessary tasks in preparation for automatic installation. Prepare for Install-Oeriew on page 7 describes Option 5. Prepare for Install in more detail. Using Option 5. Prepare for Install Creating and Customizing an Installation List on page 40 proides the instructions for using Option 5. Prepare for Install. Displaying, Installing, Deleting, and Saing from a List This section contains information about displaying, installing, deleting, and saing licensed programs from a list. Using Option 10. Display Installed Licensed Programs After an installation process has completed, it is often necessary to determine if a licensed program is installed successfully on your system. To do this, select option 10 (Display installed licensed programs) on the Work with Licensed Programs menu. The Display Installed Licensed Programs display shows the licensed programs, optional parts, and IBM-supplied user libraries that are installed on your system. The Installed Status column indicates whether or not the licensed program is successfully installed. Refer to Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211, for a description of the installed status alues. 162 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

181 If a licensed program did not install successfully, use the recoery procedures in Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to install the licensed program again. You can use the F11 key to iew the Installed Release column. This column shows the release and modification leel of each installed licensed program. The F11 key has a third iew, also, that shows the product option number of each licensed program. Using Option 11. Install Licensed Programs Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu When you select option 11 (Install licensed programs) on the Work with Licensed Programs display, you see a list of licensed programs and optional parts of licensed programs. The listed items are the licensed programs and optional parts that were supported by the LICPGM installation processes at the time your currently installed operating system became aailable. You can use this list to select licensed programs and optional parts to install on your system. You can also use this list to install a licensed program that did not successfully install during a preious installation process. Work with Licensed Programs 11. Install licensed programs Install Licensed Programs Confirm Install of Licensed Programs Install Options RV3D003-0 To install one or more licensed programs from the list, type a 1 in the option column next to the licensed programs and any optional parts that you want to install. Refer to Licensed Product Table on page 214 for a list of the licensed programs that are on the media. A licensed program you want to install may not be listed on the Install Licensed Programs display. If a licensed program is not listed, it can be added to the list by entering information into the blank fields at the top of the list. After you press Enter, this product then appears on the list with the other products. Type 1 in the Option column Type the product identifier in the Licensed Program column Type the product option alue in the Product Option column Press Enter When you are typing the product option, only three alues are accepted: *BASE, option number, or *ALL. A alue of *BASE will only install the base product of the associated product identifier. The product option number will only install the particular option of the associated product identifier. A alue of *ALL will install the base product and all of the options of the associated product identifier. Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu 163

182 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Keep in mind that licensed programs that you add will appear on the list with only the product identifier and will not gie a descriptie name of the product. Also, you should check the documentation that came with the product to see whether there are any special instructions. The Confirm Install of Licensed Programs display shows which licensed programs you selected to install. If you do not need to make any changes, press Enter to confirm your choices. Fill in the choices listed below on the Install Options display. Use the Help key for more information about each prompt on this display. 1. Installation Deice The examples in this manual use OPT01 for the name of the installation deice. Go to Determining Installation Deice Names on page 59 for more information about the installation deice naming conention. 2. Objects to install This option allows you to choose to install both programs and language objects, only programs, or only language objects. 3. Automatic IPL This option determines if the system will automatically IPL when the installation process has completed successfully. When the licensed programs are installed, the Work with Licensed Programs menu or the Sign On display appears again. To erify that all of the licensed programs are installed successfully, use option 50 (Display log for messages). More information about that option is aailable in Using Option 50. Display Log for Messages on page 168. If an error occurs, you will see the message Work with licensed program function not complete, on the bottom of the Work with Licensed Programs display. Go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 to determine the problem. If you install a licensed program or optional part again, you must also install the PTFs for that licensed program again. Using Option 12. Delete Licensed Programs Select option 12 on the Work with Licensed Programs menu to delete a licensed program or optional part of a licensed program that is installed on your system. When you select this option, the Delete Licensed Programs display appears. The list shows the licensed programs and optional parts that are installed on your system. Use this list to select licensed programs or optional parts to delete. If you delete a (*BASE) licensed program that has optional parts, the system deletes all of the optional parts for that licensed program. If you delete only an optional part, the base program and other optional parts remain on your system. This option deletes all objects that are associated with the licensed program or optional part you select. 164 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

183 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Work with Licensed Programs 12. Delete licensed programs Delete Licensed Programs Confirm Delete of Licensed Programs RSLU164-3 Type a 4 in the Option column next to the licensed program or optional part of a licensed program that you want to delete from your system. The Confirm Delete of Licensed Programs display shows you which licensed programs or optional parts you selected to delete. Press Enter to delete the licensed programs or optional parts. For more information, refer to Notes About Deleting Licensed Programs on page 182. Using Option 13. Sae Licensed Programs Select option 13 on the Work with Licensed Programs menu to sae one or more licensed programs for redistribution. The Sae Licensed Programs display lists the licensed programs and optional parts that are installed on your system. Use this list to select licensed programs or optional parts to sae. Type a 1 in the option column on the Sae Licensed Programs display next to the licensed programs that you want to sae. Work with Licensed Programs 13. Sae licensed programs Sae Licensed Programs Sae Options RSLU165-3 Fill in the information on the Sae Options display by using the following information. Use the Help key for more information for each of the prompts on the display 1. Deice The examples in this manual use TAP01 for the name of the tape deice. Go to Determining Installation Deice Names on page 59 for more information about the tape deice naming conention. 2. Sequence number Use *Default, or enter your choice for the sequence number to be used for the sae process. 3. End of media option Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu 165

184 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Tape - Determines the automatic positioning operation that is done on the tape olume when the sae operation completes. In the case of a multiple-olume sae operation, this parameter applies to the last olume only. All other olumes rewind and unload, if the tape reaches its end. You can specify these alues: *REWIND: The tape automatically rewinds after the operation ends, but it does not unload the tape. *LEAVE: The tape does not rewind or unload after the operation ends. It remains at the current position on the tape drie. *UNLOAD: The tape automatically rewinds and unloads after the operation ends. Optical - Specifies the operation that is automatically performed on the optical olume after the sae operation ends. Optical deices only support the special alue *UNLOAD; they ignore *REWIND and *LEAVE. Some optical deices will eject the olume after the operation ends. Notes: 1. Licensed programs and optional parts that are shipped independently of an operating system release or modification leel are not displayed. Use the Sae Licensed Program (SAVLICPGM) command to sae independently shipped IBM licensed programs and optional parts. 2. This option should not be used for backup and recoery. It is only for redistribution. More information about redistribution is aailable in the book OS/400 Central Site Distribution. Refer to the book Backup and Recoery, SC , for information on saing your system. Secondary Languages Options This section contains information about displaying, installing, and deleting secondary languages on your system. Using Option 20. Display Secondary Languages After an installation process has completed, it is often necessary to determine if a secondary language is installed successfully on your system. To do this, select option 20 on the Work with Licensed Programs menu. The Display Installed Secondary Languages display shows the primary and any secondary languages that are installed on your system. 166 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

185 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Type 5 in the Option column next to a secondary language, and press Enter to see the licensed programs that are installed with the particular secondary language. This information is shown on the subsequent display, Display Installed Secondary Language Licensed Programs. By pushing the F11 key a few times, you will see this display change information. This display shows the secondary language library, product release, installed status alue, or product option. For a description of the installed status alues, refer to Appendix E, Installed status alues on page 211. Using Option 21. Install Secondary Languages Use option 21 to selectiely install a secondary language for the licensed programs that are installed on your system. The media description report contains the secondary language feature number and the olume identifier for the secondary language media. Type 1 by the language you want to install, and press Enter. Only one secondary language can be installed at a time. The Confirm Install of Secondary Language display shows which language you selected to install, the library where it will be installed, and the release leel of the language. On the Install Option for Secondary Languages display, you will select your Installation deice, and the Replace if current parameter. The examples in this manual use OPT01 for the name of the installation deice. Go to Determining Installation Deice Names on page 59 for more information about the installation deice naming conention. By specifying *NO to the Replace if current parameter, the secondary languages that are currently installed and at the same release leel on the installation media will not be replaced during an upgrade. You can change the Replace if Current parameter to *YES if you want to replace secondary languages that are already installed, including secondary languages installed at the same release leel as on the installation media. Using Option 22. Delete Secondary Languages Use option 22 to delete secondary languages you no longer want installed on your system. Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu 167

186 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Work with Licensed Programs 22. Delete secondary languages Delete Secondary Languages Confirm Delete of Secondary Languages RSLU171-0 Redistribution Type 4 to select the secondary language you want to delete, and press Enter. More information about secondary language libraries in user profiles is aailable in the book National Language Support, SC Work with Licensed Programs 40. Create a distribution tape 41. Work with installation profiles RSLU174-1 Completion Status For the redistribution options, refer to the book Central Site Distribution, SC , for complete information to create a distribution tape and installation profiles. When you install licensed programs, a secondary language, or PTFs, make sure that the installation process has successfully completed to aoid problems when you begin using the system. Using Option 50. Display Log for Messages Selecting option 50 shows the Display Install History display. Press Enter to iew the installation start and completion messages on the Display History Log Contents display. This option displays specific messages that are shown in the history log. 168 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

187 Related Commands Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu Each part of the installation process (such as licensed programs, PTFs, Initialize System (INZSYS)) should hae a completion message. If you do not see the message on the display, wait a few minutes and select option 50 again. If you still do not see a completion message, use the recoery procedures in Appendix A. Recoery Procedures to install any licensed programs or PTFs that are not successfully installed. Options 70, 71 and 72 display menus of additional commands you can use. Selecting option 70 shows the Sae and Restore Commands display. This display shows a list of related command menus you can use. For more information on using these command menus, go to the book Backup and Recoery, SC Use the Help key for aailable online information. Selecting option 71 shows the Program Temporary Fix Commands display. You can use these commands to work with one or more indiidual PTFs. For more information about these commands and how to use them, go to the section on Working with Program Temporary Fixes (PTFs) in the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Selecting option 72 shows the Licensed Commands display. More information about the following commands is aailable in the book System Manager Use, SC CPYPTFSAVF CRTPTF CRTPTFPKG HLDPTF ORDSPTPTF RLSPTF SNDPTF Copy PTF to Sae File Create Program Temporary Fix Create PTF Package Hold Program Temporary Fix Order Supported Product PTFs Release Program Temporary Fix Send Program Temporary Fix Appendix B. Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu 169

188 Options on Work with Licensed Programs Menu 170 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

189 Appendix C. Licensed Program Information This appendix contains information that is useful when planning for your software installation. This appendix includes notes about software license keys, usage based limit, specific licensed programs, and information to help you determine whether you should delete optional parts of OS/400. Here are some abbreiations that you need to know: International Program License Agreement (IPLA) The IPLA proides a non-exclusie license to use a software product on only one machine at a time. You can make a copy for backup purposes. The major benefit is that the owner of the product license has the right to transfer program rights under the agreement to another party or enterprise worldwide. If you sell an AS/400 outside your enterprise, the applicable IPLA licenses can transfer with the AS/400 if the parties inoled elect to do so. Should you eer wish to transfer the use of IPLA software applications, there are seeral things that you must transfer. The applicable Proof of Entitlement (POE), License Information Document (LID), IPLA document, and license key sheet must accompany the program transfer. Contact your IBM marketing representatie, business partner, or serices specialist for help with a transfer, problems with a key, and missing or lost keys. You can find information about International Program License Agreement (IPLA) or transferring licensed programs in the Information Center. See the section on Prerequisite and Related Information on page xii to access the Information Center. Proof of Entitlement (POE) The POE seres as transferable eidence of product licensure with usage restrictions noted on the POE or the original inoice depending on the country. The POE is eidence of the owner s authorization to use the program. It is eidence of eligibility for any ersion or release updates under IBM Software Subscription for AS/400, warranty serices, and potential special or promotional opportunities (if announced). Note: There is no replacement for the POE. If you loose the POE, you cannot transfer entitlement for a licensed program. Store it in a secure location. License Information Document (LID) The LID proides specific license information for each product. The specific license information can include additional license restrictions beyond those included in the IPLA. Store it in a secure location along with the POE. Media Distribution Set The licensed programs on the standard set and locked set (AS/400 Keyed Products) come in your primary language. If you order any secondary languages, they will come on extra primary language media. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

190 If you order other licensed programs, which are in addition to the standard set and locked set (AS/400 Keyed Products), each licensed program comes on its own separate media. In this case, all supported languages, not just one secondary language, come on this same media. Here is a description of the media distribution set you will receie with your V4R5M0 software order. distribution set This set includes all licensed programs aailable through distribution (contains all other sets). Standard set The standard set comes with eery V4R5M0 order. It contains the hardware and software components to install on your AS/400. This includes: Licensed Internal Code, OS/400, its no-charge options, and no-charge (bonus) licensed programs and features, such as on-line help messages. The OS/400 has all the applications necessary for the basic operations of your AS/400. In addition, it may contain more programs than you want. Specially featured locked licensed programs come with the standard set. Locked set (AS/400 Keyed Products) The locked set comes with the standard set for eery V4R5M0 software or upgrade order. It contains keyed products and program options. You can use these programs for a 70-day trial period. Within 70 days, you must apply license keys to keep the programs operational. Once you purchase the use of a licensed program and load the license key, the licensed program will remain in operation for continual use. Single set (if ordered) All licensed programs that are not part of the standard set or locked set arrie on separate optical media. When specifically ordered, single set licensed programs arrie on optical media with your release upgrade order. Howeer, if you want to add these at a later date, you can hae them shipped independently later on. Custom-written licensed programs, such as a Program Request for Price Quotation (PRPQ) and Licensed Program Offering (LPO), fall into this single set category. You may install the single set licensed programs using the automatic installation procedure. Note: Some of these single set licensed programs might come with their own installation instructions, and some might hae limited language support. Secondary languages (if ordered) You can order secondary languages separately from the primary language. Each language comes on separate optical media or as a set of optical media. You specify the secondary language during the installation procedure. PTFs IBM ships a cumulatie PTF package when you order a release upgrade. Informational set IBM proides technical and setup information on optical media with your software order. This information includes the Information Center and the Softcopy Library, an on-line ersion of AS/400 books. 172 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

191 Software License Key You install a software license key after you install a keyed product. During the 70-day trial period you can use a keyed product without a key. Howeer, after the 70-day trial period, you must load the license key to use a licensed program. The 70-day period starts from the day you first use a licensed program. Wheneer you upgrade or moe a keyed product, or change the software machine group, the product requires a new 18-character license key. With each keyed product that you order, you will receie a software license key sheet. This sheet contains the following information: The 18-character license key information Product identification number Product name Version, release, and modification Associated system serial number Usage limit Other pertinent information Each keyed product has its own key. You can load this license key on your AS/400 by using the Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command. Obtaining and installing software license keys Software license keys regulate the use of software programs. You must install these keys when you upgrade or moe your software. You must install these keys when you change software machine groups, add additional licenses, or purchase new software that requires a license key. Following is information on pre-loaded keys, obtaining keys, and installing license keys by using the Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command. Obtaining license keys If you ordered a new AS/400, both the hardware and software come pre-loaded with the software license keys already installed. For all other orders, the software license keys, license key sheets, other publications (POE, IPLA, LID), and applicable software ship in the box with your order. If for some reason you loose your license key or need an emergency license key, you can order these through the software key center contact for your country. The software license key sheet lists a toll-free number for assistance. For these special situations, you can receie the license key ia electronic mail ( ), phone, facimile, or the Internet. Installing license keys: WRKLICINF command You can use the Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command to update your license key information. The WRKLICINF command allows you to load the license key and other required information to use a keyed product beyond the 70-day trial period. To update your license key information, do the following: 1. Type: WRKLICINF, and press Enter. Appendix C. Licensed Program Information 173

192 2. 3. Setting the Usage Limit On the Work with License Information display, type a 1 in the option column next to the product identification number to add license key information for a program. Press Enter. On the Add License Key Information (ADDLICKEY) display, type the required information and add the license key information. Some fields may already contain the required information, such as the product identifier, ersion, release and modification numbers, system serial number an so on. The 18-character license key is typed into three fields: In the first field, type in characters one through six. In the second field, type in characters seen through twele. In the last field, type in characters 13 through 18. In the usage limit field, type in the number of authorized users or the alue *NOMAX. Note: You will need *ALLOBJ authority in your user profile to supply the license key information. If you experience a problem with the key proided, contact your software proider. After completing the installation process and before making the system aailable to all users, you must set the usage limit for the user-based priced (UBP) products. These UBP products are listed on the Proof of Entitlement (POE) document that you hae receied with your software order. For products that hae a usage limit, you can proide the information with the WRKLICINF command. 1. Type: WRKLICINF, press Enter Press F11 (Display Usage Information). The usage limit for each product listed on the display must match the usage limit number on each POE for its associated product. Moe the cursor to the line containing the product name whose usage limit is to be updated. Type 2 (Change), press Enter. When the Change License Information display is shown, update the Usage Limit prompt with the usage limit shown on the POE. In addition, update the Threshold prompt with either *CALC or *USGLMT. Do not leae the Threshold set to zero. 6. Note: If the following message is issued, respond with G. CPA9E1B: Usage Limit Increase Must be Authorized. Press help before replying (C G). If the POE lists more products than the Work with License Information display, set the usage limits after you install those products. Software Inentory Tool (SWIT) The Software Inentory Tool is currently only aailable as English uppercase-green screen only. The SWIT displays or prints a list of orderable keyed IBM software products installed on a system. The tool indicates whether a permanent or temporary key is installed for a purchased product. The tool also indicates whether a product is 174 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

193 under ealuation, and gies its expiration date. Follow the two steps below to actiate the Software Inentory Tool and order the licensed programs and license keys that you will need. 1. To operate this program, type: CALL QSFWINV Or for a printed output type: CALL QSFWINV (*PRINT) See the screen below for an example of the Software Inentory tool. From the key and expiration date, you will know which licensed programs you used. Likewise, you will know which require a new license key to operate beyond the 70-day grace period: If there is a key and the expiration date is *NONE, you may transfer this product to a new system. If you are purchasing a release upgrade, you need to obtain and install a new key within 70 days of the upgrade. If Software Subscription coers the upgrade, a customer can place an order for the new release at no charge. In this case, a key ships with the software. If there is a key with an expiration date, you hae a temporary license to use this software on this system. You need to order the product, before the expiration date, to continue to use it. If there is no key, but there is an expiration date, you hae been using the software on trial basis. You will need to order the product and obtain a key to use it beyond the expiration date. If there is no key and there is no expiration date (blanks for both), the software is installed, but not yet run. 2. To order the licensed programs and obtain a key you will need to proide: A printout of the Software Inentory Tool Proof of ownership (Proof of Entitlement - POE, a customer inoice, or IBM install base records) Gie these documents to your marketing representatie, who will place a new order and your software and keys will ship. Example of the Software Inentory Tool INSTALLED SOFTWARE INFORMATION 5769SS1 V4R5M0 HARDWARE: SERIAL NUMBER..: PROCESSOR GROUP..: PRODUCT RELEASE OPTION PROCESSOR FEATURE DESCRIPTION KEY EXPIRATION DATE 5769SS1 V4R5M0 *BASE *ANY 5050 OS/400 0D07519BFBDAA10901 *NONE 5769CX2 V4R5M0 *BASE *ANY 5050 ILE C for AS B D098F01 03/15/ JS1 V4R5M0 *BASE *ANY 5050 Job Schedule 03/01/ RG1 V4R5M0 *BASE *ANY 5050 ILE RPG Licensed Program Sizes See Licensed Product Table on page 214 for the licensed program size information for V4R5M0. For information on licensed program size for prior releases, go to the Technical Studio on the AS/400 Web site. The direct Web address is: Appendix C. Licensed Program Information 175

194 Refer to Ealuating Your Disk Storage Needs on page 47 for instructions on using the Work with Licensed Programs menu to assist in your storage requirement calculations. Licensed Programs-Installation Notes This topic contains information about specific licensed programs. It might proe helpful when you plan or instal V4R5M0 licensed programs. Read this section for the following information: Notes About 5769-SS1, OS/400 Notes About Other Licensed Programs Notes and Packaging Details for Client Access Notes About 5769-SS1, OS/400 Note: The system must be in a restricted state to install the QGPL and QUSRSYS libriaries, and to install Option 12 (Host Serers) SS1, OS/400 Option 1: This option installs automatically when you install the new release of OS/400. You cannot delete this option SS1, OS/400 Option 3: This option installs automatically when you install the new release of OS/400. This option contains IFS directories. You cannot delete this option SS1, OS/400 Option 20: Option 20 for Adanced 36 was remoed. At V4R5M0, you cannot use Adanced 36 guest machines to run System Support Programs (SSP). You must migrate your SSP guests to System/36 Enironment or to natie OS/400 prior to upgrading to this release. You can use normal SSP utilities to sae libraries, files, and folders from the SSP to tape or diskette. Then the AS/400 Migration Assistant can be used to restore the libraries, files, and folders to the System/36 Enironment on OS/400. The following information describes this process in greater detail: Informational authorized program analysis report (APAR) II09900 SC OS/400 System/36 Migration Assistant V3R6 SC System/36 Migration Planning V3R SS1, OS/400 Option 24: Option 24 has been remoed SS1, OS/400 Option 28: Flowmark has been remoed SS1, OS/400 Option 29: Option 29 (Integration for Windows NT Serer) was remoed. V4R5M0 does not support this Option. It is now a no-charge licensed program 5769-WSV, Integration for Windows Serer SS1, OS/400 Option 34: Digital Certificate Manager installs oer 5769-NC1 or 5769-NCE. 176 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

195 Notes About Other Licensed Programs 5769-AS1, WebSphere Application Serer: 5769-AS1, WebSphere Application Serer, will be automatically installed during your V4R5M0 release upgrade, when you hae 5769-TC1, TCP/IP Utilities, already installed on the system CX2, ILE C for AS/400: Option 1 function is now included in the 5769-CX2 base product. If you hae option 1 installed, it will be deleted when the 5769-CX2 base product is installed JV1, AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa: Option 3 and Option 4 are new for this release. If you hae 5769JV1 installed and you are upgrading only your installed products, then option 4 will install along with the base product. Option 3 is aailable, but you must install it through Chapter 10. Installing Additional Licensed Programs on page MG1, Managed System Serices for AS/400: You should use the ENDMGDSYS and ENDMGRSRV commands to end the product before performing any sae, restore, or install functions. The system must be in a restricted state to install this licensed program PM1, Performance Management/400 and 5769-PT1, Performance Tools for AS/400: If you hae performance data on your system, which was collected prior to performing the new release installation, run the Conert Performance Data (CVTPRFDTA) command. This conerts the collected data to a format usable by the new release. For instructions to conert the data, refer to the section below, Conerting the performance data on page xx-SA3, Integration for NetWare, and 57xx-XZ1, OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/400: The system deletes these products when you upgrade from V4R4M0 to V4R5M0. You must migrate to an alternatie product before the end of serice dates for these products: Integration for NetWare (57xx-SA3) OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/400 (57xx-XZ1) Refer to Noell s Support Life Cycle Product Forecast for information regarding their end of support dates for Noell NetWare 4.1 at the Internet: You can use alternatie products, AS/400 Netserer (SMB) or AS/400 Integrated PC Serer with Windows NT. You may also choose to migrate to an external PC serer. For more information about AS/400 and Netware, refer to: SM1, System Manager for AS/400: If you hae this product installed, be sure to end all subsystems before you replace the product or install secondary languages TC1, TCP/IP Utilities: 5769-AS1, WebSphere Application Serer, will be automatically installed during your V4R5M0 release upgrade, when you hae 5769-TC1, TCP/IP Utilities, already installed on the system. V4R5M0 does not support the following list of licensed programs: 5769-VW3 Visual Warehouse 5769-SV3 ADSTAR Distributed Storage Manager (ADSM) Appendix C. Licensed Program Information 177

196 5769-DP2 IBM DataPropagator Relational 5.1 for AS/ CP4 CallPath Serer/ C69, which deliers the same code (CallPath), replaces this SVA NetFinity Serer for AS/ SVD NetFinity AS/400 Manager for OS/ SVE NetFinity AS/400 Manager for Windows NC5 NetQuestion for AS/ CL1 Application Deelopment ToolSet Client Serer for AS/ CX4 IBM Visual Age C++ for OS/400 Conerting the performance data If you use one of the following licensed programs and if you collected data prior to installing your new release, use the instructions below. This will conert the data into a format that is readable by the new release PM1, Performance Management/ PT1, Performance Tools for AS/ Sign on as QSECOFR. 2. Type: ENDSBS Q1PGSCH *IMMED, and press Enter. 3. Type: WRKSBS, and press Enter. 4. Look for the Q1PGSCH subsystem. If it is still actie, press F5 to refresh the display until it is gone. 5. If upgrading Performance Management/400 from a prior release in which data was collected, you must clear or conert the data in the collection library. 6. Type: GO QMPGLIB/PM400, and press Enter. 7. Select option 6. Note the data collection library (usually QMPGDATA). Press F12 until you return to the AS/400 Main Menu. 8. To clear the library, type: CLRLIB xxxxx, where xxxxx is the data collection library. Press Enter. 9. To conert the data, type: CVTPFRDTA. 10. Press F4 to prompt. Use the AS/400 help instructions to complete this task. Consider the size of the performance data library. Does the system hae sufficient space to accommodate another library of that size? 11. Type: CFGPM400, press Enter. 12. Answer the questions: Send performance data to IBM? *YES Receie performance data? *NO Performance data library? QMPGDATA (Library from step 7) 13. Press Enter. 14. You will receie a screen listing the Performance Management/400 communication objects and whether they are found on the system. Press F6 to create them without regard to their current status. 15. Fill in the customer contact information, paging down as necessary. When complete, press Enter. 16. Type: CALL QESPHONE, and press Enter. 17. Determine the connection number prefix found in the New Value field (for example, SST9:). 18. Type: GO QMPGLIB/PM400, and press Enter. 178 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

197 19. Select option 6, Work with Performance Management/400 Customization. 20. Press the PgDn key. If the prefix to the IBM PM/400 phone number matches the one found in step 17, you need not make any changes. Howeer, for IBM modems there should at least be a prefix of colon (:), een if you do not use a prefix for electronic customer support. Otherwise, add in the prefix from step 17, but leae the number as Check for V4R5M0 Performance Management/400 program temporary fixes (PTF) at this Internet location: Notes and Packaging Details for Client Access Corresponding with the aailability of V4R1M0, the Client Access family of products was repackaged. Table 39 shows how the old and new packaging corresponds. Table 39. Client Access repackaging information Preious Packaging Preious Packaging 1,2 Current Packaging 1,2 57xx-XA1 Contained 57xx-XY1 Contained 6 57xx-XW1 Contains -XB1 -XB1 -XC1 -XC1 -XD1 -XD1 5 -XF1 -XG1 -XL1 -XF1 -XG1 -XL1 -XE1 4 -XK1 3 Notes: 1. When you ordered the new software release, you probably determined which of the clients you are using. If you hae 57xx-XA1 installed, you should receie 5769-XW1. 2. During installation, 57xx-XA1 is always deleted during procedures that replace a release of the operating system. If the installation media contains 5769-XW1, the product is installed XK1 is not automatically installed. If you use the Prepare for Install option on the Work with Licensed Programs menu, you can create a customized installation list that will cause 5763-XK1 to install with your automatic installation process xx-XE1 was introduced in V4R4M0. It is packaged in 5769-XW1 for V4R2M0, V4R3M0, and V4R4M0. Howeer, it does not automatically install for V4R2M0 and V4R3M0. You need to use the procedure to install additional licensed programs to install this product for those two releases xx-XD1 does not automatically install with V4R4M0. Beginning with V4R4M0, you can get 5763-XD1 only by ordering the 5769-XW1 family. 6. Beginning March 25, 2000 you can no longer purchase (from IBM Marketing) 57xx-XY1 and its related products for any release. 57xx-XW1 Client Access: The result you get when you replace this licensed program can ary with the installation process you use. It also aries with the leel Appendix C. Licensed Program Information 179

198 of each licensed program that you hae installed. Be certain that you understand the information in Mixed Release Support-Oeriew on page XD1, Client Access for Windows 95/NT: This product uses a serice strategy. The administrator needs to make sure that eery workstation runs the Check Serice Pack Leel function instead of the update function. The update function in Windows 95/NT is only for end-user applications. If you are starting with V3R1M3, you can control when the Check Serice Pack Leel runs using the Serice Property Page. For more information about this function, see Client Access for Windows 95/NT - Setup, SC XE1, Client Access Express for Windows 95/98/NT: This product uses a serice pack strategy. The administrator needs to make sure that eery workstation runs the Check Serice Pack Leel functions instead of the update function. For more information about this function, refer to Client Access Express for Windows - Setup, SC V4R5M0 does not support the following list of Client Access products: 5769-XY1, IBM AS/400 Client Access Family 5763-XF1, IBM AS/400 Client Access for OS/ XL1, IBM AS/400 Client Access for DOS 5763-XB1, IBM AS/400 Client Access for DOS with Extended Memory 5763-XC1, IBM AS/400 Client Access for Windows XG1, IBM AS/400 Client Access Optimized for OS/2 How to Remoe Licensed Programs The following information should help you determine if you should delete an unwanted part of a licensed program. For example, some licensed programs hae requirements that certain parts of OS/400 be installed. These requirements are not always apparent. You can use the procedures in this topic to delete the parts of licensed programs you hae determined you do not need. Determining What Unused Parts of Products to Delete Depending on your business needs, you might be able to delete some of the optional parts of the licensed programs that are shown in Table 40 on page 182. (Table 40 shows V4R5M0 product identifiers, but the information in the table applies to deleting unwanted parts either before or after installing the new release of software.) For example, you can delete the licensed programs for any clients (DOS, DOS with Extended Memory, Windows** 3.1, or OS/2) that you do not use. Deleting unwanted licensed programs or optional parts will gie you more DASD for your business needs. Note: Before deleting anything, read the following: If you do not hae the original or a current copy of OS/400 software distribution media, make sure that you first sae the affected licensed program. Type GO LICPGM on the AS/400 command line and select option 13 (Sae licensed programs). You will need extra tapes for this sae operation. To sae these licensed programs to tape can take seeral hours. At a later time, if you need any of the licensed programs or deleted optional parts, you can install them from these tapes. To install them, use GO LICPGM and select option AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

199 (Install licensed programs), or use a customized installation list. See Creating and Customizing an Installation List on page 40 for more information. System back-up tapes ship with some systems. These back-up tapes are not the same as software distribution media. While you can use software distribution media to reinstall indiidual licensed programs or optional parts, you cannot use system back-up tapes. If you cannot locate or your system did not ship with the original installation media, you must sae the licensed programs and optional parts before you delete them. You will need the saed copy, if you need to restore the licensed programs or optional parts at a future time. Use Table 40 on page 182, and Licensed Programs-Installation Notes on page 176, and the following keys to help you determine which programs or optional parts you might want to delete. Keys for Table 40 on page 182: a b c d e f g h i j k l p q r s You cannot delete the entire OS/400 operating system. You can delete optional parts, but you cannot delete OS/400 option 1 or option 3. It is recommended that you do not delete this part. Delete this optional part if you are not migrating from a System/36 or System/38 to this AS/400. Delete this optional part if you are running only AS/400 applications. This optional part is needed only by software deelopers. Do not delete this optional part if you are using the Print Serices Facility/400 (see optional part number 17 in this table). Delete this part if you do not need to compile CL programs for a preious release. This option is a separately orderable feature. Do not delete this part if you hae applications using Ultimedia System Facilities. Do not delete if you are using Client Access products. If you are not using this specific client, you can delete the complete licensed program for that client. If you are using this specific client, do not delete the base option. This optional part contains sample programs, migration tools, and debug tools. You should delete this optional part only after you download any tools used by your installation. If you delete this optional part, you must first remoe QHLPSYS from the system library list. Refer to note 2 on page 183 for more information. You may delete these, if you are not using them. To preent the problem of not getting Application Program Drier for AS/400 (APD) conerted for use with PowerPC technology and redoing all APD work, IBM strongly adises you to configure APD to disable the Simplified Sign-on Panel. Perform the following steps to disable the Simplified Sign-on Panel and enable the Standard Sign-on Panel. Sign-on with a user ID that has authority identical to QSECOFR and enter STRAPD: 1. Select 1. Application Program Drier Appendix C. Licensed Program Information 181

200 2. Select 2. Install and Delete Applications 3. Select 6. Install the Standard Sign-on Panel After following these steps, the Standard Sign-on Panel will be actie. You can sae your data and begin the migration. Table 40. Deleting Unwanted Licensed Programs and Optional Parts After the Installation Is Complete Keys a Licensed Program and Optionally Installable Product Part 5769-SS1 OS/400 Number for Product Option a Extended Base Support 1 q OS/400 Online Information (Online help information) 2 a Extended Base Directory Support 3 c OS/400 System/36 and System/38 Migration 4 d OS/400 System/36 and System/38 Enironment 5 and 6 e OS/400 Example Tools Library 7 f OS/400 AFP Compatibility Fonts 8 g OS/400 *PRV CL Compiler Support 9 c OS/400 System/36 Migration Assistant 11 b, j OS/400 Host Serers 12 e OS/400 Openness Includes 13 r OS/400 GDDM 14 h OS/400 Common Programming APIs Toolkit 15 i OS/400 Ultimedia System Facilities 16 h OS/400 Print Serices Facility/ h OS/400 Media and Storage Extensions 18 r OS/400 optional parts 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, and j 57xx-XW1 Client Access Family Base p Client Access - PC Tools Folder 1 k 5769-XD1 Client Access for Windows 95/NT Base k 5769-XE1 Client Access Express for Windows 95/98/NT Base k 5769-XK1 Client Access Enhanced for Windows 3.1 Base l Client Access - Win 3.1 SBCS 1 l Client Access - Win 3.1 DBCS 2 l Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Korean 3 l Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Traditional Chinese 4 l Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Simplified Chinese 5 s 5769-PD1 Application Program Drier for AS/400 Base Notes About Deleting Licensed Programs Notes: 1. Do not attempt to use the DLTLIB command to remoe a licensed program or optional part of a licensed program from the system. Some licensed programs copy objects into other libraries; the DLTLIB command will not delete the 182 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

201 duplicated objects. Using the DLTLIB command to delete a licensed program or optional part could leae the licensed program in a partially installed condition. For a list of IBM-supplied libraries, that are organized by licensed program, see Appendix D of the book CL Programming, SC If you are unable to delete a licensed program, it may be because the library for the licensed program exists in one of the library lists. Use the WRKSYSVAL command to check both the system library and the user library lists. When the Work with System Values display appears, type a 5 next to the QSYSLIBL and QUSRLIBL system alues to display the associated libraries. If the library for the licensed program is listed on this display, press Enter to return to the Work with System Values display. Then type a 2 to change the system alue. When the Change System Value display appears, use the spacebar to remoe that licensed program library from the library list. You will be able to delete your licensed program after your next IPL. 3. When V3R1M0 or higher release is installed and your system is at security leel 40 or 50, you cannot delete some products from a preious release leel. Message CPD0176 appears if the system security leel is 50, and a product earlier than V2R3 has exit programs that do not work at leel 50. After V3R1M0 or higher release is installed, you must change the security leel to 30 to delete the products. Then, change the security leel back to 40 or 50. Procedures for Deleting Licensed Programs To remoe licensed programs, 1. Type: ENDSBS *IMMED, and press Enter. 2. Type: GO LICPGM, and press Enter. The Work with Licensed Programs menu appears. 3. Select option 12 (Delete licensed programs). The Delete Licensed Programs display appears. 4. Type 4 (Delete) in the Option column in front of each licensed program that you want to delete. Page down to display additional licensed programs Note: If you select the base part of a licensed program that has optional parts, all the optional parts are also deleted. If you select only an optional part, the base and any other parts remain on your system. Press Enter. You are shown the Confirm Delete of Licensed Programs display. Press Enter if your selections are correct. Press F12 to make corrections. You receie confirmation messages from the system when the licensed programs are deleted. Press F12 to return to the Work with Licensed Programs menu. Appendix C. Licensed Program Information 183

202 184 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

203 Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time It is difficult to accurately estimate the amount of time needed to install a new release of software. Many ariables combine to create a unique set of circumstances for each system. This appendix helps you estimate the time that you need to install your new release. This appendix does the following: Lists common ways to estimate installation time and describes the installation process Describes conditions that affect the performance of the installation process Lists the types of products that are installed when you replace a release of software Proides a checklist and work sheets for determining an estimate that reflects your system and software enironment. Common Methods of Estimating Installation Time Types of Products Installed The following list contains the most common methods of estimating your installation time. Base your estimate on the installation time of a preious release. If the system configuration and load remain similar, you can use the installation time of a preious release on this system as the start of your estimate. If you rely on only the installation time of the preious release, your estimate may not be accurate. This method may not be accurate if many data conersions occur during the installation process. If you are skipping a release leel, generally the time is longer. Be sure to add information for conersions that occur in the release you are skipping and for the new release. Base your estimate on the installation time for a similar system. If your enterprise has multiple systems, you can record the actual time to install the new release on one system. You can use this to estimate the time that is needed to install the new release on a system with a similar configuration and load. Of course, you cannot use this method until you complete the installation on the first system. Estimate time using a formula. You can use the information in the following sections to estimate how long it will take to install this release on your system. Keep in mind that the number at which you arrie will ary from your actual installation time because of the ariables that affect installation time. Combine one or more of the methods that are listed aboe. A new release consists of these parts, installed in the following order: 1. Licensed Internal Code 2. Operating system 3. Licensed programs and optional parts For installation purposes, the IBM-supplied libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS and the optional parts of the operating system are considered licensed programs. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

204 Estimating Installation Time Installation Processes The system determines the installation process based on aailable system resources and the type of product being installed. A single-process installation is when licensed programs are installed one at a time (sequentially). A multiprocess installation is when the system starts multiple jobs to perform the installation of two or more licensed programs at the same time. Licensed Internal Code and the base part of the operating system are always installed using single-process installation. Licensed programs (including libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS and optional parts of the operating system) can be installed using either single-process or multiprocess installation. If you are installing only one licensed program, the system uses single-process installation. If you are installing more than one licensed program, multiprocess is used if system resources are aailable. If system resources are not aailable, single-process is used. Single-process is used when a system s main storage or auxiliary storage is limited, and when a licensed program exceeds the requirements for multiprocess installation. For any set of licensed programs, if the system must use single-process, the installation takes longer. Multiprocess Installation Oeriew describes the system requirements necessary for multiprocess installation. Tip: Think of multiprocess installation as meaning installing multiple licensed programs. When replacing a release of software, your choice of the manual or automatic methods has no effect on whether the system uses single-process or multiprocess installation. Conditions that Affect Installation Time The amount of time it takes to install the licensed programs depends on your system configuration and the licensed programs you are installing. That is, the larger models with more system capacity hae a shorter installation time than smaller models loading the same licensed programs. The major factors that affect installation performance are: Installation deice Number and type of disk unit I/O processors Processing unit capacity Disk unit space aailable Main storage aailable in base pool Human interaction User data conersions Licensed programs to be installed Multiprocess Installation Oeriew The operating system determines if your system configuration has enough system capacity to use multiprocess to install licensed programs. If your system has the required resources, the licensed programs are installed concurrently by: 186 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

205 Estimating Installation Time Loading the licensed program installation files from the media to temporary sae files. Using multiple batch jobs to concurrently install licensed programs from the sae files. The sae files are deleted during the installation process. During installation, a status panel indicates the licensed programs that are currently being installed from sae files. The display lists the licensed programs and the type of item being installed for each, as follows: *PGM program objects *LNG language objects If your system does not hae the required resources for multiprocess, the licensed programs are installed sequentially from the installation media (single-process). In this case, the status panel indicates the licensed program that is currently being installed from the media. Additional Requirements for Multiprocess To use the multiprocess installation for licensed programs, the system requires the following: 1. You must select more than one licensed program to install from the installation media (this includes IBM-supplied libraries and operating system options). If you are only installing one new licensed program and choose option 11 (Install licensed programs), the system uses the single-process installation to install the licensed program. 2. A multiprocess installation cannot currently be in progress. If another job is currently performing a multiprocess installation, the system uses the single-process installation to install your licensed programs from a different tape deice. 3. You must hae at least 11 megabytes of aailable auxiliary storage on your system. If you do not, the system uses single-process to install the licensed programs. The licensed programs that require the system to hae more than 11 megabytes of additional auxiliary storage are shown in the Multiprocess Storage column of Table 43 on page You must hae at least 1536 KB (kilobytes) of main storage aailable in the base storage pool of the system. The system requires 512K in the system base pool for each of the first three installing jobs. The first job that is started loads the media files into sae files. After the requirements for the first three jobs are met, each additional job requires an additional 1024K in the base pool. Therefore, the larger the base pool, the greater number of installation jobs that can be started. This results in a faster installation. If you are using the automatic installation process, or are installing the licensed programs with all subsystems ended, you only need to erify the auxiliary storage and main storage requirements. See the book Work Management, SC , for procedures to change these alues if they do not meet the criteria for multiprocess installation. If you do not hae the required resources to enable the system to use multiprocess installation, the installation of licensed programs may take significantly longer than a multiprocess installation. The time difference between the single-process installation and the multiprocess installation depends on your system configuration and the licensed programs to be installed. Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 187

206 Estimating Installation Time How to Determine Additional Storage for Multiprocess-Scenario Compare the list of licensed programs that you plan to install with the Multiprocess Storage column of Table 43 on page 197. Licensed programs install as two types of objects: Program objects (*PGM) and language objects (*LNG). If any licensed program that you plan to install shows a alue for either object type in Table 43, that object requires that the system hae more auxiliary storage. More storage is required before the object can be installed with the multiprocess method. You can calculate the amount of additional auxiliary storage space the system needs for multiprocess installation. 1. Determine which licensed programs or optional parts that you plan to install hae alues in the Multiprocess Storage column of Table Note: Options 1 and 3 of OS/400 and the IBM-supplied libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS are always installed when you are replacing a release of software. Determine which two licensed programs (or optional parts) from step 1 hae the highest alues. Add the sizes of the two largest entries. Add 10 to the sum from step 2. This is the total amount of additional storage, in megabytes, that the system needs to use multiprocess installation for the licensed programs that you plan to install. For example, you are replacing your release with V4R5M0 and plan to install OS/400 with options 1, 2, 3, and 12, plus Client Access for Windows 3.1 with option 1. You would need to hae 68.9 megabytes of additional auxiliary storage ( ) for the system to use multiprocess installation for all these products. (QUSRSYS is automatically selected when you replace a release so you need to account for it in your calculations.) Another example could be that you decide to add additional licensed programs to your existing V4R5M0 system. One of the products you selected, Adanced Function Printing DBCS Fonts for AS/400 (5769-FN1), is listed in the Multiprocess Storage column of Table 43. You would need megabytes of additional auxiliary storage ( ) for the system to use multiprocess installation. This would install the base and options 1 through 5 of Adanced Function Printing DBCS Fonts for AS/400. Checklist for Estimating Installation Time 188 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 The following information is proided to assist you in estimating the approximate installation time of this release on your system. Use the checklist below as a guide. The checklist refers you to other information or work sheets to obtain alues. The checklist assumes that you are not changing the primary language of your system. The estimate you arrie at using this checklist is based on the assumption that your system must perform a single-process installation; if your system is able to use multiprocess installation, your time will be less. Note: The checklist and supporting work sheets do not include the amount of time that is spent on loading of next olumes, media errors, or recoery procedures. User data is not included. The time needed for INZSYS to complete is also not included. Do the following to estimate your total installation time.

207 1. Estimate the amount of time you need to sae your system before you install the new release. Time for saing the system depends on how much storage you hae and what percentage of the storage you are using. Use the amount of time from the last backup of your system. Time: 2. Estimate the amount of time to replace Licensed Internal Code. Allow 30 minutes for smaller systems. Time: 3. Use Table 41 on page 190 to estimate the amount of time to replace OS/ Time: Consider the time required for your system to perform an IPL. If your system takes more than 20 minutes to perform an IPL, include the amount of time that exceeds 20 minutes. For example, if your system takes 45 minutes to perform an IPL, enter the difference of 25 minutes for the time (45-20 = 25). Time: Use Work Sheet 1. Licensed Programs on page 192 to estimate the time to install licensed programs. Be sure to include all the licensed programs and optional parts that you intend to install. This time assumes that the system is single-process installing licensed programs. Time: Determine the amount of time required to install the cumulatie PTF package. Use the timing information in the AS/400 System PTF Shipping Information Letter. Time: Add time to conert database cross reference files. Go to 1b on page 205 to determine if you need to add time. If necessary, use Database Cross Reference Files on page 205 to estimate how much time to add. Time: Add time for saing your system after the install. Be aware that data conersions can occur during the sae operation that could increase the time needed for saing your system. Time: Add time for any extra clean-up work and to re-customize your system. If you plan to use the softcopy library as part of your installation, include time for this actiity. Time: The total of these steps is your total estimated time for installing your new release. Estimated Time: Estimates for the Operating System Estimating Installation Time Installation time is influenced by two primary factors; the speed of the processor model and the speed of the optical deice. The speed of the processor model determines how fast installation processing occurs. The speed of the installation deice determines how fast data is retrieed from the media. Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 189

208 Estimating Installation Time Table 41. Estimated Installation Time for Base OS/400, in Minutes Adanced Systems and Serers Model Processor Time AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

209 Table 41. Estimated Installation Time for Base OS/400, in Minutes (continued) Adanced Systems and Serers Model Processor Time SB SB S 50S 53S S Estimating Installation Time Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 191

210 Estimating Installation Time Table 41. Estimated Installation Time for Base OS/400, in Minutes (continued) Adanced Systems and Serers Model Processor Time S20 S30 S Note: These installation times are based on using optical installation media. If you install from tape (such as a distribution tape created by a central site), these numbers are not alid. The speed of the optical drie is 600 kilobytes per second, which is the same rate as the 6390 tape drie (8mm). The next closest tape speed is 300 kilobytes per second for the 6380 tape drie (1/4 inch). Work Sheet 1. Licensed Programs This work sheet helps you estimate the maximum amount of time that is needed to install licensed programs. The size and complexity of a licensed program are primary factors that determine the installation time required. The time needed is also influenced by the speed of the processor, the speed of the media deice used, and which installation process the system is able to use. Note: This work sheet determines an estimate for the single-process installation time for your selected licensed programs. This proides the maximum expected time for installing licensed programs. Since the system attempts to perform a multiprocess installation wheneer possible, your actual time AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

211 Estimating Installation Time should be somewhat less than the alue you arrie at by using this work sheet. Because of the unique combination of conditions affecting installation time for your system, it is not possible to proide meaningful estimates for multiprocess installation. Determine the total base time for the licensed programs that you are replacing. a. Identify the licensed programs and optional parts that are currently installed on your system and that you plan to replace. Note: If you are replacing all IBM supplied software, be sure to include alues for OS/400 option 1 and IBM supplied libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS. b. For the licensed programs and optional parts that you identified, add the alues shown in the Base Value A column of Table 43 on page 197. The sum is your base time in minutes for replaced licensed programs. Write this sum here. Replacing: Determine the total base time for the licensed programs and optional parts that you are adding to your system for the first time. a. Identify the licensed programs and optional parts that you are adding to your system. If you hae erified your media and created a customized installation list, use the printout from Creating and Customizing an Installation List on page 40 to identify the products. Note: If you are installing a new AS/400, include all the licensed programs and optional parts that you plan to install. Be sure to include alues for OS/400 option 1 and IBM supplied libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS. b. For the licensed programs and optional parts that you identified, add the alues shown in the Base Value B column of Table 43 on page 197. The sum is your base time in minutes for added licensed programs. Write this sum here. Adding: 3. Add the base alues shown in steps 1 and 2. Sum: Use Table 42 on page 194 to determine the multiplication factor to use for your model and processor. Write the alue here. Multiply by: Multiply the time shown in step 3 by the alue in step 4. The result is your estimated maximum alue for installing licensed programs (in minutes). Use this alue for the licensed program installation time in step 5 of the Checklist for Estimating Installation Time on page 188. Total Estimate: Note: The estimated time that you determine with this work sheet is for a single-process installation. Expect some ariation in the alue you determine for the licensed programs you estimated in step 5. The optical deice is the only alid installation deice. These alues are not accurate if you install from tape, such as for distribution tapes created by a central site. The speed of the optical drie is 600 kilobytes per second, which is the same rate as the 6390 tape drie (8mm). The next closest tape speed is 300 kilobytes per second for the 6380 tape drie (1/4 inch). Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 193

212 Estimating Installation Time Table 42. Estimating Licensed Program Installation Time: Multiplication Factor Model Processor Multiplication Factor for Licensed Programs 194 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

213 Table 42. Estimating Licensed Program Installation Time: Multiplication Factor (continued) Model SB Processor SB S 50S 53S S Estimating Installation Time Multiplication Factor for Licensed Programs Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 195

214 Estimating Installation Time Table 42. Estimating Licensed Program Installation Time: Multiplication Factor (continued) Model S20 S30 S Licensed Program Times Processor Multiplication Factor for Licensed Programs Table 43 on page 197 will help you determine the maximum time that you need to install licensed programs. Table 43 shows the base alues to use for time calculations and factors that influence your calculations. Note: The maximum installation time alues that you calculate assumes that the system uses single-process installation. For most licensed programs, the system uses multiprocess installation. Because multiprocess installation has many ariables that are unique to each system, the time for multiprocess installation is irtually unpredictable using Table 43 on page 197 and Work Sheet 1. Licensed Programs on page 192. Consider the time you arrie at using this information as your worst-case installation time. Multiplication Values are base alues used to calculate the installation time for the licensed programs and options you plan to install. The base alue is not the installation time. You must use this alue with the information proided in Table 42 on page AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

215 Estimating Installation Time Base Value A Use this base alue for the licensed programs that you are replacing as part of an upgrade. Base Value B Use this base alue for the licensed programs that you are adding to an existing system after an upgrade. Factors Influencing Installation Time indicate which licensed programs or optional parts may be affected by additional factors. Characteristics of the licensed programs being installed can sometimes cause a significant impact on your installation time. Table 43 indicates which licensed programs and options may cause your installation to run longer. Multiprocess Storage If the size of a licensed program exceeds the 11MB of auxiliary storage that the system uses for multiprocess installation, the licensed program is installed with the single-process method. Values shown in this column (either *PGM or *LNG) indicate which part of the licensed program requires additional storage for multiprocess installation. Multiprocess Installation Oeriew on page 186 describes multiprocess installation. A dash indicates the product will multiprocess install within the system s standard settings. Documents and Folders Licensed programs and optional parts with documents or folders can take longer to install. Yes indicates these products hae documents or folders. Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Base Value Base Value Multiprocess Storage(2) Documents Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG and Folders(3) Licensed Internal Code NA NA NA NA NA 5769-SS1 Base Operating System/400 NA NA NA NA NA Library OS/400 Library QGPL Library OS/400 Library QUSRSYS OS/400 Extended Base Support Yes 2 OS/400 Online Information OS/400-Extended Base Directory Support 4 OS/400 S/36 and S/38 Migration OS/400 System/36 Enironment OS/400 System/38 Enironment OS/400 Example Tools Library OS/400 AFP* Compatibility Fonts NA 9 OS/400 *PRV CL Compiler Support 11 OS/400 S/36 Migration Assistant OS/400 Host Serers Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 197

216 Estimating Installation Time Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Base Value Base Value Multiprocess Storage(2) Documents Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG and Folders(3) 13 OS/400 Openness Includes NA 14 OS/400 GDDM OS/400 Common Programming APIs Toolkit 16 OS/400 Ultimedia System Yes Facilities 17 OS/400 Print Serices Facility/ NA 18 OS/400 Media and Storage Yes Extensions 21 OS/400 Extended NLS Support OS/400 ObjectConnect OS/400-OptiConnect OS/400-NetWare Enhanced Integration 26 OS/400-DB2 UDB Symmetric Multiprocessing 27 OS/400-DB2 Multisystem OS/400 - QShell Interpreter OS/400 - Domain Name System OS/400 - Directory Serices OS/400 - Priate Address Space Enironment 34 OS/400 - Digital Certificate Manager 35 OS/400 - Cryptographic Serices Proider 36 OS/400 - PSF/ IPM Printer Support 37 OS/400 - PSF/ IPM Printer Support 38 OS/400 - PSF/400 Any Speed IPM Printer Support 5769-AC1 Base Cryptographic Access Proider bit 5769-AC2 Base Cryptographic Access Proider bit 5769-AC3 Base Cryptographic Access Proider bit 5769-AF1 198 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

217 Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Multiprocess Storage(2) Base Value Base Value Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG Base AFP Utilities for AS/ AP1 Base NA NA Adanced DBCS Printer Support for AS/400 1 Ad DBCS Printer Support for NA NA OS/400 - IPDS 5769-AS1 Base Websphere Application Serer BR1 Base Backup Recoery and Media Serices for AS/400 1 BRMS/400 - Network Feature BRMS/400 - Adanced Functions Feature 5769-CB1 Base ILE COBOL for AS/ ILE COBOL - System/36-compatible COBOL for AS/ ILE COBOL - System/38-compatible COBOL for AS/ ILE COBOL - OPM COBOL for AS/400 6 ILE COBOL - *PRV ILE COBOL for AS/ CE1 Base Client Encryption (40-bit) CE2 Base Client Encryption (56-bit) CE3 Base Client Encryption (128-bit) CF1 Base Retail Application Interface Suite Point-of-Sale Utility for AS/ CL2 Base Application Deelopment ToolSet Client Serer for AS/400 (for Windows 95/98/NT) CoOperatie Deelopment Enironment 2 VisualAge RPG for Windows Estimating Installation Time Documents and Folders(3) Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 199

218 Estimating Installation Time Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Base Value Base Value Multiprocess Storage(2) Documents Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG and Folders(3) 5769-CM1 Base Communications Utilities for AS/ CR1 Base Cryptographic Support for AS/ CX2 Base ILE C for AS/ CX5 Base VisualAge for C++ for AS/ VisualAge C++ for Windows /NT Client 5769-DB1 Base System/38 Utilities for AS/ DCT Base Language Dictionaries for AS/ Afrikaans Dictionary NA - 2 Dutch Modern Dictionary NA - 3 Brazilian Portuguese Dictionary NA - 4 Catalan Dictionary NA 5 Danish Dictionary NA 6 German Dictionary NA 7 Swiss German Dictionary NA 8 Spanish Dictionary NA 9 French National Dictionary NA 10 French Canadian Dictionary NA 11 Greek Dictionary NA 12 Icelandic Dictionary NA 13 Italian Dictionary NA 14 US Legal Dictionary NA 15 US Medical Dictionary NA 16 Dutch Dictionary NA 17 Norwegian Dictionary NA 18 Norwegian Nynorsk Dictionary NA 19 Portuguese Dictionary NA 20 Finnish Dictionary NA 21 Swedish Dictionary NA 22 UK English Dictionary NA 23 US English Dictionary NA 200 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

219 Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Multiprocess Storage(2) Base Value Base Value Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG 24 Russian Dictionary NA 5769-DC1 Base DCE Base Serices for AS/ DC3 Base DCE DES Library Routines for AS/400 Estimating Installation Time 5769-DFH Base CICS for AS/ CICS for AS/400 - Sample Applications 5769-DG1 Base HTTP Serer for AS/ DP3 Base DataPropagator Relational 7.0 for AS/ DS1 Base Business Graphics Utility for AS/ FNT Base Adanced Function Printing Fonts for AS/400 1 AS/400 Font Sonoran Serif NA 2 AS/400 Font Sonoran Serif NA Headliner 3 AS/400 Font Sonoran Sans Serif NA 4 AS/400 Font Sonoran Sans Serif NA Headliner 5 AS/400 Font Sonoran Sans Serif NA Condensed 6 AS/400 Font Sonoran Sans Serif NA Expanded 7 AS/400 Font Monotype NA Garamond** 8 AS/400 Font Century NA Schoolbook** 9 AS/400 Font Pi and Specials NA 10 AS/400 Font ITC Souenir** NA 11 AS/400 Font ITC Aant Garde NA Gothic** 12 AS/400 Font Math and Science NA 13 AS/400 Font DATA NA Documents and Folders(3) Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 201

220 Estimating Installation Time Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Multiprocess Storage(2) Base Value Base Value Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG 14 AS/400 Font APL2* NA 15 AS/400 Font OCR A and OCR B NA 5769-FN1 Base NA Adanced Function Printing DBCS Fonts for AS/400 1 AS/400 Font (DBCS) Japanese NA 2 AS/400 Font (DBCS) Korean NA 3 AS/400 Font (DBCS) Traditional NA Chinese 4 AS/400 Font (DBCS) Simplified NA Chinese 5 AS/400 Font (DBCS) Thai NA 5769-FW1 Base Firewall for AS/ JC1 Base AS/400 Toolbox for Jaa JS1 Base Job Scheduler for AS/ JV1 Base AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa Jaa Deeloper Kit Jaa Deeloper Kit LNT Base Domino/ Lotus Notes for Collaboration Domino Designer Domino Per Serer CAL MG1 Base Managed System Serices for AS/ MQ2 Base MQSeries for AS/ MQSeries for AS/400 - Samples NA 2 MQSeries for AS/400 - Admin Application 5769-PD1 Base Application Program Drier for AS/ PM1 Base Performance Management/ Documents and Folders(3) 202 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

221 Estimating Installation Time Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Base Value Base Value Multiprocess Storage(2) Documents Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG and Folders(3) 5769-PT1 Base Performance Tools for AS/ Performance Tools for AS/ Manager Feature 2 Performance Tools for AS/ Agent Feature 5769-PW1 Base Application Deelopment ToolSet for AS/400 - SEU 1 ADTS ADTS- App De Manager ADTS - AppDict Serices QU1 Base Query for AS/ RD1 Base OnDemand for AS/ OnDemand/400 Spooled File Archie Feature 2 OnDemand/400 Object Archie Feature 3 OnDemand/400 Record Archie Feature 4 OnDemand for AS/400 AnyStore Feature 5 OnDemand Serer Feature OnDemand Client for Windows OnDemand Client for OS/ OnDemand Client for 32 bit Windows 9 OnDemand Serer Trial Feature RG1 Base ILE RPG for AS/ ILE RPG IBM System/36-Compatible RPG II 2 ILE RPG IBM System/38-Compatible RPG III 5 RPG for AS/ ILE RPG - *PRV ILE RPG SA2 Base Integration Serices for FSIOP Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 203

222 Estimating Installation Time Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Multiplication Values(1) Factors Influencing Installation Time Multiprocess Storage(2) Base Value Base Value Product or Option and Description A B *PGM *LNG 5769-SM1 Base System Manager for AS/ Yes 5769-ST1 Base TC1 Base 5716-VG1 Base DB2 Query Manager and SQL Deelopment Kit for AS/400 TCP/IP Connectiity Utilities for AS/400 VisualAge Generator Serer for AS/ VI1 Base VisualInfo for AS/ VisualInfo Library and Object Serer 2 VisualInfo Object Serer Base OfficeVision for AS/ OfficeVision - Text Search OfficeVision - Calendar OfficeVision - Mail OfficeVision - Editor WSV Base Windows Serer Windows NT Windows XD1 Base IBM AS/400 Client Access for Yes Windows 5769-XE1 Base IBM AS/400 Client Access Express for Windows 5763-XK1 Base Client Access Enhanced for Windows Client Access - Win 3.1 SBCS Client Access - Win3.1 DBCS Client Access - Win 3.1 PC Korean 4 Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Traditional Chinese Documents and Folders(3) 204 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

223 Estimating Installation Time Table 43. Licensed Program Time Information (continued) Product or Option and Description 5 Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Simplified Chinese 5769-XW1 Base AS/400 Client Access Family for Windows Multiplication Values(1) Base Value A Base Value B Factors Influencing Installation Time Multiprocess Storage(2) *PGM *LNG Documents and Folders(3) Notes: 1. Do not use only these alues for your time estimate; the result will not be accurate. Use Work Sheet 1. Licensed Programs on page 192 and the multiplication factors in Table 42 on page 194 to calculate the single-process installation time for the licensed programs you plan to install. 2. When a product has a numerical alue shown in this column, use the alue shown with the example within Additional Requirements for Multiprocess on page 187 to determine the extra storage required to use multiprocess installation. If no alue is shown, there is no additional storage requirement for multiprocess installation. 3. The products indicated can take longer to install. See Conditions that Affect Installation Time on page 186 for more information. Estimating Time for Conersions The number and type of conersions that occur when you install the new release can hae a significant affect on your installation time. Only the conersions that add to your installation time are discussed in the following paragraphs. More conersions occur if you are skipping a release leel. You need to consider the time for conersions in both the release you are skipping and in the new release. To estimate the time that conersions will take during your installation, you may need to gather information about specific object types on your system. Data Protection Mechanisms If your system uses mirroring or an implementation of a RAID-5 technique in the system ASP, your installation time can be longer. Mirroring and implementations of RAID-5 techniques do not affect the duration of saes. Database Cross Reference Files If your system has database cross reference files from an earlier release, these files will need to be conerted before you install the new release. Conerting these files may add some time to your installation process. Howeer, the conersion will enable faster access times for future database queries. Follow the procedure gien below to determine how much time you will need to complete the conersion of the cross reference files: 1. Determine if you hae any cross reference files. a. Type DSPFD QADBIFLD at the command line and press Enter. b. Record the number shown in the Current Number of Records field: Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 205

224 Estimating Installation Time If that number is zero, you do not need to add more time to your installation process. Otherwise, complete the steps below to estimate how much time the conersion will take. 2. Look up your system in the table that follows to find the applicable time factor. Table 44. Database Cross Reference Files Multiplication Factors Model Feature Code Time Factor AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

225 Estimating Installation Time Table 44. Database Cross Reference Files Multiplication Factors (continued) Model Feature Code Time Factor Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 207

226 Estimating Installation Time Table 44. Database Cross Reference Files Multiplication Factors (continued) Model Feature Code Time Factor SB SB S S S S S AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

227 Table 44. Database Cross Reference Files Multiplication Factors (continued) Model Feature Code Time Factor S S To estimate the time, in minutes, for the database cross reference file conersions, use the number from 1b on page 205 and the time factor from the table in this equation: Estimated Time = [(CRN x.0002) ]/Time Factor Note: CRN = Current number of records. For example, assume you hae a Model 510, with a feature number of The table shows a time factor of 3.1 for this model and feature number. You determined that the current number of records (CRN) in QADBIFLD is 53,254. The equation would be set up as follows: Estimated Time = [(53,253 x.0002) ] / 3.1 Estimating Installation Time In this example, it would take approximately 13.6 minutes to conert the database cross reference files on the system. Appendix D. Estimating Your Total Installation Time 209

228 210 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

229 Appendix E. Additional Installation Information Blank Displays This appendix contains information that may help you to streamline and to preent problems in your installation process. During the installation process, you can see some blank displays. Some of these are predictable and the instructions gie an approximate amount of time when there appears to be no installation actiity. Other blank displays are less predictable because of unique situations on your system. If the processor light is blinking or SRC codes are changing, the installation process is actie. If the processor light goes out, the attention light turns on, and an SRC code appears on the control panel, go to Appendix A. Recoery Procedures on page 147 and follow the instructions. System Password Installed status alues Support exists to detect processor model changes on all model AS/400 systems through the use of a 16-character system password. The system password identifies all model changes to help maintain the quality and integrity of the AS/400 system. The system password also ensures the protection of IBM s intellectual property, including IBM Licensed Internal Code and licensed programs. New systems will ship from the factory with the correct system password already installed. A new system password is required for each model change or for conditions that indicate probable change of ownership. If you do not hae the system password at the first IPL, contact your marketing representatie to place an AS/400 system password RPQ (Request for Price Quotation) order. IBM manufacturing receies the RPQ order and sends the system password to you for installation. If the correct system password is not entered, you can select a system password bypass period to allow you to obtain the correct system password from your marketing representatie. If the correct password is not aailable and the bypass period expires, the system will not complete the next IPL unless the correct password is installed. While in bypass mode, the system uses operator messages to indicate the time that remains until the bypass period expires. For more details on the system password, see the book Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC Here is a description of the installed status alues you may see on the LICPGM displays. You can use these alues to determine whether you can use a product or whether you may need to upgrade a licensed program. If you do not see a alue of *COMPATIBLE, you can check the other installed status alues for how to proceed. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

230 Additional Installation Information *COMPATIBLE The product is installed. Its ersion, release, and modification leel is compatible with the installed leel of the OS/400. You can use this program with the V4R5M0 OS/400. *INSTALLED The product is installed, but may or may not be compatible with the installed OS/400. It cannot be determined if the licensed program on the media is compatible with the OS/400 or with the currently installed licensed program. Note: Caution! Licensed programs that are now part of the single set will be listed on the display panel as *INSTALLED. You will need to erify that the release leel of the licensed program is compatible with the release leel of OS/400. For IBM products, check the current release leels for licensed programs in the Licensed Product Table on page 214. Or check with your software supplier before you use the licensed program. *ERROR The product has not installed successfully, or the product is only partially installed. Use the Check Product Option (CHKPRDOPT) command to determine the cause of the failure. Note: The product lists now show many products, such as Programming Request for Price Quotations (PRPQ), licensed program offerings (LPO), and non-ibm products. This *ERROR status may hae existed prior to the upgrade of V4R5M0, but was not detected. Use the CHKPRDOPT to find out why the product shows an *ERROR, and contact your software proider if you need help correcting the problem. *BACKLEVEL The product is installed. Its ersion, release, and modification leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install a current release of this product. And if you hae secondary languages, install a new release of these languages as well, using LICPGM menu option 21. Note: Caution! If you use a licensed program that is listed as *BACKLEVEL, you run the risk of haing an information mix up between release leels, or some portions of the licensed program may not work properly. An installed status alue of *COMPATIBLE is desired. *BKLVLOPT The product is installed. Its ersion, release, and modification leel is not compatible with the currently installed leel of the base product that is associated with the option. To correct this problem, install a current release of this option. *BKLVLBASE The product is installed, but its associated base product is not compatible with this option. To correct this problem, install a current release of the base product. Blank (on LICPGM menu, option 11) If no alue is shown, a blank in the installed status column means that the product is not installed. 212 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

231 Additional Installation Information *NOPRIMARY The product is installed, but the language for the product is not the same as the primary language of the OS/400. To correct this problem, install the primary language for the product by using the RSTLICPGM command or from the LICPGM menu. Note: If this product is an LPO, PRPQ or non-ibm product, it is possible that the licensed program (from the manufacturer) is not aailable in the primary language of the OS/400. The Media Description Report This report identifies the priced licensed programs that are contained on the distribution media olumes. It also helps you to identify the correct media olume to load. The Media Description Report contains the following information about licensed programs on the distribution media: Program name Copyright information Version, release, and modification leel Associated feature number Language feature Priced features of OS/400 The Media Description Report does not contain the following information: Information about keyed products on the locked media olume Entries for Licensed Internal Code Entries for base OS/400 Entries for keyed products Cumulatie PTF package Entries for no-charge options Note: For a listing of the keyed products on the locked set, refer to Table 20 on page 31. Many licensed programs, including OS/400, include optional parts with the base product for no additional charge. The no-charge options do not hae separate entries in the report. Some licensed programs, including OS/400, may also hae optional parts that are priced features. If you ordered priced features of licensed programs, you will see separate entries for these features in the report. Priced features hae the same program ID as their base product, but they hae a different feature number. The format of the report and the amount of detail included aries with the location that created the distribution media (North America, Europe, Asia). Some countries hae only one entry for each licensed program or priced feature included in the order. Others, including the U.S., may hae multiple entries that distinguish between the program and national language information of a licensed program. Appendix E. Additional Installation Information 213

232 Additional Installation Information Terminology Clarification: Software products hae unique 7-character identifiers. (For example, 5769-SS1 identifies the new release of Operating System/400.) As you erify your software media, you will see many names for this identifier. You might see them in the following places: Resource ID The Display Software Resources (DSPSFWRSC) command uses this name. Licensed Program ID The installation process uses this name. This appears on displays when you use the Work with Licensed Programs menu (LICPGM) or the related commands for saing, restoring, and deleting licensed programs. Program Number Some countries use this term in the Media Description Report. Base Program Some countries use this term in the Media Description Report. Licensed Product Table The products listed in this table are aailable at the V4R5M0 release. The VxRxMx listed for each program is compatible with the V4R5M0 OS/400 release. The products storage requirements (in megabytes) are also shown. Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description V4R5M (MB) Licensed Internal Code 5769AC1 *BASE V4R5M0 0.5 Cryptographic Access Proider 40-bit 5769AC2 *BASE V4R5M0 0.6 Cryptographic Access Proider 56-bit 5769AC3 *BASE V4R5M0 0.6 Cryptographic Access Proider 128-bit 5769AF1 *BASE V4R4M Adanced Function Printing Utilities for AS/ AP1 *BASE V4R5M Adanced DBCS Printer Support for AS/ AP1 option 1 V4R4M0 0.2 Adanced DBCS Printer Support for AS/400 - IPDS 5769AS1 *BASE V4R4M IBM WebSphere Application Serer for AS/ BR1 *BASE V4R4M Backup Recoery and Media Serices for AS/ BR1 option 1 V4R4M BRMS/400 - Network Feature 5769BR1 option 2 V4R4M BRMS/400 - Adanced Functions Feature 5769CB1 *BASE V4R4M ILE COBOL 5769CB1 option 1 V4R4M0 6.3 System/36 - Compatible COBOL for AS/ CB1 option 2 V4R4M0 5.6 System/38 - Compatible COBOL for AS/ CB1 option 5 V4R4M0 8.0 OPM COBOL for AS/ AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

233 Additional Installation Information Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release (continued) Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description 5769CB1 option 6 V4R4M *PRV ILE COBOL for AS/ CE1 *BASE V4R4M0 9.8 IBM AS/400 Client Encryption (40-bit) 5769CE2 *BASE V4R5M0 9.8 IBM AS/400 Client Encryption (56-bit) 5769CE3 *BASE V4R5M IBM AS/400 Client Encryption (128-bit) 5769CF1 *BASE V4R5M Retail Application Interface Suite 5769CF1 option 1 V4R5M0 - GSARelational Database Option 5763CL2 *BASE V3R2M Application Deelopment ToolSet Client Serer for AS/400 (for Windows 95/98/NT) 5763CL2 option 1 V3R2M CoOperatie Deelopment Enironment 5763CL2 option 2 V3R2M VisualAge RPG for Windows 5769CL3 *BASE V4R5M0 0 IBM VisualAge RPG and CODE/ CL3 option 1 V3R6M0 0 CoOperatie Deelopment Enironment 5769CL3 option 2 V3R6M0 0 VisualAge RPG for Windows 5769CM1 *BASE V4R4M0 7.8 Communications Utilities for AS/ CR1 *BASE V4R4M0 1.1 Cryptographic Support for AS/ CX2 *BASE V4R4M ILE C for AS/ CX5 *BASE V4R4M0 0.7 VisualAge for C++ for AS/ CX5 option 1 V4R4M VisualAge C++ Windows 95/NT Client 5769DB1 *BASE V4R4M System/38 Utilities for AS/ DC1 *BASE V4R3M DCE Base Serices for AS/ DC3 *BASE V4R3M DCE DES Library Routines for AS/ DCT *BASE V3R7M0 0.9 Language Dictionaries for AS/ DCT option 1 V3R7M0 2.4 Afrikaans Dictionary 5716DCT option 2 V3R7M0 4.3 Dutch Modern Dictionary 5716DCT option 3 V3R7M0 3.0 Brazilian Portuguese Dictionary 5716DCT option 4 V3R7M0 0.7 Catalan Dictionary 5716DCT option 5 V3R7M0 2.6 Danish Dictionary 5716DCT option 6 V3R7M0 6.2 Germany Dictionary 5716DCT option 7 V3R7M0 3.7 Swiss German Dictionary 5716DCT option 8 V3R7M0 1.9 Spanish Dictionary 5716DCT option 9 V3R7M0 2.3 French National Dictionary 5716DCT option 10 V3R7M0 2.2 French Canadian Dictionary 5716DCT option 11 V3R7M0 1.5 Greek Dictionary 5716DCT option 12 V3R7M0 1.1 Icelandic Dictionary 5716DCT option 13 V3R7M0 3.5 Italian Dictionary Appendix E. Additional Installation Information 215

234 Additional Installation Information Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release (continued) Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description 5716DCToption 14 V3R7M0 0.2 US Legal Dictionary 5716DCT option 15 V3R7M0 0.5 US Medical Dictionary 5716DCT option 16 V3R7M0 4.3 Dutch Dictionary 5716DCT option 17 V3R7M0 3.1 Norwegian Dictionary 5716DCT option 18 V3R7M0 2.1 Norwegian Nynorsk Dictionary 5716DCT option 19 V3R7M0 2.6 Portuguese Dictionary 5716DCT option 20 V3R7M0 0.1 Finnish Dictionary 5716DCT option 21 V3R7M0 2.8 Swedish Dictionary 5716DCT option 22 V3R7M0 1.3 UK English Dictionary 5716DCT option 23 V3R7M0 1.4 US English Dictionary 5716DCT option 24 V3R7M0 6.6 Russian Dictionary 5769DC1 *BASE V4R3M DCE Base Serices for AS/ DC3 *BASE V4R3M DCE DES Library Routines for AS/ DFH *BASE V4R5M CICS for AS/ DFH option 1 V4R2M0 4.8 V4R2M0 CICS for AS/400 - Sample Applications 5769DG1 *BASE V4R5M HTTP Serer for AS/ DP3 *BASE V4R5M DataPropagator Relational 7.0 for AS/ DS1 *BASE V4R4M0 4.6 Business Graphics Utility for AS/ EZ *BASE V4R5M0 0 EZ Set Up CD 5769FN1 *BASE V4R2M0 0.1 Ad Function Printing DBCS Fonts for AS/ FN1 option 1 V4R2M AFP DBCS Fonts - Japanese 5769FN1 option 2 V4R2M AFP DBCS Fonts - Korean 5769FN1 option 3 V4R2M AFP DBCS Fonts - Traditional Chinese 5769FN1 option 4 V4R2M0 8.4 AFP DBCS Fonts - Simplified Chinese 5769FN1 option 5 V4R2M0 3.4 AFP DBCS Fonts - Thai 5769FNT *BASE V4R2M0 0.2 Adanced Function Printing Fonts for AS/ FNT option 1 V4R2M0 5.1 AFP Fonts - Sonoran Serif 5769FNT option 2 V4R2M0 5.2 AFP Fonts - Sonoran Serif Headliner 5769FNT option 3 V4R2M0 4.9 AFP Fonts - Sonoran Sans Serif 5769FNT option 4 V4R2M0 5.1 AFP Fonts - Sonoran Sans Serif Headliner 5769FNT option 5 V4R2M0 3.5 AFP Fonts - Sonoran Sans Serif Condensed 5769FNT option 6 V4R2M0 2.8 AFP Fonts - Sonoran Sans Serif Expanded 5769FNT option 7 V4R2M0 3.7 AFP Fonts - Monotype Garamond 216 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

235 Additional Installation Information Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release (continued) Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description 5769FNT option 8 V4R2M0 4.1 AFP Fonts - Century Schoolbook 5769FNT option 9 V4R2M0 0.9 AFP Fonts - Pi and Specials 5769FNT option 10 V4R2M0 4.1 AFP Fonts - ITC Souenir 5769FNT option 11 V4R2M0 3.9 AFP Fonts - ITC Aant Garge Gothic 5769FNT option 12 V4R2M0 3.3 AFP Fonts - Math and Science 5769FNT option 13 V4R2M0 0.3 AFP Fonts - DATA1 5769FNT option 14 V4R2M0 0.8 AFP Fonts - APL2 5769FNT option 15 V4R2M0 0.2 AFP Fonts - OCR A and OCR B 5769FW1 *BASE V4R4M Firewall for AS/ JC1 *BASE V4R5M0 5.0 AS/400 Toolbox for Jaa 5769JS1 *BASE V4R4M Job Scheduler for AS/ JV1 *BASE V4R5M AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa 5769JV1 option 3 V4R5M Jaa Deeloper Kit JV1 option 4 V4R5M Jaa Deeloper Kit LNT *BASE V4R6 and V5R Domino/ LNT option 1 V4R6 and V5R Lotus Notes for Collaboration 5769LNT option 2 V4R6 and V5R0 - Domino Designer 5769LNT option 3 V4R6 and V5R0 8.0 Domino Per Serer CAL 5769MG1 *BASE V4R2M Managed System Serices for AS/ MQ2 *BASE V4R2M MQSeries for AS/ MQ2 option 1 V4R5M0 3.7 MQSeries for AS/400 - Samples 5769MQ2 option 2 V4R5M0 1.7 MQSeries for AS/400 - Admin Application 5769PD1 *BASE V4R3M Application Program Drier for AS/ PM1 *BASE V4R5M0 5.8 Performance Management/ PT1 *BASE V4R5M Performance Tools for AS/ PT1 option 1 V4R5M Performance Tools - Manager Feature 5769PT1 option 2 V4R5M Performance Tools - Agent Feature 5769PW1 *BASE V4R4M0 6.3 App De ToolSet for AS/400 - SEU 5769PW1 option 1 V4R4M App De ToolSet for AS/400 - Others 5769PW1 option 2 V4R4M App De ToolSet for AS/400 - App De Man 5769PW1 option 3 V4R4M App De ToolSetfor AS/400 - AppDict Ser 5769QU1 *BASE V4R5M0 5.3 Query for AS/ RD1 *BASE V4R5M0 7.7 OnDemand for AS/ RD1 option 1 V4R5M OnDemand Spooled File Archie Feature 5769RD1 option 2 V4R5M OnDemand Object Archie Feature Appendix E. Additional Installation Information 217

236 Additional Installation Information Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release (continued) Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description 5769RD1 option 3 V4R5M0 0.1 OnDemand Record Archie Feature 5769RD1 option 4 V4R5M0 5.0 OnDemand AnyStore Feature 5769RD1 option 5 V4R5M0 3.9 OnDemand Serer Feature 5769RD1 option 6 V4R5M OnDemand Client for Windows RD1 option 7 V4R5M OnDemand Client for OS/2 5769RD1 option 8 V4R5M OnDemand Client for 32 bit Windows 5769RD1 option 9 V4R5M0 - OnDemand Serer Trial Feature 5769RG1 *BASE V4R4M0 1.9 ILE RPG for AS/ RG1 option 1 V4R4M0 5.7 ILE RPG for AS/400 - S/36 compatible RPG 5769RG1 option 2 V4R4M0 4.8 ILE RPG for AS/400 - S/38 compatible RPG 5769RG1 option 5 V4R4M0 4.5 ILE RPG for AS/400 - RPG/ RG1 option 6 V4R4M0 7.6 ILE RPG for AS/400 - *PRV ILE RPG 5769SA2 *BASE V4R2M Integration Serices for FSIOP 5769SM1 *BASE V4R5M0 0.1 System Manager for AS/ SS1 *BASE V4R5M0 range to OS/400 - Operating System for AS/ SS1 option 1 V4R5M0 6.0 OS/400 - Extended Base Support 5769SS1 option 2 V4R5M OS/400 - Online Information 5769SS1 option 3 V4R5M0 1.3 OS/400 - Extended Base Directory Support 5769SS1 option 4 V4R5M OS/400 - S/36 and S/38 Migration 5769SS1 option 5 V4R5M OS/400 - System/36 Enironment 5769SS1 option 6 V4R5M0 3.3 OS/400 - System/38 Enironment 5769SS1 option 7 V4R5M0 6.4 OS/400 - Example Tools Library 5769SS1 option 8 V4R5M OS/400 - AFP Compatibility Fonts 5769SS1 option 9 V4R5M OS/400 - *PRV CL Compiler Support 5769SS1 option 11 V4R5M0 3.0 OS/400 - S/36 Migration Assistant 5769SS1 option 12 V4R5M OS/400 - Host Serers 5769SS1 option 13 V4R5M OS/400 - System Openness Includes 5769SS1 option 14 V4R5M0 4.1 OS/400 - GDDM 5769SS1 option 15 V4R5M0 9.6 OS/400 - Common Programming APIs Toolkit 5769SS1 option 16 V4R5M OS/400 - Ultimedia System Facilities 5769SS1 option 17 V4R5M0 0.5 PSF/400 Fax Support 5769SS1 option 18 V4R5M0 0.3 OS/400 - Media and Storage Extensions 5769SS1 option 21 V4R5M OS/400 - Extended NLS Support 5769SS1 option 22 V4R5M0 1.1 OS/400 - ObjectConnect 5769SS1 option 23 V4R5M0 2.7 OS/400 - OptiConnect 218 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

237 Additional Installation Information Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release (continued) Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description 5769SS1 option 25 V4R5M OS/400 - NetWare Enhanced Integration 5769SS1 option 26 V4R5M0 0.1 OS/400 - DB2 Symmetric Multiprocessing 5769SS1 option 27 V4R5M0 0.1 OS/400 - DB2 Multisystem 5769SS1 option 30 V4R5M OS/400 - Qshell Interpreter 5769SS1 option 31 V4R5M0 4.0 OS/400 - Domain Name System 5769SS1 option 32 V4R5M OS/400 - Directory Serices 5769SS1 option 33 V4R5M OS/400 - Priate Address Space Enironment 5769SS1 option 34 V4R5M OS/400 - Digital Certificate Manager 5769SS1 option 35 V4R5M0 9.9 OS/400 - CCA Cryptograhic Serice Proider 5769SS1 option 36 V4R5M0 0.1 PSF/ IPM Printer Support 5769SS1 option 37 V4R5M0 0.1 PSF/ IPM Printer Support 5769SS1 option 38 V4R5M0 0.1 PSF/400 Any Speed Printer Support 5769ST1 *BASE V4R5M DB2 Query Mgr and SQL DeKit for AS/ TC1 *BASE V4R5M TCP/IP Connectiity Utilities for AS/ VG1 *BASE V3R6M0 2.0 VisualAge Generator Serer for OS/ VI1 *BASE V4R3M VisualInfo for AS/ VI1 option 1 V4R3M0 9.0 ImagePlus VisualInfo Library and Object 5769VI1 option 2 V4R3M0 9.1 ImagePlus VisualInfo Object Serer 5769WP1 *BASE V4R2M OfficeVision for AS/ WP1 option 1 V4R2M OfficeVision - Text Search 5769WP1 option 2 V4R2M OfficeVision - Calendar 5769WP1 option 3 V4R2M0 2.2 OfficeVision - Mail 5769WP1 option 4 V4R2M OfficeVision - Editor 5769WSV *BASE V4R5M Windows Serer 5769WSV option 1 V4R5M0 9.9 Windows NT WSV option 2 V4R5M0 5.8 Windows XD1 *BASE V3R2M Client Access for Windows 95/NT 5769XE1 *BASE V4R5M Client Access/400 Express for Windows 5763XK1 *BASE V3R1M Client Access/400 Enhanced for Windows XK1 option 1 V3R1M Client Access - Win 3.1 SBCS 5763XK1 option 2 V3R1M Client Access - Win 3.1 DBCS 5763XK1 option 3 V3R1M Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Korean Appendix E. Additional Installation Information 219

238 Additional Installation Information Table 45. IBM Licensed Product Table for V4R5M0 OS/400 Release (continued) Product VxRxMx Storage (MB) Description 5763XK1 option 4 V3R1M Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Trad.Chinese 5763XK1 option 5 V3R1M Client Access - Win 3.1 PC5250 Simpl.Chinese 5769XW1 *BASE V4R5M0 0.2 AS/400 Client Access Family for Windows About Logical Partitions Below is a brief description of logical partitions. Also, below are some things to consider when installing logical partitions. For detailed information about logical partitions, refer to Logical Partitions within the System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T You can also iew this topic on the Internet: Also, refer to articles for planning and how-to information in the Logical Partitioning Web site: The points gien below concern: Logical partition concepts Steps to complete before you partition your system Strategy for backing up a logical partition Setting up an alternate IPL deice in a logical partition Logical Partition Concepts: Logical partitions distribute resources (processors, memory, and I/O deices) within a single AS/400 system, making it operate as if it was two or more independent systems. Consider these aspects: Each logical partition operates as an independent logical system. Each shares a few physical system attributes (system serial number, system model, and processor feature code). Each partition has dedicated hardware (processor, memory, and I/O deices). Distinct software resources exist and operate on hardware assigned to each partition. These software resources include separate copies of Licensed Internal Code, OS/400, and other licensed programs. Additionally, system alues, language feature codes, security, user data, software release, and program temporary fixes (PTFs) remain unique for each partition. Partitions may only exchange information using standard communication methods. They can use LAN, WAN, or traditional OptiConnect configurations. There is also a new inter-partition (irtual) OptiConnect. This does not require additional hardware, but you must order OptiConnect/400, 5769-SS1 option 23, or the OptiMoer PRPQ, 5799-FWQ. Software license behaior aries by software product. You can use the licenses in any partition, based on the system serial number or processor feature code. 220 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

239 Additional Installation Information Note: For information about software licensing on logical partitions, follow these links, in order, in the Information Center: System Administration, Aailability, and Maintenance; Logical Partitions; Learning about logical partitions; Logical partition concepts; software licensing. Logical partitions fall into two categories, primary or secondary. Each partitioned system has a single primary partition and one or more secondary partitions. Initially, the system has only the primary partition, and all resources are assigned to it. When you create additional partitions, you remoe resources from the primary partition and allocate them to the new secondary partition. The primary must remain actie for the secondaries to be actie. You must use care when deciding whether to allow significant work in the primary. Due to the significance of the primary partition you may want to restrict it to production management tasks. It may be to your adantage to keep the primary partition as small as possible (only use it to manage the system and secondary partitions). Secondary partitions are logical systems that are created from the hardware resources assigned directly to them. Secondary partitions are independent of each other. While each partition maintains a dependency on the primary, it operates similar to a stand alone system. Before you partition your system, it is absolutely essential that you complete the following steps. Note: You may install V4R5M0 on a secondary partition and keep V4R4M0 on the primary or any other secondary partition. Conersely, you may install V4R5M0 on a primary partition and keep the secondaries on V4R4M0. Install V4R4M0 or later release of the Licensed Internal Code. Install V4R4M0 or later release of the operating system. Install V4R4M0 or later release of the licensed programs. Run your system with the V4R4M0 or later release long enough to erify that your software runs correctly on the new release. Perform a logical partition product assurance check with your serice proider and with IBM. For more information, refer to the Logical Partitioning Web site: Then follow these links (in order): Planning for Logical Partitions; LPAR Hardware Planning Guide. Strategy for backing up a logical partition: The process of backing up a logical partition is fundamentally the same as backing up a system without logical partitions. Howeer, backing up logical partitions can be difficult without a strategy. Here are some back-up considerations so that you do not lose any of your important data. Each logical partition requires its own sae strategy. You cannot perform a single, entire system back-up. Instead, you need to back up each logical partition separately. Remember that a processor failure, main storage failure, failure in the primary partition, or disaster shuts down the entire system. You can generally perform these backups at the same time since each logical partition functions like an independent system. (Proided all logical partitions hae a dedicated remoable media deice.) Appendix E. Additional Installation Information 221

240 Additional Installation Information If any of your secondary partitions share a remoable media deice, you must back up each of these logical partitions sequentially. You must manually remoe and reassign the remoable media deice between the logical partitions after each sae. The system automatically maintains the configuration data for your logical partitions. This data is not saed to or restored from remoable media. Any function that requires you to restart [perform an initial program load (IPL)] the primary partition (like to apply program temporary fixes) requires special care. If you need to restart (perform an IPL) only a secondary partition, then you may do so safely. Attention! If you must restart the primary partition, power down all of the secondary partitions first. The following situations require you to perform primary partition IPL: Primary partition system restart (IPL) - Changing the minimum or maximum limits for any partition - Changing the bus ownership for any partition - Starting or stopping irtual OptiConnect Secondary partition system restart (IPL) - Increasing or decreasing the number of processors - Increasing or decreasing the amount of allocated memory Notes: 1. For a secondary partition, you change operation mode, IPL source, and iew SRC codes from the Partition Status display, not from the control panel. 2. If you will use Operations Console on a secondary partition, you must hae an electronic customer support resource (asynchronous communication resource) aailable on the same input-output processor (IOP). If you hae any APPC controls configured that use OptiConnect on the logical partition, you must ary off these controllers before performing the sae. If you do not ary off these controllers, they go into a failed status, are marked as damaged, and are not saed. For more information about OptiConnect, refer to the book OptiConnect for OS/400, SC Note: To use the irtual OptiConnect/400 between partitions requires a license to option 23 of the OS/400 operating system (5769-SS1 OptiConnect/400), or a license to Program Request for Price Quotation (PRPQ) 5799-FWQ Optimoer. You must perform each back-up from the console or a workstation that is attached to that logical partition. Follow the steps in the topic Saing Information on Your System in the Backup and Recoery, SC , as you back up each logical partition. The System Reference Code (SRC) An SRC is an 11, 11-2, or11-3 in the function display. The format of the SRC that you see depends on the system or serer on which you iew it. For systems or serers that are introduced with V4R4 and preious releases, an SRC consists of nine words. A word (usually a word = 4 bytes of sequential data) usually consists of 8 hexadecimal characters ("0"-"9" and "A"-"F"). The function number corresponds to the function on the control pane or irtual control panel (Work with Partition Status display) that shows the specific word of the SRC. For these systems the word number corresponds to the function number. For example, 222 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

241 only word "1" (typically called word "11" to match the function number) of the SRC appears in function "11". See Table 46 for the others. Following this table is a description of the SRC format for the newer serers. Table 46. Older (pre-v4r5m0 hardware) SRC Format and Terminology Function Word Word Number (common name) The new serers introduced concurrently with V4R5M0 hae a larger control panel than preious models. They can display up to four words at a time. In addition, the first word of the SRC can consist of American National Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) or hexadecimal characters. The other eight words of the SRC still consist of hexadecimal data. Function 11 still displays the first word of the SRC. Howeer, the first word can contain 8 to 32 characters (expanded word 1. In the Product Actiity Log (PAL) and other software displays, the SRC appears similar to earlier releases, except that word 1 may contain up to 32 characters. Words display as a number from 1to9instead of 11 to 19, thus disassociating the word number from the function number. Refer to the following table to see the new format. Table 47. New (V4R5M0 hardware) SRC Format Function Word expanded word 1 11 expanded word 1 11 expanded word Additional Installation Information For more details about SRCs, refer to the following in order, if you hae them: 1. Basic System Operation, Administration, and Problem Handling, SC AS/400 Information Center, System Administration, Aailability and Maintenance topic (for SRCs related to logical partitions) 3. Problem Analysis book for your system type (for serice representaties) Appendix E. Additional Installation Information 223

242 Additional Installation Information 4. AS/400 Serice Functions, SY (for serice representaties) 5. AS/400 Licensed Internal Code Diagnostic Aids - Volume 1, LY (for serice representaties) 6. OS/400 Diagnostic Aids, LY (for serice representaties) 224 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

243 Appendix F. Disk Configuration Warning and Error Messages You see a Disk Configuration Warning or Error Report when your system detects errors or warning conditions in your disk configuration. Following is an example: Disk Configuration Warning Report Type option, press Enter. 5=Display Detailed Report Press F10 to accept all the warnings and continue the IPL. The system will attempt to correct the warnings. OPT Warning _ xxxxxxxx xxxx xxxxxxxxx xxxxx xx xxxxx xxxxxxxx _ xxxxx_xx_xxxxx xxxxxx_ xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx More... F3=Exit to use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) F10=Accept warnings and continue the IPL You may see this display immediately after the hardware upgrade procedure or while you are installing the operating system. The action you should take for each message depends on the upgrade method that you are using. Table 48 lists the messages that you might see on the display and the actions that you should take. For each message, you can select option 5 (Display Detailed Report) to see more information about why the message occurred and what possible actions are aailable. Attention: Are you using Option 1? When you are installing the Licensed Internal Code by using option 1 from the Install the Licensed Internal Code (LIC) menu, disk configuration warning messages may mean that the system will not be able to recoer its ability to access the data on your disk units. Please do not ignore these messages or attempt to resole them without consulting the table. An incorrect response will probably require you to reload your data. Table 48. Disk Configuration Warning Messages Warning Messages Disk unit not formatted for optimal performance Unit possibly configured for PowerPC AS Your Action Option 1 (Restore Licensed Internal Code) Do the following: 1. Type a 5 (Display Detailed Report). 2. Write down which disk units should be reformatted. 3. Press F12 to return to the warning report display. 4. Press F10 to accept the warning and continue. You cannot reformat the disk units during the upgrade procedure. Contact software support before you proceed. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

244 Disk Configuration Messages Table 48. Disk Configuration Warning Messages (continued) Warning Messages Unit possibly configured for IMPI Missing disk configuration Unknown load source status Load source failure Restore load source Missing disk units in the configuration Restore in progress Deice parity protected units in exposed mode No alternaties aailable New disk configuration Incorrect Licensed Internal Code installed Change Load Source location Bad load source configuration Oerflowed ASPs Lower leel of protection Logical partition configuration error Your Action Option 1 (Restore Licensed Internal Code) Contact software support before you proceed. Contact hardware support before you proceed. Contact hardware support before you proceed. Contact hardware support before you proceed. Contact software support before you proceed. Contact hardware support before you proceed. View the online information and take the appropriate recoery action. You hae a failed unit in a parity set. You can ignore this message and continue the upgrade procedure. Howeer, you should contact hardware support immediately after the upgrade procedure. Contact software support before you proceed. Contact software support before you proceed. Contact hardware support before you proceed. The load source unit and its mirrored pair may be configured incorrectly. Contact hardware support before you proceed. Your load source unit may be configured incorrectly. Wait to correct the problem until after the upgrade process is complete. The Backup and Recoery, SC , book describes how to reset an oerflowed ASP. Ignore during the installation procedure. Howeer, you should analyze your mirrored configuration after the installation procedure. Do the following: 1. Type a 5 (Display Detailed Report). 2. Write down which disk units contain the error. 3. Press F12 to return to the warning report display. 4. Press F10 to accept the warning and continue. Refer to the logical partition topics in the book Backup and Recoery, SC Refer to the article Managing Logical Partitions in the AS/400 Information Center, SK3T-2027, or iew the Web site at: AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

245 Appendix G. National Language Version Feature Codes Use this appendix to locate the appropriate feature code for your primary or secondary language. Table 49. Feature Codes Primary Language Feature Code Secondary Language 1 Feature Code National Language Note: Labels on the installation media indicate the feature code for the primary language (29xx). When you install OS/400, the system prompts for the primary language in the form 29xx. The secondary language feature code is only used when ordering secondary languages (55xx). When you install the secondary language, you select a feature code, in the form 29xx, from a list of national language feature code identifiers. For example, if you ordered French as a secondary language, the secondary language media olume would be labeled N2928 and you would select 2928 from the list of feature codes when you install the secondary language Estonian Lithuanian Latian Vietnamese Lao Belgian English Sloenian Croatian Macedonian Serbian Cyrillic Portuguese Dutch Netherlands English Finnish Danish French German Spanish Italian Norwegian Swedish English Uppercase Support for Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) German Multinational Character Set French Multinational Character Set Italian Multinational Character Set English Uppercase Arabic Turkish Greek Icelandic Hebrew Japanese Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Belgian Dutch Belgian French Thai Bulgarian Czech Hungarian Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

246 Table 49. Feature Codes (continued) Primary Language Secondary Language 1 Feature Code Feature Code National Language Polish Russian Brazilian Portuguese Canadian French English Uppercase and Lowercase Support for Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Korean Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Traditional Chinese Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) Simplified Chinese Double-Byte Character Set (DBCS) (PRC) Romanian Sloakian Albanian Portuguese Multinational Character Set Farsi 228 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

247 Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew The procedures discussed in this appendix apply only to systems with V4R5M0 already installed. Here you will find information on: Install and Recoery Implications for Models 600 and 620 How to Set Up an Alternate Installation Deice How to Disable an Alternate Installation Deice How to Verify and Select an Alternate Installation Deice During a Manual Install To setup an alternate installation deice on a preious release, refer to the Software Installation book for that release. You can find earlier ersions on the AS/400 books Web site: Function in V4R5M0 allows you to perform installation and recoery procedures by using a combination of deices. Preiously, these types of actiities could only be performed using deices that were attached to the first system bus. (The first system bus connects to the serice processor IOP. Typically this is where the optical deice or tape deices that is used for installations are attached.) Now, you can use a combination of deices that are attached on the first system bus and on additional buses. The alternate installation deice is not attached to the first system bus. If you use this function, the system uses existing support (a deice on the first system bus) to install or recoer enough of the Licensed Internal Code required to perform an IPL from IPL source D. Then, using the new alternate installation deice support, the system continues the operation using media in the alternate installation deice. This function supports installation and recoery from tape media, such as SAVSYS or distribution tapes which you created, that contain Licensed Internal Code and may contain the operating system, licensed programs, and data. Some models, typically with attached 3590 tape deices, may see a performance improement when using an alternate installation deice for sae operations. Installation and Recoery Implications for Models 600 and 620 The alternate installation deice function can be used for any installation or recoery that requires replacing Licensed Internal Code. Some models may require the use of an alternate installation deice to install distribution tapes created by a central site or to recoer using a SAVSYS tape. In Models 600 and 620, the input-output processors (IOP) to which certain older tape deices attach require an expansion unit in order to use the deices. The following tape deices are affected: 2440, 3422, 3430, 9347, 3480, some models of 3490, and Other 7208 models and 3490 models Exx, C11, and C22 are supported without an expansion unit models C1A and C2A can be conerted to SCSI format which is supported without an expansion unit. If you want to use these older tape deices as alternate installation deices on models 600 and 620, you need the expansion unit and you need to set them up as alternate installation deices. Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

248 How to Set Up an Alternate Installation Deice Before you use an alternate installation deice, you must ensure that it is defined on a bus other than system bus 1, and you must enable the deice. You need to record and keep the logical address of the system bus and system card at which the alternate installation deice is attached. If you hae the deice set up on different bus and you do not hae this information, you will not be able to complete installations or recoeries. If you change the configuration of your system, you need to ensure that this information is correct before you start to use the alternate installation deice. Do the following to set the addresses and enable the alternate installation deice: Note: You need to know the password for Dedicated Serice Tools to perform this procedure. 1. Place the optical media containing the V4R5M0 Licensed Internal Code into the optical deice. 2. Use the control panel to set the mode to Manual. Then perform an IPL by using the Power Down System (PWRDWNSYS) command: PWRDWNSYS OPTION(*IMMED) RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(B). Note: Attention! If you do this on a primary partition when secondaries are actie, this will cause all partitions to IPL immediately. If you hae actie secondary partitions, power them off prior to using this procedure. 3. When the IPL or Install the System display appears, select option 3 (Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST)), and press Enter. 4. The Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) Sign On display appears. Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) Sign On Type choices, press Enter. DSTuser... QSECOFR DST password... System: SYSTEMA Sign on using the QSECOFR user profile. 5. The Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) display appears. Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) System: Select one of the following: 1. Perform an IPL 2. Install the operating system 3. Work withlicensed Internal Code 4. Work withdisk units 5. Work withdst enironment 6. Select DST console mode 7. Start a serice tool 8. Perform automatic installation of the operating system 9. Work withsae storage and restore storage 10. Work withremote serice support 11. Work withsystem partitions SYSTEMA Selection 5 F3=Exit F12=Cancel Type 5 (Work with DST Enironment), and press Enter. 6. The Work with DST Enironment display appears. 230 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

249 Select one of the following: 1. Actie serice tools 2. System deices 3. DST user profiles 4. System alues Work withdst Enironment System: SYSTEMA Selection 2 F3=Exit F12=Cancel Select option 2 (System deices), and press Enter. 7. The Work with System Deices display appears. Work WithSystem Deices Select one of the following: 1. Printers 2. Tape deices 3. Diskette deices 4. Optical deices 5. Alternate installation deice 6. Console mode System: SYSTEMA Select option 5 (Alternate installation deice), and press Enter. 8. The Alternate Installation Deice display appears. Alternate Installation Deice System: SYSTEMA Type option, press Enter. 1=Select 5=Display details Resource Serial Option Name Type Model Number Selected 5 TAP C * _ TAP C Type 5 (Display) next to the resource you want, and press Enter. 9. The Display Deice Details display appears. Display Deice Details Resource Serial Name Type Model Number TAP C Physical location: Location text...: Frame ID...: Card slot...: Logical address: SPD bus: System bus...: 0002 System board...: 0000 System card...: 0002 Storage: I/O bus number...: 0000 Controller...: 0007 Deice address...: 0000 F3=Exit F12=Cancel System: SYSTEMA You need to hae a record of the addresses assigned to the alternate installation deice for installing and recoering your system. Record the following information: Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew 231

250 Type/Model: System bus: Serial number: Type/Model: System bus: Serial number: Type/Model: System bus: Serial number: Notes: a. You may want to repeat this process to record the addresses for all alternate installation deices that appear in step 9 on page 231. b. If more than one alternate installation deice is defined, only one can be enabled Press Enter. The Select Alternate Installation Deice display appears. Type 1 (Select) next to the resource you want, and press Enter. You should see the following message at the bottom of the display: Alternate installation deice selected Press F3 (Exit) to return to the Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) display. Press F3 (Exit) again. The Exit Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) display appears. Exit Dedicated Serice Tools Select one of the following: 1. Exit Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) 2. Resume Dedicated Serice Tools System: SYSTEMA Type 1 (Exit Dedicated Serice Tools (DST)), and press Enter. 14. The next display you see is the IPL or Install the System display. Type 1 (Perform an IPL), and press Enter to complete the procedure. How to Disable an Alternate Installation Deice You may need to disable an alternate installation deice for one of the following reasons: To continue with an installation using optical media. To enable a different deice as an alternate installation deice. To correct the logical address if hardware has been moed or changed. 1. Use the control panel to set the mode to Manual. Then perform an attended IPL by using the command: PWRDWNSYS OPTION(*IMMED) RESTART(*YES) IPLSRC(B) Note: Attention! If you do this on a primary partition when secondaries are actie, this will cause all partitions to IPL immediately. If you hae actie secondary partitions, power them off prior to using this procedure. Note: An alternatie to this step is to use the control panel to select function 21. (Dedicated Serice Tools). If you use this alternatie, the next step is step When the IPL or Install the System display appears, select option 3 (Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST)), and press Enter. 3. The Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) Sign On display appears. Sign on using the QSECOFR user profile. 232 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

251 4. The Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) display appears. Type a5(work with DST Enironment), and press Enter. 5. The Work with DST Enironment display appears. Select option 2 (System deices), and press Enter. 6. The Work with System Deices display appears. Select option 5 (Work with alternate installation deice), and press Enter. 7. The Select Alternate Installation Deice display appears. Select Alternate Installation Deice System: SYSTEMA Type option, press Enter. 1=Select 5=Display details Resource Serial Option Name Type Model Number Selected _ TAP C * _ TAP C F2=Deselect deice F3=Exit F5=RefreshF12=Cancel Press F2 to deselect the deice. 8. You should see the following message at the bottom of the display: Alternate installation deice deselected 9. Press F3 (Exit) to return to the Use Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) display. 10. Press F3 (Exit) again. The Exit Dedicated Serice Tools (DST) display appears. Type 1 (Exit Dedicated Serice Tools (DST)), and press Enter. 11. The next display you see is the IPL or Install the System display. Type 1 (Perform an IPL), and press Enter to complete the procedure. How to Verify and Select an Alternate Installation Deice During a Manual Installation 1. The Install Licensed Internal Code display appears. Select one of the following: Install Licensed Internal Code System: XXXX 1. Install Licensed Internal Code 2. Work withdedicated Serice Tools (DST) 3. Define alternate installation deice 2. Type a 3, and press Enter. This will erify the address of an alternate installation deice attached to the system and determine whether it is enabled or disabled. Verifying and Selecting Alternate Installation Deice: The Select Alternate Installation Deice Bus display appears. Appendix H. Alternate Installation Deice-Oeriew 233

252 Select Alternate Installation Deice Bus Type Option, press Enter. 1=Select Option Bus Number Selected _ 1 _ * _ 4 _ 5 _ 6 _ 7 _ 8 _ 9 _ A _ B _ C _ D F2=Deselect Deice F3=Exit F12=Cancel System: XXXX More... a. b. Verify that the selected deice is on the correct system bus. Type 1 in the Options field next to the selected bus, and press Enter to iew information about the deice that is attached to the bus. This may take seeral minutes. If you see the message No alternate installation deice configured, wait one minute and refresh the screen. The Select Alternate Installation Deice display appears. Use this display to erify or change the resource name, type, model, and serial number for the deice. Select Alternate Installation Deice System: XXXX Type Option, press Enter. 1=Select 5=Details Resource Serial Option Name Type Model Number Selected _ TAP * c. Type 1 to select the deice and make any needed corrections to select, enable, or disable the deice. Press Enter to confirm the changes. d. The message Alternate installation deice selected appears. Press F3 to return to the Install Licensed Internal Code display. e. Type 1, and press Enter to install the Licensed Internal Code. End of Verifying and Selecting Alternate Installation Deice. 234 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

253 Appendix I. Notices This information was deeloped for products and serices offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, serices, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representatie for information on the products and serices currently aailable in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or serice is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or serice may be used. Any functionally equialent product, program, or serice that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. Howeer, it is the user s responsibility to ealuate and erify the operation of any non-ibm product, program, or serice. IBM may hae patents or pending patent applications coering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not gie you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation 500 Columbus Aenue Thornwood, NY U.S.A. For license inquiries regarding double-byte (DBCS) information, contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries, in writing, to: IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2-31 Roppongi 3-chome, Minato-ku Tokyo 106, Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such proisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-ibm Web sites are proided for conenience only and do not in any manner sere as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Licensees of this program who wish to hae information about it for the purpose of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged, should contact: Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

254 IBM Corporation Software Interoperability Coordinator 3605 Highway 52 N Rochester, MN U.S.A. Such information may be aailable, subject to appropriate terms and conditions, including in some cases, payment of a fee. The licensed program described in this information and all licensed material aailable for it are proided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement or any equialent agreement between us. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled enironment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating enironments may ary significantly. Some measurements may hae been made on deelopment-leel systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally aailable systems. Furthermore, some measurement may hae been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may ary. Users of this document should erify the applicable data for their specific enironment. Information concerning non-ibm products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly aailable sources. IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-ibm products. Questions on the capabilities of non-ibm products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. All statements regarding IBM s future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal without notice, and represent goals and objecties only. If you are iewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear. Trademarks 236 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both: ADSTAR Adanced Function Printing AFP APL2 Application Deelopment Application System/400 APPN AS/400 AS/400e C/400 CallPath/400 CICS Client Access COBOL/400 DataHub DataPropagator DB2

255 FlowMark FORTRAN/400 GDDM IBM ImagePlus Information Warehouse IPDS MQSeries Netfinity Operating System/400 Operational Assistant OS/2 OS/400 OfficeVision OfficeVision/400 Person to Person Print Serices Facility PowerPC PowerPC AS RPG/400 SOMobjects SystemView System/36 System/38 Ultimedia VisualAge VisualGen VisualInfo WebSphere 400 Jaa and all Jaa-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Lotus, Notes and Domino are trademarks of Lotus Deelopment Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, and serice names may be trademarks or serice marks of others. Appendix I. Notices 237

256 238 AS/400 Software Installation V4R5

257 Index Special Characters *BACKLEVEL installed status alues 69, 85, 98, 112, 132, 211 *BKLVLBASE installed status alues 211 *BKLVLOPT installed status alues 211 *COMPATIBLE installed status alues 69, 85, 98, 112, 132, 211 *ERROR installed status alues 211 *INSTALLED installed status alues 69, 85, 98, 112, 132, 211 *NOPRIMARY installed status alues 211 Numerics 2440 tape drie disconnect high-speed feature tape unit disconnect high speed feature SRC tape deice sharing with another system tape unit sharing with another system tape deice sharing with another system tape unit sharing with another system tape library tape library tape library AS1, WebSphere Application Serer CX2 ILE C for AS/ JV1 AS/400 Deeloper Kit for Jaa MG1 Managed System Serices for AS/ PM1, Performance Management/ PT1, Performance Tools for AS/ SM1, System Manager for AS/ SS1, OS/ SS1 Option 1 Extended Base Support, OS/ SS1 Option 3 IFS directories, OS/ SS1 Option 34 Digital Certificate Manager, OS/ TC1, TCP/IP Utilities XE1, Client Access Express for Windows 95/98/NT SS1 option 20 not supported SS1 option 24 not supported 19 57xx-SA3, NetWare xx-XZ1, OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/ tape library 58 A A12x 19xx SRC 87 A1xx 19xx SRC 87 A SRC 87 A SRC 87 A6xx 6xxx SRC 149 accessing softcopy information bookshelf 53 adding secondary language 135 V4R5M0 63 additional licensed programs, installing 127 additional storage requirements LPOs 47 PRPQs 47 Adanced 36 not supported 19 alternate installation deice how to disable 232 how to set up and enable 230 how to erify and select, during a manual installation 233 installing from 59 Models 600 and oeriew 229 APAR II application serers ending 61 apply installation preparation PTFs 37 apply program temporary fix (PTF) permanently 34 AS/400 information web site location xiii ASP (auxiliary storage pool) 16 automatic configuration 94, 107 automatic decompression of licensed programs 49 automatic install options 162 automatic installation creating and customizing an installation list 40 description of 5 recoery after SRC (system reference code) 89 replacing a release 63 starting after a failure 155 using 63 automatic installation (continued) what is installed 6 what is not installed 6 when not to use 40 whentouse 40 automatic IPL 162 auxiliary storage pool (ASP) 16 affect on installation time 186 auxiliary storage pools 40 B B SRC 87 B1xx 1933 SRC 87 B1xx 4504 SRC 87 B1xx 4505 SRC 87 B1xx 4507 SRC 87 B2pp 1310 SRC 87 B2pp 1320 SRC 87 B2pp 3110 SRC 87 B2pp 3200 SRC 87 B2xx xxxx SRC 87 B A SRC 87 B SRC 87, 149 B B F SRC 151 B B900 37FF SRC 151 B SRC 87 B900 xxxx SRC 149, 151 backing up logical partition sae strategy 221 base program 214 Blank installed status alues 211 blank display 211 bookshelf 52 C CALL QSFWINV 174 changing primary language planning information 53 using DBCS or SBCS 101 affects installation time 53 using secondary language media 119 erifying console deice 54 checking disk storage space requirements 47 checking cross reference files 50 checking for held files optical library 34 checklist for adding a new disk unit 16 adding licensed programs and secondary languages 14 changing the primary language 15 installing a cumulatie program temporary fix (PTF) package 16 installing a hardware upgrade 16 installing software on a new system 13 Copyright IBM Corp. 1997,

258 checklist for (continued) replacing a release with V4R5M0 12 replacing a release within a logical partition 13 CHGMSGQ (Change Message Queue) command 41 cleaning tape drie 58 cleaning up system reduce disk storage requirements 45 system storage space deleting products 46 reduce disk storage requirements 46 user profiles 47 Client Access/ Client Access Express for Windows 95/98/NT, 5769-XE1 180 Client Access family 179 Client Access products, not supported in V4R5M0 180 command, CL 38, 177 CHGMSGQ (Change Message Queue) 41 Conert Performance Data (CVTPRFDTA) 177 Create Optical Deice (CRTOPTDEV) 154 Create Tape Deice (CRTDEVTAP) 154 Delete Library (DLTLIB) when not to use 183 Delete Licensed Program (DLTLICPGM) 54 Display Software Resources (DSPSFWRSC) 162 End Subsystem (ENDSBS) 50 restore licensed program (RSTLICPGM) command to install additional licensed programs 133 to install secondary languages 138 Sae System (SAVSYS) 40 SAVSYS (Sae System) 40 Send Network File (SNDNETF) 35 SNDNETF (Send Network File) 35 Start Performance Monitor (STRPFRMON) 51 Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) 142 Work with Licensed Information (WRKLICINF) option 1, add license key information 173 option 2, change license key information 174 Work with Object Owner (WRKOBJOWN) 47 Work with Performance Collection (WRKPFRCOL) 51 Work with Spool File (WRKSPLF) 153 Work with Spooled Files (WRKSPLF) AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 command, CL 38, 177 (continued) Work with System Values (WRKSYSVAL) 32 completing installation process 141 completion status display log for messages using option compressed object 49 concepts compatible licensed programs 4 enabling AS/400 mixed releases 4 new licensed programs 4 configuration 94, 107 automatic 94, 107 Disk Configuration Warning Report 225 console deice checking 54 erifying address 57 contents of a new release 185 conentions and terminology xi conersion times 205 database cross reference files 206 conersions during installation estimating affect on installation time 205 Conert Performance Data (CVTPRFDTA) command 177 CPA3DD2 message 154 CPA3DD3 message 154 CPA3DDD message 154 CPA3DDF message 154 CPA3DE1 message 154 CPA9E1B message 174 CPD32B0 message 154 CPD3713 message 154 CPD3D82 message 154 CPF327E message 154 CPF371C message 154 CPF371D message 154 CPF371E message 154 CPF3731 message 154 CPF3D80 message 154 CPF3D81 message 154 CPF3D82 message 154 CPF3D83 message 154 CPF3D84 message 154 CPF3D85 message 154 CPF3D86 message 154 CPF3D8B message 154 CPF3D8C message 154 CPF3D8E message 154 CPF3D8F message 154 CPF3D90 message 154 CPF3D91 message 154 CPF3D96 message 154 CPF3DD3 message 154 CPI3D82 message 154 CPI3D84 message 154 CPI3D85 message 154 CPZ2003 message 151 CPZ2004 message 151 CPZ2005 message 151 CPZ2010 message 151 CPZ2011 message 151 CPZ2022 message 151 CPZ2023 message 151 CPZ20xx message 149, 151 creating and customizing an installation list 40 cross-reference summaries ordering additional 26 cross-reference summaries for PTFs 26 cross references 205 estimating time to conert 206 CRTDEVTAP (Create Tape Deice) command 154 CRTOPTDEV (Create Optical Deice) command 154 cumulatie PTF package media distribution set 172 ordering 38 D data exchanging between systems 35 database 205 database cross reference files estimating time to conert 205, 206 database files 50 decompressed object 49 dedicated serice tools (DST) configure disk protection 78 delete licensed program from a list 164 Delete Library (DLTLIB) command when not to use 183 Delete Licensed Program (DLTLICPGM) command 54 deleting 180 changes to IBM-supplied objects 55 licensed programs and optional parts making more disk space aailable 46 notes about 182 using option using the DLTLICPGM command 182 licensed programs or products 46 logical files created oer IBM-supplied physical files in QSYS 57 secondary languages using option with Delete Licensed Program (DLTLICPGM) 54 deice configuration naming 94, 107 deice parity protection 16 digital ersatile disk (DVD) definition xi disk configuration warning messages 225 warning report 225 Disk Configuration Warning Report 225 disk storage space requirements checking 47 display blank 211

259 display (continued) licensed programs for target release 8 Display Software Resources (DSPSFWRSC) command 162 displaying installed licensed programs using option installed secondary languages using option distribution media creating and customizing an installation list 41 label description 28 loading 63 using to prepare for install 28 erifying order with 28 distribution set 172 distribution set, media 171 informational set 172 keyed products 172 locked set 172 PTFs 172 secondary language 172 single set 172 standard set 172 DLTLIB (Delete Library) command when not to use 183 documentation shipped with the new relase 24 DSPSFWRSC (Display Software Resources) command 162 DST (dedicated serice tools) configure disk protection 78 E ending application serers 61 ENDSBS (End Subsystem) command 50 error disk configuration 225 error during install recoery procedures 147 error message during installation 151, 154 estimate disk storage space requirements 47 installation time 50 storage requirements for system ASP 8, 47, 48 estimating conersion time 205 installation time 185 common methods 185 Ex SRC 151 Ex10 001A SRC 151 example determining additional auxiliary storage 188 ealuating release-leel interoperability 35 software inentory tool (SWIT) 175 exchange objects in a network 36 exchanging data or objects release-leel interoperability between systems 35 F features, adding 127 File System IOP (FSIOP) other names for xi G GO LICPGM (Go Licensed Program) menu 161 completion status options using option licensed programs options using option using option using option using option manual install options using option redistribution options 168 related commands using option using option secondary languages options using option using option using option group PTF 22 description 39 how to locate 39 ordering 39 H hardware considerations for software installation 57 high-speed feature 2440 tape drie 58 I IBM-supplied objects deleting changes to 55 duplicated 57 saing changes to 55 identifying current national language support 28 information ordering additional current cumulatie PTF package 38 Memo to Users and Read This First 25 preentie serice planning (PSP) 26 shipped with the new relase 24 Information Center location xii, xiii informational set 172 initial program load (IPL) automatic description 162 reasons for primary partition 222 for secondary partition 222 when installing operating system on new AS/400 system 92 Initialize System (INZSYS) command recoery information 157 install licensed program from a list 163 licensed programs from a list 163 install option displaying, installing, deleting, and saing from a list 162 installing all using option install timing information 185 installation automatic options 162 choosing method 40 completing 141 error message 151 estimating installation time 50, 185 failed recoery procedures 147 for a new secondary logical partition 113 performance considerations 186 multiprocess 186 multiprocess (licensed programs) 186 tips 50 processes 186 recoery procedures 147 time for licensed programs 197 description 196 installation, automatic adding V4R5M0 63 recoery after SRC (system reference code) 89 replacing a release 63 starting after a failure 63 using 63 installation, manual recoery after SRC (system reference code) 89 installation, software concepts 4 procedures oeriew 5 process oeriew 3 installation concepts 4 installation deice naming conentions 59 installation list creating and customizing 40 creating and customizing from distribution media 41 merging additional licensed programs into 44 single set licensed programs 40 installation preparation PTFs required before installing 37 Index 241

260 installation profile, working with 168 installation recoery during replace a release after SRC (system reference code) 89 installation time conditions that affect aailable disk unit storage 186 changing SBCS to DBCS or DBCS to SBCS 53 data protection mechanisms 205 installation deice 186 installation process 186 licensed programs being installed 186 main storage aailable 186, 187 processing unit capacity 186 user data conersions 186 estimating 50, 185 checklist 188 common methods 185 for the operating system 189 work sheet 192 tips for making the most of your time 50 installed status alues licensed program 69, 85, 98, 112, 132, 211 installing 63 additional features 127 additional licensed programs 127 before you begin 127 using Work with Licensed Programs menu 128 Licensed Internal Code for a secondary partition 114 licensed programs on a new system with operating system 94 on a new system without operating system 108 licensed programs and optional parts using option using option new release software PTFs needed before 37 operating system 101 optional parts of licensed programs 127 preparation checklist 19 preparing for erifying order 27 PTFs for logical partitions 19 resoling pending database resynchoronizations before 60 secondary language 135 before you begin 135 secondary languages using Work with Licensed Programs menu 135 secondary languages using option softcopy information bookshelf finding information about 52 planning for 52 using a tape library 58 using multiprocess process AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 installing 63 (continued) where to begin 11 installing, software changing primary language 101 new AS/400 system with operating system before you begin 91 new AS/400 system without operating system before you begin 101 on a new system 5 on a new system with operating system 91 on a new system without operating system 101 installing concurrently 186 installing software license keys 173 Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/400 definition xi other names for xi stopping 61 Integrated PC Serer (IPCS) other names for xi interim program temporary fix (PTF) description 39 International Program License Agreement (IPLA) 171 interoperability definition 35 exchanging data or objects 35 network 36 release-leel 36 release leelbetween systems 35 inentory tool, software 174 INZSYS (Initialize System) command recoery information 157 IPL (initial program load) reasons for primary partition 222 for secondary partition 222 when installing operating system on new AS/400 system 92 IPLA (International Program License Agreement) 171 K key, software license description 173 keyed IBM software products, orderable display or print 174 keyed products locked set 172 keys, obtaining and installing software license keys 173 L libraries moed or duplicated 33 optical checking for held files 34 library moed or duplicated 56 QINMEDIA 55 QINPRIOR 55 QINSYS 55 license information working with 142 License Information Document (LID) 171 license key erifying 28 license key, software description 173 license keys, obtaining and installing 173 Licensed Internal Code installing 114 recoery 149 replacing a release 63 replacing when adding V4R5M0 72 storage extension 37 licensed product table storage requirements 214 licensed program add 6 automatic decompression of 49 contents of a new release 185 decompression affects installation time 49 delete from a list 164 deleting 46 notes about 182 procedures for 183 using option , 183 using the DLTLICPGM command 182 estimating conersion time 205 estimating installation time work sheet 192 general information 171 install from a list 163 install timing information 185 installation on a new system with operating system 94 on a new system without operating system 108 installation time information 197 description 196 installed status alues 69, 85, 98, 112, 132, 211 installing on a new system with operating system 91 on a new system without operating system 101 installing additional 127 installing concurrently 186 installing new limitations when replacing a release 6 installing one or more 127 installing when changing primary language using secondary language media 122 list of installation notes 175 sizes and optional parts 175 optional parts of the operating system 185

261 licensed program (continued) QGPL and QUSRSYS 185 remoing 180 restoring using option using the RSTLICPGM command 163 saing using option using the SAVLICPGM command 166 sizes 175 storage requirements 48, 175 licensed program ID 214 licensed programs no-charge 43 licensed programs, not supported in V4R5M0 177 licensed programs, optional parts of 175 licensed programs, transferring International Program License Agreement (IPLA) 171 LICPGM menu 50 Prepare for Install option 46 using to install additional licensed programs 128 to install secondary languages 135 LID (License Information Document) 171 list creating and customizing an installation list 40 group PTF, locating 39 licensed products for V4R5M0 214 licensed programs not found on media 8 merging additional licensed programs into installation list 44 loading distribution media 63 PTFs for logical partitions 19 locked set 172 logical file deleting 57 logical partition backing up 221 brief description 221 concepts 220 detailed description 220 loading and installing PTFs 19 necessary steps 221 reasons for restart primary partition 222 secondary partition 222 secondary installation for a new 113 installing Licensed Internal Code 114 software licensing 220 web site location xii, xiii what to install 5 logical partitions terminology xi LPOs additional storage requirements 47 M making more disk space aailable apply program temporary fixes (PTFs) 45 deleting unused licensed programs and optional parts 46 managing program temporary fixes (PTFs) with SystemView System Manager/ manual installation considerations for changing primary language 53 description of 5 for new secondary logical partition 113 for secondary logical partition 113 recoery after SRC (system reference code) 89 replacing release adding V4R5M0 71 starting after a failure 156 what is installed 6 what is not installed 6 whentouse 40 media description report changes to 213 contents 213 programs not listed in 42 using 213 to create master installation list 213 erifying order with 213 media distribution set 171 informational set 172 keyed products 172 locked set 172 PTFs 172 secondary language 172 single set 172 standard set 172 Memo to Users description 24 locating 24 menu Go Licensed Program (GO LICPGM) 161 message, error during installation 151, 154 message queue 82 working with 82 migration 94, 107 mirrored protection 16, 40 mixed release enironment oeriew 7 multiprocess installation 186 additional requirements 187 conditions that affect installation time 186 determining additional auxiliary storage example 188 oeriew 186 multiprocess installation 186 (continued) using 187 N naming conentions 59 installation deice 59 national language software distribution media 27 national language support planning for 53 National Language Support oeriew 7 national language ersion feature code determining installed 28 list 227 where used 102, 136 NetWare, 57xx-SA3 177 network interoperability exchange objects in a network 36 networks, systems in a resoling pending database resynchronizations 60 new release contents of 185 NLV 7 no-charge licensed programs 43 non-ibm tape deice installing from 59 not supported 5769SS1 (OS/400) option SS1(OS/400) option Adanced OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/400, 57xx-XZ1 19 OS/400 Integration for Noell NetWare, 57xx-SA3 19 OS/400 Lotus Notes Enhanced Integration 19 O object decompression effect on installation time 49 effect on performance 49 storage needed for 49 exchanging between systems 35 shipped in compressed form 49 ObjectConnect/400 PTF (program temporary fix) for network interoperability 36 obtaining software license keys 173 operating system estimating installation time 189 installing 101 installing software on a new system 91 recoery 150 replacing when adding V4R5M0 78 Operating System/400 replacing a release 63 Operating System/400 (OS/400) 78 optical library checking for held files 34 Index 243

262 optional parts of licensed programs installing 127 optional parts of the licensed programs 180 OS/2 Warp Serer for AS/400, 57xx-XZ1 177 not supported 19 OS/400, 5769-SS1 176 OS/400, 5769-SS1 Option 1 Extended Base Support 176 OS/400, 5769-SS1 Option 3 IFS directories 176 OS/400, 5769-SS1 Option 34 Digital Certificate Manager 176 OS/400 (Operating System/400) 78 OS/400 Integration for Noell NetWare, 57xx-SA3 not supported 19 OS/400 Lotus Notes Enhanced Integration not supported 19 OS/400 option 20 not supported 19 OS/400 option 24 not supported 19 oeriew the software installation process 3, 5 P packaging 179 PC Support/ performance collection working with 51 information gathering 51 installation considerations 186 installation time 185 licensed program size 175 multiprocess 50 tips for installing 50 Performance Management/400, 5769-PM1 177 performance monitor starting 51 Performance Tools for AS/400, 5769-PT1 177 permanently apply program temporary fix (PTF) 34 planning task applying required PTFs 37 checking storage requirements 47 choosing automatic or manual installation 40 cleaning tape drie 57, 58 cleaning up system storage space 45 customizing the installation list 27 determining alternate IPL deice 57, 59 ensuring QLPINSTL in system distribution directory 50 QSECOFR in system distribution directory 50 estimating installation time AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 planning task (continued) ealuating the affect of the new release 35 gathering performance information 51 hardware considerations before installing software 57 ordering the current cumulatie PTF package 38 permanently apply PTFs 34 preparation checklist 19 preparing media 57 to install softcopy information 52 PTFs needed before installing V4R5M0 37 reiew information 24 saing and deleting changes to IBM-supplied objects in libraries 55 saing system 62 erify console address 57 erifying your software order 27 whentodo 19 POE (Proof of Entitlement) 171 Prepare for Install display estimate storage requirements for system ASP 47, 48 option descriptions display licensed programs for target release 8 estimate storage requirements for system ASP 8 list licensed programs not found on media 8 erify system objects 8 work with licensed programs for target release 8 work with licensed programs to delete 8 work with user profiles 8 oeriew 7 Prepare for install option creating and customizing an installation list 40 LICPGM menu 46 preenting problems 2440 tape drie 58 blank display 211 optical media 57 sharing a tape deice 58 preentie serice planning (PSP) ordering information 26 primary language 113 changing 101, 119 planning considerations 53 using secondary language media 119 erifying console deice 54 changing the 40 definition 53 feature codes, list 227 identifying 28 primary logical partition backing up 221 brief description 221 necessary steps 221 problem handling, system 150 problem recoery 147 power failure during installation 147 where to begin automatic installation 147 manual installation 147 program number 214 program temporary fix (PTF) apply permanently 34 applying immediate PTFs temporarily or permanently 34 before installing 37 commands 169 for network interoperability 36 ObjectConnect/ installation preparation PTFs 37 interim, description 39 Internet downloads xiii loading and installing for logical partitions 19 managing PTFs with SystemView System Manager/ media distribution set 172 needed before installing V4R5M0 37 ordering Memo to Users 25 ordering cross reference summaries 26 ordering the current cumulatie package 38 preious release sae files deleted 34 recoery 152 Proof of Entitlement (POE) 171 PRPQs additional storage requirement 47 PTF (program temporary fix) apply permanently 34 applying immediate PTFs temporarily or permanently 34 before installing 37 commands 169 for network interoperability 36 ObjectConnect/ installation preparation PTFs 37 managing PTFs with SystemView System Manager/ media distribution set 172 needed before installing V4R5M0 37 ordering Memo to Users 25 ordering cross reference summaries 26 ordering the current cumulatie package 38 preious release sae files deleted 34 recoery 152 PTF program temporary (fix) interim, description 39 PTF shipping information letter description 25 Q QDCPOBJx system jobs 49 QLPINSTL user ID checking if in system distribution directory 50

263 QLPINSTL user ID (continued) enrolling in system distribution directory 50 QSECOFR user ID checking if in system distribution directory 50 enrolling in system distribution directory 50 restrictions installing with a secondary language library 50 operating in System/36 enironment 50 QSFWINV 174 R Read This First description 24 locating 24 recoery 147 after SRC (system reference code) for automatic installation 89 for manual installation 89 during replace a release after SRC (system reference code) 89 where to begin after failed installation 147 recoery procedures after failed installation 147 automatic installation starting automatic installation process again 155 starting point 148 INZSYS recoery information 157 Licensed Internal Code recoery 149 licensed programs, PTFs, and secondary language recoery 152 operating system recoery 150 PTF (program temporary fix) 152 sae system recoery 147 secondary language 152 starting from a power off condition 158 starting manual installation process again 156 where to begin 147 redistribution 168 release, new contents of 185 release leel software distribution media 27 release leel interoperability 35 remoing licensed programs 180 replacing Licensed Internal Code 72 licensed programs 5 replacing a release choosing automatic or manual installation 40 secondary language considerations 54 using automatic installation 63 before you begin 63 erifying installation 68 using manual installation adding V4R5M0 71 replacing a release (continued) using manual installation (continued) before you begin 71 changing primary language 53, 71 Licensed Internal Code 72 replacing licensed programs 81 replacing operating system 78 erifying installation 84 what is installed 6 what is not installed 6 replacing a release method handling new licensed programs 6 resource ID 214 restart (initial program load) reasons for primary partition 222 for secondary partition 222 restore licensed program (RSTLICPGM) command 133, 138 restoring licensed programs and optional parts using option using the RSTLICPGM command 163 restricted state required for installing IBM-supplied libraries QGPL and QUSRSYS 127 Managed System Serices for AS/ OS/400 option 12 - Host Serers 127 System Manager for AS/ setting the system 158 RSTLICPGM (restore licensed program) command 133, 138 S Sae System (SAVSYS) command 40 saing changes to IBM-supplied objects 55 licensed programs and optional parts using option , 166 using the SAVLICPGM command 166 system 62 SAVSYS (Sae System) command 40 secondary language adding 135 considerations 54 definition 53 deleting library from library list 50 feature codes, list 227 identifying 28 installing 135 media distribution set 172 recoery 152 using 53 using options on GO LICPGM menu 166 secondary logical partition backing up 221 brief description 221 installation for a new 113 installing Licensed Internal Code 114 secondary logical partition (continued) installing (continued) Technical Support Center (TSC) contact information 113 necessary steps 221 security leel 93, 107 Send Network File (SNDNETF) command 35 send PTF order (SNDPTFORD) command 38 set, informational 172 set, locked 172 set, single 172 set, standard 172 setting the usage limit 174 single-process installation 186 single set 172 skipping a release leel of OS/ SNDNETF (Send Network File) command 35 SNDPTFORD (send PTF order) command 38 softcopy information accessing 53 location 52 planning considerations 53 planning to install 52 software distribution media national language on 27 release leel on 27 software installation changing primary language 101 concepts 4 installation, oeriew 5 on a new system 5 on a new system with operating system 91 before you begin 91 on a new system without operating system 101 process oeriew 3 software inentory tool (SWIT) 174 software license key description 173 erifying 28 software license keys, obtaining and installing 173 SRC (system reference code) common, replace a release correctie action 86 description 222 during replace a release installation recoery 89 standard set 172 Start Performance Monitor (STRPFRMON) command 51 starting automatic installation again 155 from a power off condition 158 manual installation process again 156 performance monitor 51 starting point for automatic installation recoery 148 status alues licensed program installation 69, 85, 98, 112, 132, 211 Index 245

264 stopping Integrated Netfinity Serer for AS/ storage deleting licensed programs 46 extension, Licensed Internal Code 37 factors that affect compressed objects 49 making more disk space aailable 45 new release licensed programs and optional parts 175 requirements 175 licensed product table 214 storage requirements 48 checking disk storage space requirements 47 licensed product table 214 STRPFRMON (Start Performance Monitor) command 51 supported releases for software upgrades 11 SWIT (software inentory tool) 174 system definition xi System/36 enironment 94, 107 system ASP 40 system console 54 system objects 50 system password 211 system problem handling 150 system recoery after failed installation 147 system reference code (SRC) common, replace a release correctie action 86 description 222 during replace a release installation recoery 89 system alues setting before installing 32 erifying before installing 33 SystemView System Manager/400 managing program temporary fixes (PTFs) 34 T tape deice affecting installation time 186 sharing a 3480 or tape drie cleaning 58 disconnecting 2440 high-speed feature 58 tape library installing from a 58 tape unit affecting installation time 186 Technical Studio web site location xiii Technical Support Center (TSC) contact information 113 terminology and conentions xi time 185 time information for installing licensed programs AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 time information (continued) description 196 transferring licensed programs International Program License Agreement (IPLA) 171 two-phase commit integrity 60 U UBP (user-based priced) products 174 usage limit user-based priced (UBP) products 174 user-based priced (UBP) products 174 user profile cleaning up 47 using automatic installation 63 manual installation adding V4R5M0 71 media description report 213 V V3R7M0 upgrade alternate installation deice 40 V4R5M0, replacing using automatic installation 63 erify installation using option license key 28 system objects 8 W warning disk configuration 225 where to begin 11 adding new disk units 16 to an existing system 16 changing the primary language 15 installing a hardware upgrade 16 installing additional licensed programs 14 installing additional optional parts 14 installing cumulatie program temporary fix (PTF) package 16 installing secondary language 14 installing software on a new system 13 replacing a release with V4R5M0 11 where to begin recoery after failed installation 147 work sheet for estimating installation time 192 work with licensed programs for target release 8 licensed programs to delete 8 user profiles 8 Work with License Information (WRKLICINF) command 142 Work with Licensed Information (WRKLICINF) command 173, 174 Work with Licensed Program menu 46 Work with Licensed Programs (GO LICPGM) menu options 161 Work with Licensed Programs menu using to install additional licensed programs 128 to install secondary languages 135 Work with Performance Collection (WRKPFRCOL) command 51 Work with Spool File (WRKSPLF) command 153 Work with System Values (WRKSYSVAL) command 32 working with license information 142 WRKLICINF (Work with License Information) command 142 WRKLICINF (Work with Licensed Information) command 173, 174 WRKOBJOWN (Work with Object Owner) command 47 WRKPFRCOL (Work with Performance Collection) command 51 WRKSPLF (Work with Spool File) command 153 WRKSPLF (Work with Spooled Files) command 47

265 Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You AS/400e Software Installation Publication No. SC Oerall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book? Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied Oerall satisfaction h h h h h How satisfied are you that the information in this book is: Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied Accurate h h h h h Complete h h h h h Easy to find h h h h h Easy to understand h h h h h Well organized h h h h h Applicable to your tasks h h h h h Please tell us how we can improe this book: Thank you for your responses. May we contact you? h Yes h No When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusie right to use or distribute your comments in any way it beliees appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Name Address Company or Organization Phone No.

266 Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You SC SC Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape BUSINESS REPLY MAIL FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE IBM CORPORATION ATTN DEPT HWY 52 N ROCHESTER MN NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape Cut or Fold Along Line Cut or Fold Along Line

267

268 Printed in the United States of America on recycled paper containing 10% recoered post-consumer fiber. SC

269 Spine information: AS/400e AS/400 Software Installation V4R5 Version 4